Produced by Juliet Sutherland, Douglas L. Alley, III and
the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at
http://www.pgdp.net











  THE

  SILENT READERS


  BY

  WILLIAM D. LEWIS, Pd.D., Litt.D.

  FORMERLY DEPUTY SUPERINTENDENT, DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC INSTRUCTION
  COMMONWEALTH OF PENNSYLVANIA

  ALBERT LINDSAY ROWLAND, A.M., Ph.D.

  DIRECTOR BUREAU OF TEACHER TRAINING AND CERTIFICATION, DEPARTMENT
  OF PUBLIC INSTRUCTION, COMMONWEALTH OF PENNSYLVANIA

  AND

  ETHEL H. MALTBY GEHRES

  CO-AUTHOR OF THE WINSTON READERS


  ILLUSTRATED BY
  FREDERICK RICHARDSON
  AND
  EDWIN J. PRITTIE


  SIXTH READER


  THE JOHN C. WINSTON COMPANY

  CHICAGO
  SAN FRANCISCO
  PHILADELPHIA
  DALLAS
  TORONTO, CAN.




  Copyright, 1920, by
  THE JOHN C. WINSTON COMPANY

  COPYRIGHT IN GREAT BRITAIN AND THE
  BRITISH DOMINIONS AND POSSESSIONS


  PRINTED IN THE U. S. A.




INTRODUCTION


=The purpose of this series.= This series of readers is definitely
designed to provide working material for the development of efficient
"silent reading". It is not planned to compete with the many excellent
series of readers now available. The authors believe that it will
efficiently supplement the well-nigh universal school practice of
conducting all reading lessons aloud.

=Oral reading not sufficient.= In the majority of classes the pupils
are all supplied with the same text. One pupil reads aloud while the
others are supposed to follow his reading silently. When he has
finished his portion of the text, the teacher or the pupils make
corrections of his pronunciation or phrasing, and the teacher may ask
questions or add comments or explanations. This incentive to adequate
expression by the reader is lacking because his classmates all have
the text before them; it is natural for the hearers to read on ahead
of the oral reader if the material is of interest; and it is perfectly
easy for them to gaze absently at the book while employing their minds
with matters wholly unrelated to the class exercise. Perhaps most
important of all, reading aloud is an experience of rare occurrence
outside the classroom, while silent reading is a universal daily
experience for all but the illiterate.

The mechanics of reading are fairly well mastered in the third--some
authorities say the second--grade. Some oral reading is doubtless
desirable beyond these grades, but the relative amount should diminish
rapidly.

Experts have recognized the importance of silent reading for many years.
Briggs and Coffman showed its value in their book, "Reading in Public
Schools," published in 1908. Studies in this field have been made by
Gray, Starch, Judd, Courtis, Monroe, Kelly, and many others. They have
made no attempt to deny that oral reading has a place in the curriculum,
but have merely pointed out that from the third grade on its place is
less and less important in comparison with silent reading.

=Reading to get the thought quickly.= Once the mechanics of reading
are mastered, the problem becomes one of speed and accuracy in
thought-getting. Upon these two qualities depends the pupil's progress
in school and his use of the deluge of ideas that appeal only through
the printed page. If he reads and understands, if he quickly grasps
the important idea from a mass of details, if he arranges the
relations of the ideas presented, we say that he is good in geography,
history, science, or mathematics. If he comprehends only slowly or
fails to understand, he is a dullard or a defective.

=Speed usually goes with comprehension.= At first glance it would seem
that comprehension would be inversely proportional to speed; that is,
the greater the speed the poorer the comprehension and _vice versa_.
The standard tests of Gray, Courtis, Kelly, and Monroe, however, which
have been given to thousands of children, prove exactly the reverse.
The rapid silent readers have almost invariably shown the best
understanding of the matter read. It would thus seem that concentrated
effort on either speed or comprehension would tend to improve the
other factor. It is necessary, however, to test speed results
carefully to insure conscientious reading of the text.

=The material in these books.= In selecting the material for these books
the authors have purposely avoided the established paths of literary
reputation, and have selected from a wide variety of sources interesting
material representative of the printed matter the child will inevitably
read. Every effort has been made to avoid the necessity of explanation
by the teacher to elucidate the text. In general, the exercises have
been under- rather than over-graded, as the pupil should read for
content and should be as far as possible relieved from technical
grammatical or vocabulary difficulties. Occasionally, however, in each
book exercises somewhat more difficult or of a more or less unusual
nature have been included, because everyone, old or young, is called
upon to read a variety of material, and pupils should have some
experience with selections that require special effort.

=Why we read.= Most of the reading which we do has one of three
purposes: we read for information; we read for instruction; we read
for appreciation or entertainment. These purposes are somewhat
determined by the nature of the material read. Rarely do we read an
encyclopedia article for appreciation. On the other hand, we lose
ourselves in the quiet humor of Rip Van Winkle merely for
entertainment through appreciation. Contrasted with this would be our
reading of a biography of Irving in order to find out who were his
American contemporaries. The boy who reads an explanation of how to
make a rabbit trap with the purpose of making one is reading for
instruction, while his father who scans the evening paper to see how
his representative in Congress or the State Legislature voted on a
bill is reading purely for information.

=The Pedagogical Editing.= The authors have kept constantly in mind the
purposes of each selection in the directions they have given to the
pupils. They have also had clearly in mind certain fundamental things
that they wish pupils to learn and certain habits which they wish them
to form by the use of these books. A perusal of the directions given
before and after any given selection will suffice to make this purpose
clear. For example, much attention is given to the writing of headings
for certain parts of a selection or to the statement of the most
important thought in a given paragraph. With increasing emphasis in the
upper grades this type of exercise is developed into the complete
outline. The authors believe that practice of this kind will develop in
pupils the habit of looking for the important thought and of grouping
around it related subordinate ideas. This is perhaps the habit most
essential to good reading for instruction or information. On the other
hand, selections which are of a purely literary character and which
should be read for appreciation and entertainment are given without
exhaustive notes or questions, because minute discussion of this kind
of reading would detract from its value.

=Method of handling the books.= Many teachers will prefer to keep the
books in the class room, distributing them at the time of the silent
reading lesson and collecting them again at its conclusion. In this
way the material will remain fresh, and the drill exercises will
always be under the control of the teacher.

In many places, however, text books are not supplied by the school
authorities, but are purchased by the pupils directly. Inasmuch as
this series of books contains all the necessary instruction for the
use of each exercise, they become peculiarly helpful where the pupil
is thrown upon his own resources. He is able to test his own speed and
comprehension and his ability to analyze or outline any of the
material by the plain directions that are given for handling the
books. Although the instructions accompanying various selections are
addressed to the pupils, they contain suggestions for the teacher. It
is, therefore, important that the teacher read in advance of the
lesson such instructions or comments as appear before or after the
text or the particular exercise to be read.

=Speed drills.= As much of the value of teaching silent reading lies
in the development of speed, a number of exercises are designated as
speed drills. For these drills it is suggested that the teacher
prepare, on the mimeograph if possible, a considerable number of slips
to be filled out arranged as follows:

  10/4/22      5A             G. P. W.
  -------     -----     --------------------
   Date       Grade      Teacher's Initials
                          or Room Number.

  ------------------------------------------
  Name of Exercise         Page

  Pupils               Time in Minutes
  ------               ---------------
  Brown, Mary               5-1/2
  Carmalt, Joseph           3
  Derr, Jane                4
  Eldridge, Henry           5
  Fisher, Mary              5-1/2
  Green, Alice              6
  Hunt, Roy                 8-1/2
  Knowlton, William         5
  Manly, Rose               4
  Morris, Mary              4-1/2
  Newton, George            5
  Newton, Thomas            4-1/2
  Orr, Robert               5
  Pierce, Helen             6
  Porter, Clara             5
  Roberts, John             4
  Rowe, Gertrude            6
  Smith, Fred               5
  Vaughn, Lee               6
  Wilson, Alice             3-1/2

    1-3, 1-3-1/2, 3-4, 2-4-1/2, 6-5, 2-5-1/2, 4-6, 1-8-1/2.

    Class median 5 Class mode 5

For a speed drill the teacher should have one of these slips and a
watch with a second hand. A stop watch would be valuable. Directions
should be given for all the pupils to begin reading at the same moment
and raise their hands as a signal to the teacher when they have
finished. The teacher should give the signal for them to begin as the
second hand of her watch reaches sixty. As each pupil raises his hand
indicating that he has finished, the teacher should note the time in
half minutes opposite that pupil's name on the drill sheet. Any
pupil's time should be indicated at the nearest half minute space. For
example, a pupil who finishes at two minutes ten seconds should be
marked as two minutes; one who finishes at two minutes twenty seconds,
at two and one-half.

=Mode and Median.= In the illustration above, the sheet has been
filled with names and scores of a supposed fifth grade class of twenty
pupils. On this sheet three minutes occurs once, three and one-half
minutes once, four minutes three times, four and one-half minutes
twice, five minutes six times, five and one-half minutes twice, six
minutes four times and eight and one-half minutes once. The number
occurring the largest number of times is five.

This number is called the "mode".

If all the scores are arranged in order with the highest score at the
top and the lowest score at the bottom, the middle score in this
series is called the "median" and is in this case also "five".

=Individual scores.= The class median or mode is, however, not so
significant as the individual scores. The class score is always
determined by the ease or difficulty as well as by the length of the
particular exercise read. This makes comparison with other exercises
almost valueless. The only significant comparison in this case is
between individuals of the same class, and between the score of this
class and of other classes of parallel grade who have read the same
exercise.

Important facts for G. P. W., the class teacher, in this case are the
individual scores and their relative standing. Roy Hunt, who took
eight and one-half minutes to read this exercise, is the slowest
reader on this occasion. Is this true of other occasions? If so, Roy
needs special help and training. It is also clear that Joseph Carmalt
and Alice Wilson are rapid readers and it is important to see that
their comprehension of the exercise is also adequate. Thus, for the
class teacher the important facts are the relative scores of the
pupils both in comparison with other pupils and with the former scores
of the same pupils.

=Scale of approximate speed.= The following scale of speeds by grades
is based roughly on the Courtis standard tests and may be somewhat
helpful to the teacher who may desire such norms.

  Grade      Words per minute

    4             140-180
    5             160-200
    6             180-220
    7             190-230
    8             200-240

Of course it must be recognized that no standard speeds are possible
without also standardizing the material. To be absolutely accurate,
each separate exercise should be its own speed standard. This,
although possible, would be a device so cumbersome as to defeat its
own purpose. Every bit of reading presents its peculiar difficulties,
its slow spots, its points of interest, its urge to hurry on. These in
turn vary with the apperception of the reader, with his peculiarities,
his interests, and his motives. These largely determine his speed. The
authors have thought it unwise in the vast majority of cases to
indicate with any degree of definiteness the time required for various
exercises. Their experience in trying out these exercises with
different classes showed so wide a variation that it was thought that
specific statements would tend only to mislead the teacher.

=Testing Comprehension.= It is, however, equally important that the
teacher know that the pupils are understanding what they read. As each
pupil is reading silently, there is no guarantee of comprehension
without some form of check. This may be as simple a device as watching
the expression of the children's faces to see registered there
appreciation of the exercise read; or it may be as complex as a
dramatic reproduction of the incidents.

Devices for checking comprehension are suggested in connection with
each exercise. The more usual and effective methods of teaching
comprehension are dramatization, reproduction, writing of headlines,
development of outlines, expression of opinion based upon facts read,
topical analysis, the naming of characters and statements of their
relationships, and appreciation of ethical or artistic appeal.

=The test material.= The drill exercise, although modeled in some
cases upon the standard reading and intelligence tests, expressly
disclaim any attempt to displace or supersede these tests. The
function of the two is wholly different. The material in the readers
is for drill and improvement in speed and comprehension. The standard
tests are for the measurement of achievement. No devices can be used
as a measure until it has been standardized by application in
thousands of concrete cases without substantial variation.

=Standard Tests.= This is the case with a number of standard tests now
in general use. In the field of reading the most notable are the
Courtis Standard Tests devised by S. A. Courtis, Director of
Instruction, Teacher Training and Research, and Dean of Teachers
College, Detroit, Michigan, and Walter S. Monroe, Professor of
Education and Director of the Bureau of Educational Research,
University of Illinois. The necessary instructions, record blanks and
test sheets giving these tests may be obtained as follows:


DIRECTIONS FOR ORDERING STANDARDIZED TESTS

  ----------------------------------------------------------------------
            |How   |                    |       |            |
            |many  |How many directions,|Used in|            |
  Test.     |tests |record sheets,      |what   |Publisher.  |Price.
            |to    |and other           |grades.|            |
            |order.|accessories         |       |            |
  ----------+------+--------------------+-------+------------+----------
  Monroe's  |One   |All directions are  |3 to 8 |Public      |Including
  Standard- |copy  |printed on either   |       |School      |complete
  ized      |of    |the test or on the  |       |Publicity   |directions
  Silent    |the   |class record sheet. |       |Co.,        |and record
  Reading   |test  |One record sheet is |       |Bloomington,|sheets,
  Tests     |for   |furnished with each |       |Illinois.   |60c per
            |each  |25 copies of the    |       |            |100
            |pupil.|test. Additional    |       |            |copies;
            |      |copies may be       |       |            |postage
            |      |ordered if desired. |       |            |extra, 9c
            |      |                    |       |            |per 100.
            |      |                    |       |            |
  Courtis's |One   |Folder B, Series R, |2 to 6 |S. A.       |Test only,
  Silent    |copy  |contains detailed   |       |Courtis.    |$1.80 per
  Reading   |of    |directions for      |       |            |100;
  Test No. 2|the   |giving the test and |       |            |Folder B,
            |test  |for scoring by the  |       |            |5c; Folder
            |for   |pupils. One copy is |       |            |D, 5c;
            |each  |needed for each     |       |            |Class
            |pupil.|person giving the   |       |            |Record
            |      |test. Folder D,     |       |            |Sheet,
            |      |Series R, contains  |       |            |1-1/2c
            |      |detailed directions |       |            |each;
            |      |for completing the  |       |            |Record
            |      |scoring, for        |       |            |Sheet No.
            |      |recording the       |       |            |3 and
            |      |scores, and for     |       |            |Graph
            |      |calculating class   |       |            |Sheet
            |      |scores. One copy is |       |            |1-1/2c
            |      |needed for each     |       |            |each.
            |      |person giving the   |       |            |
            |      |test. A class record|       |            |
            |      |sheet for recording |       |            |
            |      |the scores of a     |       |            |
            |      |class is needed for |       |            |
            |      |each class. A school|       |            |
            |      |record and graph    |       |            |
            |      |sheet for Silent    |       |            |
            |      |Reading No. 2 is    |       |            |
            |      |needed for each     |       |            |
            |      |school.             |       |            |
  ----------------------------------------------------------------------

These tests should be given at least once a year and if possible
semi-annually in order to determine progress in speed and
comprehension in silent reading, as well as to measure the pupils by a
well established standard.

=Topical recitation.= Particular emphasis, especially in the later
grades, should be placed upon the complete presentation of a topic by a
pupil standing in front of the class and making the group understand
what he has to say without questions by the teacher. More and more this
is coming to be emphasized as a means of good teaching everywhere; and
pupils are being trained to stand before a group of their classmates and
give an intelligent account of anything of which they have adequate
knowledge without the painful tooth-pulling process of extracting ideas.

=The philosophy of study.= One of the most important results of
efficient teaching of silent reading is the contribution which it makes
to the whole problem of study in the school. Briggs says that the
primary purpose of the school is to teach people to do better the
desirable things that they are likely to do anyway. One of the desirable
things that school children are not only likely but certain to have to
do is to study. A large portion of the studying that the child as well
as the adult does consists in the acquirement of information from the
printed page. It is essentially silent reading. Much of the difficulty
teachers now meet in the inability of their pupils to study will be
dispelled by effective teaching of silent reading. Probably no use of
the same amount of time would yield more definite and valuable results
than will thorough instruction in the process of thought getting from a
printed page--in other words--silent reading.




ACKNOWLEDGMENTS


Grateful acknowledgment is made to the following authors and
publishers for their courtesy in allowing the use of the copyrighted
material in this volume: to J. Russell Smith for "The Eskimo" and
"Otelne, the Indian of the Great North Woods"; to A. and C. Black for
five selections from the series "Peeps at Many Lands"; to Augustus R.
Keller and Company for Oscar Wilde's "The Happy Prince"; to J. Berg
Esenwein for two selections from "Stories for Children and How to Tell
Them"; to W. F. Quarrie and Company for four selections from "The
World Book"; to _The Youth's Companion_ for John Clair Minot's
"Pietro's Adventure", and "Noblesse Oblige"; to the J. B. Lippincott
Company for "The Mole Awakes" from Dr. S. C. Schmucker's "Under the
Open Sky", and "A Trip to the Moon" from Charles R. Gibson's "The
Stars and Their Mysteries"; to D. Appleton and Company for two
selections from the "Boy Scouts' Year Book"; to the Federal Reserve
Bank of Philadelphia for C. A. Sienkiewicz's "The Safest Place"; to
the Association Press for "The First Potter" and "The Fire Spirit"
from Hanford M. Burr's "Around the Fire"; to _Boys' Life, the Boy
Scouts' Magazine_, for "The Ghost of Terrible Terry"; to Longmans,
Green and Company for "The Boyhood of a Painter", from Andrew Lang's
"The Strange Story Book"; and to the _Public Ledger_ of Philadelphia
for "General Pershing's Welcome Home". Henry W. Longfellow's "The
Skeleton in Armor" is used by permission of, and under arrangement
with, Houghton Mifflin Company, authorized publishers.

The authors of _The Silent Readers_ wish to acknowledge the careful
and efficient assistance of Miss Mabel Dodge Holmes of the William
Penn High School of Philadelphia, and of Superintendent Sidney V.
Rowland of Radnor Township, Pa.



CONTENTS


                                                                    PAGE
  SILENT READING                                                       1

  THE ESKIMO                                     _J. Russell Smith_    2

  SCOTTISH BORDER WARFARE                      _Elizabeth Grierson_    9

  THE NEW WONDERLAND                           _Mabel Dodge Holmes_   11

  BRISTOL                                                             16

  ON THE FRONTIER                                                     18

  THE HAPPY PRINCE                                    _Oscar Wilde_   19

  CAN YOU FOLLOW DIRECTIONS?                                          29

  FEEDING FRENCH CHILDREN                                             30

  GENEVIEVE'S LETTER                                                  34

  TRAVEL                                   _Robert Louis Stevenson_   35

  HOW THE WISH CAME TRUE                                              36

  RULES FOR USING THE EYES                                            37

  ACTING FOR THE MOVIES                                               38

  CLEAR THINKING                                                      40

  THE LAND OF EQUAL CHANCE                                            41

  THE BROKEN FLOWER-POT                             _Bulwer-Lytton_   46

  SAINT GEORGE AND THE DRAGON                                         51

  NONSENSE TEST                                                       56

  TURNING OUT THE INTRUDER                                            57

  ROOSEVELT'S FAVORITE STUDY                 _William Draper Lewis_   58

  WHAT A CHIMNEY IS                                                   61

  IS IT TRUE?                                                         62

  FRANKLIN WRITES FOR THE NEWSPAPER                                   63

  YES OR NO?                                                          64

  HOW TO MAKE A SUN-DIAL                                              65

  PUTTING WORDS WHERE THEY BELONG                                     67

  AN INDIAN BUFFALO HUNT                                              68

  INDIAN LIFE AND CUSTOMS                                             76

  CAN YOU UNDERSTAND RELATIONSHIP?                                    89

  OPENING THE GREAT WEST                                              90

  TURNING OUT THE INTRUDER                                            96

  THE TRAINING OF A BOY KING                       _H. E. Marshall_   97

  "SOME UGLY OLD LAWYER"                                             103

  ADDING THE RIGHT WORDS                                             104

  THE DESERT INDIANS' "FIRE BED"                                     105

  YES OR NO?                                                         105

  PIETRO'S ADVENTURE                             _John Clair Minot_  106

  SOME PATRIOTIC MINE WORKERS                                        111

  FATHER DOMINO                                                      112

  THE GOOD GIANT WINS HIS FORTUNE                                    116

  THE MOLE AWAKES                                 _S. C. Schmucker_  117

  THE COUNT AND THE ROBBERS                       _Beatrix Jungman_  119

  WHAT THE EARLIEST MEN DID FOR US                  _Smith Burnham_  124

  TRY THIS                                                           136

  PUTTING WORDS WHERE THEY BELONG                                    137

  MAKING MONEY EARN MONEY                                            138

  HEROES OF HISTORY                            _Mabel Dodge Holmes_  139

  THE SKELETON IN ARMOR                _Henry Wadsworth Longfellow_  149

  ACTING FOR THE MOVIES                                              156

  THE SAFEST PLACE                         _Casimir A. Sienkiewicz_  158

  UNPATRIOTIC CARELESSNESS                                           167

  A MEMORY TEST                                                      169

  CALIPH FOR ONE DAY                                                 170

  THE FIRST POTTER                                _Hanford M. Burr_  180

  FINDING OPPOSITES                                                  187

  "IT'S QUITE TRUE!"                      _Hans Christian Andersen_  188

  TANGLED SENTENCES                                                  191

  HOW SELLA LOST HER SLIPPERS                  _Mabel Dodge Holmes_  192

  THE GHOST OF TERRIBLE TERRY                                        198

  ROAST CHICKEN                                                      203

  WHY THE ECHO ANSWERS                         _Mabel Dodge Holmes_  204

  THE FIGHT WITH THE SEA                          _Beatrix Jungman_  207

  AGRICULTURE                                                        210

  CAN YOU DO THIS ONE?                                               215

  THE INCHCAPE ROCK                                _Robert Southey_  216

  SOME DEFINITIONS                                                   218

  THE BATTLE OF MORGARTEN                          _John Finnemore_  219

  FINDING OPPOSITES                                                  222

  WHAT MEKOLKA KNOWS                                                 223

  THE BEAR'S NIGHT                                                   228

  IS IT THE SAME BEAR?                                               231

  THE CHINESE NEW YEAR'S DAY                     _Lena E. Johnston_  232

  ADDING THE RIGHT WORDS                                             235

  THE GOOD CITIZEN--HOW HE USES MATCHES                              236

  NOBLESSE OBLIGE                                                    242

  THE MAGIC HORSE                                                    243

  THINKING                                                           255

  WHAT IS A BOY SCOUT?                                               256

  THE SCOUT AND THE KNIGHT                                           258

  THE FIRE SPIRIT                                 _Hanford M. Burr_  259

  THE BOYHOOD OF A PAINTER                            _Andrew Lang_  273

  CIVIL DEATH                                                        277

  OTELNE, THE INDIAN OF THE GREAT NORTH WOODS    _J. Russell Smith_  278

  WHICH IS RIGHT?                                                    288

  "VERDUN BELLE"                                                     290

  ANOTHER NONSENSE TEST                                              296

  CAN YOU UNDERSTAND RELATIONSHIP?                                   297

  CHARADES                                                           298

  GENERAL PERSHING'S WELCOME HOME                                    299

  THE FAIRIES ON THE GUMP                     _Mabel Quiller-Couch_  303

  THINKING AND DOING                                                 312

  A TRIP TO THE MOON                            _Charles R. Gibson_  313




SILENT READING


The book which you are now beginning is, as its title tells you, a
_silent reader_; that is, a reader that you are to read to yourself,
silently. It is much more interesting to read silently than to read
aloud, and it is also much faster. With all the wonderful books and
valuable articles that are being printed every day, it is important
that you learn to read rapidly as well as to understand.

The purpose of this book is to help you to read fast and to understand
clearly what you read. You will find all sorts of reading; animal
stories, poems, fairy tales, problems, descriptions of strange places,
puzzles, war stories, and lots of other things. We think you will find
it very interesting, but the important thing is to use all this material
to make yourself a rapid and at the same time a careful reader.

Of course you are much too old to move your lips when you read. If you
have this habit you must break it at once, for you will never read
rapidly as long as you continue to pronounce words even to yourself. It
takes just as long to pronounce a word to yourself as to read it aloud.
You must learn not to do so, if you are to gain speed in reading.

Your teacher is going to help you in every possible way and will
frequently time you when you read and then test you to see if you have
understood what you have read. But you will have to do the most
yourself if you are really to learn to read rapidly and well.




THE ESKIMO


    You will be able to remember what you read and to tell about it
    much better if you form the habit of making a brief outline as you
    go along. You can learn to make this outline without writing
    anything down, but in the beginning it would be a good plan to
    write down the topics as you come to them.

    At the end of this selection you will find suggestions for making
    an outline.

Suppose there was no grocery where you could get bread or flour or
potatoes, no meat shop, no milk dealer. Make it worse and suppose there
was no place where you could buy clothes, shoes, coal or wood, balls or
bats, sleds or knives. Suppose you had to go without all these things
unless your father and mother or brothers and sisters helped you to make
them. You would all have to work very hard and even then be poor, and
often hungry, cold, and wet. You could not live in town because there is
not ground enough there to raise potatoes and other things to eat. You
would have to live in the country, where there is more land near each
home. Your father would have to learn how to build a house, how to make
shoes, how to make his tools, and how to do many things which the people
you know never need to think about now. Your mother would have to make
even the cloth for your clothes and to prepare all the food you had.
That is, your family would have to make everything that you had in your
home, or that you ate, or wore, or played with, or used in the garden.
They would be busy all the time. Every family would have to have more
businesses or trades than you can find in some small towns, and many of
the things you have now they could not make at all, so you would not
have them. For a long time, a very long time, that is the way people
used to live all over the world. It was a hard life. There are even yet
many places where people do not use machines and where every family
makes everything for its own use.

The Eskimos live that way. Their country is far away to the north. It
is a very poor, cold country, where very few things will grow, so
there are not many Eskimos. Robinson Crusoe tried living all by
himself for a while, but he had a lot of tools from the ship, and his
island was rich in food and wood. He found goats there that gave milk;
he found good wild grapes and other fruits; but he said he had to work
very hard, even though he did not have any family to support. The
Eskimo country is much poorer than Crusoe's island. It is away up
north where the winter is very long and cold, and the summer is so
short that no trees grow, and there are not many other plants. The
Eskimo has no animals to give milk; he never heard of potatoes or
bread, to say nothing of cake.

It is hard to get the things you need in such a country. For a winter
house the Eskimo often builds a little hut of snow. Many boys and girls
in the cooler parts of the United States and Canada have built a little
snow house for sport, but the Eskimo finds it the warmest house he can
get. If it has a window, you cannot see through it, for it is a piece of
fish skin that looks like dirty glass. To keep the cold out he makes the
doorway so low that people must crawl in. Then he builds a long tunnel
outside the door to keep the wind out, and puts a chunk of snow in the
outer end of the tunnel for a door. Along the sides of the house inside
is a bank of snow covered with skins. This is both chair and bed.

If he made the room as warm as we make our houses, the roof would melt
and drip down his neck. But he does not have enough fire to warm it
much anyhow. The little fire he has for cooking is made by burning
the fat of animals in an oil lamp.

[Illustration: THE ESKIMO BOY AND HIS FATHER FISHING]

Not long ago a man named Rasmussen, whose father was a missionary in
Greenland and whose mother was an Eskimo, made a long journey through
Eskimo land. At one place he found a dead whale on the seashore and the
Eskimos there felt as rich as we should if a carload of coal or
fire-wood were dumped down in the yard. They were busy tearing off
strips of the fat, called blubber, that lies under the whale's skin.
Some of them were hauling it two days' journey on their sleds. Some of
the people Rasmussen saw had never even heard of white men or of any of
the things the white man makes. They themselves had to make everything
they had.

Their boats (or kyaks) were of seal skins sewed into a water-tight sheet
and stretched over a frame-work of whale rib bones and long walrus
tusks, tied together with sinews and strips of leather. In these tiny
boats they paddle around in the sea and catch seals with spears.

Nearly all the Eskimos live along the seashore where they can catch
fish, seals and walrus. The seal is the greatest wealth the Eskimo
has. The seal eats fish and keeps warm in the ice-cold water because
he has a coat of soft, fine, water-proof fur, and under his skin a
thick layer of fat. Seal meat is bread to the Eskimo. He cooks with
seal fat and makes clothes, boats, and tents of the sealskin.

In winter the Eskimo wears two suits of fur, one with the fur inside
and the other with the fur outside. In summer one suit is enough.

When spring comes and the snow house begins to melt, the Eskimo moves
into his sealskin tent or into a stone hut chinked with dirt. Some of
these stone huts are hundreds of years old. Toward the end of summer
there are some berries that get ripe on low-growing bushes, and many
bright flowers bloom in the northland. Then the Eskimos sometimes make
trips inland. They eat berries, rabbit meat, birds, and wild reindeer.
Wild ducks and many other birds are there in summer, but they fly away
to warm lands when cold weather comes, and the people go back to the
seashore to lay in their winter supply of seal meat.

The wild animals that live here all the time do not seem to mind the
cold. They have warm fur, and the rabbit changes his color to keep
from getting caught. He is snow white in winter so that the fox cannot
see him on the snow, but in summer his coat is brown so that the fox
cannot see him on the ground.

The Eskimo has one helper, the dog that pulls his sled. We call him
the "huskie". This dog has a thick, warm coat so that he can curl up
in the dry snow, put his four feet and his nose into a little bunch,
lay his bushy tail over them, and sleep through a blinding snow storm
that would freeze a white man to death. Sometimes the snow covers him
entirely as he sleeps and he has to dig himself out when he wakes up.

When Admiral Peary went over the ice to the North Pole, in 1909,
Eskimo dogs pulled the sleds that carried his food and tents, and
Eskimo men helped him. He found them to be honest, brave men, trusty
helpers, and good friends.

The Eskimos are very fond of games. They play football and several
kinds of shinny, using long bones for shinny sticks. Sometimes they
skate on new smooth ice, using bone skates tied fast to their soft
shoes. As they do not go to school and have no books, the days must
seem long in bad weather, for they have nothing to do but sit around
the little fire in the dark smoky little snow house. They have many
indoor games. The house is too small to play tag or run around, so
they have sitting down games. There are as many as fifty kinds of
string games something like our cat's cradle.

This is the simplest kind of living to be found anywhere in the world.
Every family in the world needs a certain amount of food, clothes,
fuel, shelter, tools, and playthings. In different countries there are
different ways of getting these things, depending on the weather, on
the things that will grow, and the things that man finds in the
ground, or in the woods, or in the sea. Each Eskimo family must make
or get all these things for itself.

The Eskimos do not need money because they do not buy nor sell. If two
Eskimos should meet and want to trade two dogs for a sled, they would
just trade as two schoolboys swap knives. The Eskimos would be much
more comfortable if they could trade some of their sealskins for
lumber to build houses and for flour and dried fruit to eat with their
never ending meat. We cannot trade with them because they are too far
away for us to build railroads to their land, and the sea is so full
of ice that ships cannot get through it Perhaps the aeroplane will let
us see more of the Eskimo.

                                             --_J. Russell Smith.
                               Courtesy of the John C. Winston Co._


QUESTIONS

    Glance quickly at the first paragraph. How would this do as a title
    or topic for it: "Doing things for yourself"?

    The second paragraph connects the idea that it is very hard to do
    everything for yourself with the various things told about the
    Eskimo in the rest of the story. So that you may understand better,
    the Eskimo is compared with Robinson Crusoe, who had to do
    everything for himself but had a better chance because of the
    country in which he lived. A topic for the second paragraph might
    be, "The Eskimo's life compared with Robinson Crusoe's".

    Beginning with the third paragraph, the author tells how the Eskimo
    lives. It is not necessary to make a topic for every paragraph. We
    can make a general heading under which some of his ways of living
    can be grouped. Arrange the heading and the sub-headings as follows:

    How the Eskimo manages to live.

       (_a_) His house.
       (_b_) His food,
       (_c_) His clothing.

    Now look through the rest of the story, and you will see that it
    can be included under the following headings:

       The Eskimo dog.
       Eskimo games.
       Why the Eskimo does not buy and sell.

    In making an outline it is not necessary to put in every single
    idea in the piece you are outlining.

    Now, after going through the selection to see how the outline is
    made, you can easily answer the following questions:

    1. How does it happen that you do not have to depend on your own
    family for the things you eat and wear and use? Make a list of the
    people who help you to get the things necessary for every-day
    life. Your list might begin with the baker, the milk-man, and the
    shoemaker.

    2. Try to draw a picture of the outside of the Eskimo's winter
    house as it is described here.

    3. Make a list of the things you think an Eskimo boy or girl about
    your age would do from morning to night--his day's program, you
    may call it.

    4. Do you think the Eskimo is glad when summer comes? Why?

    5. Tell a story that a "huskie" might tell of his experiences.

    6. Make a list of raw materials, such as wood, that would make the
    life of the Eskimo more comfortable.




SCOTTISH BORDER WARFARE


    From your study of the way to make an outline of "The Eskimo", you
    will be able to make an outline of "Scottish Border Warfare"
    yourself.

    Read the selection through, and then go back and write topics that
    cover the main points.

Legends of the Scottish borders tell the exciting stories of a warfare
that went on for a hundred years, in the days before England and
Scotland were united. The "Borders" consisted of that part of the
country in the South of Scotland where the boundary was not properly
fixed. The King of England might claim a piece of land that the King of
Scotland thought was his, and the King of Scotland might do the same by
the King of England. And so, because things were never really settled in
these parts, and men thought they could do pretty much as they liked, a
constant warfare sprang up between the families who lived on the English
side of the border and those who lived on the Scottish side. These
families formed great clans, almost like the Highland clans, and every
man in the clan rose in arms at the bidding of his chief.

The warfare which they carried on was not honest fighting so much as
something that sounds to us very much like stealing; only in these old
plundering, or "reiving" days, as they were called, people were not
very particular about other people's property, and right was often
decided by might. So when these old Border chieftains found that their
larders were getting empty, they sent messages around the countryside
to their retainers, telling them to meet them that night at some
secret trysting-place, and ride with them into England to steal some
English yeoman's flock of sheep.

In the darkness, groups of men, mounted on rough, shaggy ponies, would
assemble at some lonely spot among the hills and ride stealthily into
Cumberland or Northumberland, and surround some Englishman's little
flock of sheep, or herd of cattle, and drive them off, setting fire,
perhaps, to his cottage and haystacks at the same time.

The Englishman might be unable to retaliate at the moment, but no
sooner were the reivers' backs turned than he betook himself with all
haste to his chieftain, who, in his turn, gathered his men together,
and rode over into Scotland to take vengeance, and, if possible, bring
back with him a larger drove of sheep and cattle than had been stolen,
or "lifted", by the Scotch.

And so things went merrily on, with raids and counter-raids, and
fierce little encounters, and brave men slain. You can read the
accounts of many of these raids in Sir Walter Scott's "Border
Minstrelsy"--about "Kinmont Willie," "Dick o' the Cow," "Jamie Telfer
of the Fair Dodhead," "Johnnie Armstrong," and "the Raid of the
Reidswire"--and if you ever chance to be traveling between Hawick and
Carlisle you can look out of the window, as the train carries you
swiftly down Liddesdale, and people the hillsides, in your
imagination, with companies of reivers setting out to harry their
"auld enemies", the English.

                                --_From "A Peep at Scotland",
                                          by Elizabeth Grierson._


QUESTIONS

    1. What were the "Borders"?

    2. From the way they are used, tell what you think the following
    words mean: "reiving," larders, retainers, clan, trysting-place,
    yeoman, retaliate, "lifted," harry.




THE NEW WONDERLAND


    You have probably, like Betty, the little girl in this story, read
    "Alice in Wonderland". If you haven't, you will find out, before
    you have read very far on this page, when Alice lived. Glance at
    the first part of the story and see.

    Alice, in the book that Betty had been reading, had wonderful
    adventures in a strange country, where rabbits and caterpillars
    talked, and where certain kinds of cake made you grow taller or
    shorter, and where people put pepper in tea. Anybody would think a
    country like that was a Wonderland; but you will see that Alice
    found our everyday, twentieth-century world is a Wonderland, too.
    See if you can tell why she thought so.

Betty laid down her book with a sigh. It had been a lovely book, and she
was sorry it was finished. "Such a humdrum old world!" she said
discontentedly. "I wish I had a chance to go to Wonderland, like Alice."

"Why," said a voice from the doorway, "isn't this Wonderland, then?"

Betty looked up, startled. She saw a little girl of about her own age,
with long, light, straight hair hanging to her waist, with wide,
wondering blue eyes, and dressed in the simplest, most old-fashioned
of little white frocks.

"Who are you?" inquired Betty.

"Why, don't you know me? I'm Alice," said the quaint little girl.

"How did you get here? I thought you lived a long time ago, in 1850 or
so."

"Oh, yes, I did begin to live then; but you see I've been traveling in
Wonderland so long that I've never had time to grow up."

"Aren't you sorry to have come back to real life, and begin to do
lessons, and mind what the older people say, and all?"

"Oh, but I haven't! Of course, I suppose the people in Wonderland don't
know they are queer, and so that's why you don't know you live there."

"Well," said Betty scornfully, "I'm sure I don't see anything to
wonder at in this old place--" Just then a bell rang sharply, and
Betty hurried to answer the telephone. It was her father speaking. She
took his message and returned to her guest.

"What in the world," said Alice, "made you talk into that little black
cup?"

"Why, that's the telephone."

"What's a telephone? We didn't have them in my time, I'm sure."

"Oh, everybody has one now. It lets you talk to somebody 'way off,
over an electric wire."

"Of course, we read about Franklin and his kite and all that. Let me
try it." But when the operator's voice saying "Number, please?" came
to Alice's ear, she was so frightened that she dropped the receiver.

"I can show you lots more things we do with electricity," said Betty,
beginning to understand that things which were commonplace to her were
wonders to her visitor. "You see it's getting dark? Now watch." Going
to the push-button in the wall she snapped on the light; Alice jumped
at its suddenness.

"Why, at home we had to find matches and light a lamp," she said in
amazement.

"That's nothing," said Betty. "Come along." She led her new friend
into the dining room, and showed her how, by pressing a button, the
rack could be heated for toasting bread, or heat supplied for the
coffee pot. Then they went on into the kitchen, and she showed Alice
the gas stove, where a flame sprang into life at the turning of a
handle; and the washing-machine, where the pressing of another button
set the clothes to churning up and down in the suds; and the electric
iron, heated by the pressing of still another button.

[Illustration: BETTY SHOWED HER THE VICTROLA]

"Why, nobody needs to do any work at all," said Alice admiringly,
while Betty began to feel that after all she had a great many
remarkable things in her house, which she had never thought much about
because they had always been there. As they walked back into the hall,
they heard a click-clicking sound.

"What's that?" said Alice.

"Oh, it's just my big brother's wireless apparatus catching a message.
If he were here he could tell us what it says."

"What's a wireless?"

"Why, you don't know anything much, do you?" Betty explained as well
as she could about the wireless telegraph.

"Goodness! That's like real magic. You must feel as if you were living
in a fairy story."

Betty had never thought of life in that way, and was about to tell Alice
how really dull a time she had, when a sound of music interrupted them.

"Oh, how lovely! Somebody's singing!"

"No, you little goose, that's only the victrola," answered Betty.

"What's a victrola?"

Betty tried to explain that it was a machine that caught and
imprisoned somebody's voice or the music of some instrument. But Alice
couldn't understand. Even when Betty showed her the victrola, and the
record, she could hardly believe that a real singer wasn't hidden
somewhere making fun of her.

While she was still unpersuaded, Betty heard her father's key in the
lock. She knew the car must still be before the door.

"Father, father," she cried, "this is Alice--from Wonderland, you
know. Won't you take us for a ride?"

"A little one," said Betty's father. Alice clapped her hands, for she
loved to go driving. But when the two little girls were safely seated
in the back seat, she began to wonder again.

"Where are the horses?" she inquired.

"Horses! Why, it's an automobile."

"What's an automobile?"

"Why, a carriage that runs of itself." The car started, and Alice
understood without further explaining. She couldn't ask any more
questions, because the rapid motion quite took away her breath.

Betty asked Alice to spend the night with her, and promised that next
morning she would take her to town and show her some more of the
sights of the New Wonderland. She went to sleep feeling that after all
it wasn't such a humdrum world, and that she had taken for granted a
great many things that, when you came to think of it, really made life
a fairy tale, and the world Wonderland.

                                           --_Mabel Dodge Holmes._


QUESTIONS

    1. Alice was no more surprised than any little girl of 1850 would
    be. What has happened in the world since that time to make it a
    Wonderland?

    2. Why was the telephone a wonder to Alice?

    3. Make a list of the wonders Betty showed Alice. Add to this list
    any similar wonders that you could show her in your house.

    4. Can you think of some of the wonders that Betty showed Alice in
    their trip to the city?




BRISTOL


    Here is an account of the City of Bristol taken from an
    encyclopedia. Without reading the whole account, find as quickly as
    possible the answer to each of the following questions, in order.

    1. Where is Bristol?
    2. Is it an attractive city?
    3. Is it an industrial city?
    4. Is it a healthy city?
    5. Are there many public buildings there?
    6. If you had children could they be well educated there?
    7. Has it had any famous citizens?
    8. Is it a seaport or an inland city?
    9. Is it a large city?

Bristol, a cathedral city of England, situated partly in
Gloucestershire, partly in Somersetshire, but forming a county in
itself. In 1911 it had a population of 357,059. It stands at the
confluence of the rivers Avon and Frome, which unite within the city
whence the combined stream (the Avon) pursues a course of nearly seven
miles to the Bristol Channel. The Avon is a navigable river, and the
tides rise in it to a great height. The town is built partly on low
grounds, partly on eminences, and has some fine suburban districts, such
as Clifton, on the opposite side of the Avon, connected with Bristol by
a suspension bridge 703 feet long and 245 feet above high-water mark.
The public buildings are numerous and handsome, and the number of places
of worship very great. The most notable of these are the cathedral,
founded in 1142, exhibiting various styles of architecture, and recently
restored and enlarged; St. Mary Redcliff, said to have been founded in
1293, and perhaps the finest parish church in the kingdom. Among modern
buildings are the exchange, the guild-hall, the council house, the post
office, the new grammar school, the fine arts academy, the West of
England, and other banks, insurance offices, etc. The charities are
exceedingly numerous, the most important being Ashley Down Orphanage,
for the orphans of Protestant parents, founded and still managed by the
Rev. George Müller, which may almost be described as a village of
orphans. Among the educational institutions are the University College,
the Theological Colleges of the Baptists and Independents, Clifton
College, and the Philosophical Institute. There is a school of art, and
also a public library. Bristol has glassworks, potteries, soap works,
tanneries, sugar refineries, and chemical works, shipbuilding and
machinery yards. Coal is worked extensively within the limits of the
borough. The export and import trade is large and varied, it being one
of the leading English ports in the foreign trade. Regular navigation
across the Atlantic was first established here, and the _Great Western_,
the pioneer steamship in this route, was built here. There is a harbor
in the city itself, and the construction of new docks at Avonmouth and
Portishead has given a fresh impetus to the port. The construction of
very large new docks was begun in 1902. Bristol is one of the healthiest
of the large towns of the kingdom. It has an excellent water supply
chiefly obtained from the Mendip Hills.--In old Celtic chronicles we
find the name _Caer Oder_, or "the City of the Chasm", given to a place
in this neighborhood, a name peculiarly appropriate to the situation of
Bristol, or rather of its suburb Clifton. The Saxons called it
_Bricgstow_, "bridge-place". In 1373 it was constituted a county of
itself by Edward III. It was made the seat of a bisphoric by Henry VIII
in 1542 (now united with Gloucester). Sebastian Cabot, Chatterton, and
Southey were natives of Bristol.




ON THE FRONTIER

THE SETTING FOR AN ACT IN A PLAY


    Your teacher will give the word when you are to begin. She will
    keep track of the time and will ask you to stop reading in thirty
    seconds. Then she will ask you, without looking back at the
    paragraph, to write answers to the questions at the end.

It is a blockhouse in a Kentucky clearing, at one of the outposts of
civilization to be found all along the frontier of the United States
at the close of the eighteenth century. The sun is about to rise and
objects are only dimly seen through the early morning haze. The
building itself is at the left. It is made of rough hewn logs. A
closed door of heavy planks is shown in the front wall. The windows
are narrow loop-holes through which can be seen from time to time the
blue barrels of flint-lock rifles. The second story of the blockhouse
projects over the first, so that anyone approaching the wall would be
subjected to rifle fire from the floor above. A cleared space in front
contains the stumps of several large trees, behind one of which may be
seen a crouching Indian, invisible to the blockhouse but easily seen
by the audience. Well back and at the right is a small stream. Beyond
both right and back the forest extends indefinitely. Shadowy figures
are moving among the trees.

    Write answers to the following questions. Remember, that if you
    are really a good sport and play the game fairly, you will not
    look back at the paragraph you have just read.

    1. Does the scene show a time of danger or of peace?
    2. Are people within the blockhouse?
    3. What means of defense has the blockhouse?
    4. What time of day is it?
    5. On which side of the stage is the blockhouse? the stream?




THE HAPPY PRINCE


    Here is a story of a golden statue and a little bird, both of whom
    sacrificed a great deal for the sake of others. As you read, see
    if you can tell which sacrificed more, and decide whether you are
    sorry for them because they gave up so much.

High above the city, on a tall column, stood the statue of the Happy
Prince. He was gilded all over with thin leaves of fine gold, for eyes
he had two bright sapphires, and a large red ruby glowed on his
sword-hilt.

One night, there flew over the city a little Swallow. His friends had
gone away to Egypt six weeks before, but he had stayed behind, for he
was in love with the most beautiful Reed. He had met her early in the
spring as he was flying down the river after a big yellow moth, and
had been so attracted by her slender waist that he had stopped to talk
to her.

After the other swallows had gone he felt lonely, and began to tire of
his lady-love. "She has no conversation," he said, "and I am afraid
that she is a coquette, for she is always flirting with the wind." And
certainly, whenever the wind blew, the Reed made the most graceful
curtsies. "I admit that she is domestic," he continued, "but I love
traveling, and my wife, consequently, should love traveling also."

"Will you come away with me?" he said finally to her; but the Reed
shook her head, she was so attached to her home.

"You have been trifling with me," he cried. "I am off to the Pyramids.
Good-bye!" and he flew away.

All day long he flew, and at night-time he arrived at the city. "Where
shall I put up?" he said. "I hope the town has made preparations."

Then he saw the statue on the tall column. "I will put up there," he
cried; "it is a fine position, with plenty of fresh air." So he
alighted just between the feet of the Happy Prince.

"I have a golden bedroom," he said softly to himself as he looked
round, and he prepared to go to sleep; but just as he was putting his
head under his wing a large drop of water fell on him.

"What a curious thing!" he cried, "there is not a single cloud in the
sky, the stars are quite clear and bright, and yet it is raining. The
climate in the north of Europe is really dreadful. The Reed used to
like the rain, but that was merely her selfishness."

Then another drop fell.

"What is the use of a statue if it cannot keep the rain off?" he said;
"I must look for a good chimney-pot," and he determined to fly away.

But before he had opened his wings, a third drop fell, and he looked
up, and saw--Ah! what did he see?

The eyes of the Happy Prince were filled with tears, and tears were
running down his golden cheeks. His face was so beautiful in the
moonlight that the little Swallow was filled with pity.

"Who are you?" he said.

"I am the Happy Prince."

"Why are you weeping then?" asked the swallow; "you have quite
drenched me."

"When I was alive and had a human heart," answered the statue, "I did
not know what tears were, for I lived in the Palace of Sans-Souci
(without care), where sorrow is not allowed to enter. In the daytime I
played with my companions in the garden, and in the evening I led the
dance in the Great Hall. Round the garden ran a very lofty wall, but
I never cared to ask what lay beyond it, everything about me was so
beautiful. My courtiers called me the Happy Prince, and happy indeed I
was, if pleasure be happiness. So I lived, and so I died. And now that
I am dead they have set me up here so high that I can see all the
ugliness and all the misery of my city, and though my heart is made of
lead yet I cannot choose but weep."

[Illustration: "LITTLE SWALLOW, WILL YOU NOT STAY WITH ME FOR ONE
NIGHT?"]

"What, is he not of solid gold?" said the Swallow to himself. He was
too polite to make any personal remarks out loud.

"Far away," continued the statue in a low musical voice, "far away in
a little street there is a poor house. One of the windows is open, and
through it I can see a woman seated at the table. Her face is thin and
worn, and she has coarse, red hands, all pricked by the needle, for
she is a seamstress. She is embroidering passion-flowers on a satin
gown for the loveliest of the Queen's maids-of-honor to wear at the
next Court-ball. In a bed in the corner of the room her little boy is
lying ill. He has a fever, and is asking for oranges. His mother has
nothing to give him but river water, so he is crying. Swallow,
Swallow, little Swallow, will you not bring her the ruby out of my
sword hilt? My feet are fastened to this pedestal and I cannot move."

"I am waited for in Egypt," said the Swallow. "My friends are flying
up and down the Nile and talking to the large lotus-flowers. Soon they
will go to sleep in the tomb of the great King. The King is there
himself in his painted coffin. He is wrapped in yellow linen, and
embalmed with spices. Round his neck is a chain of pale green jade,
and his hands are like withered leaves."

"Swallow, Swallow, little Swallow," said the Prince, "will you not
stay with me for one night, and be my messenger? The boy is so
thirsty and the mother is so sad."

"I don't think I like boys," answered the Swallow. "Last summer, when I
was staying on the river, there were two rude boys, the miller's sons,
who were always throwing stones at me. They never hit me, of course; we
swallows fly far too well for that, and besides, I come of a family
famous for its agility; but still, it was a mark of disrespect."

But the Happy Prince looked so sad that the little Swallow was sorry.
"It is very cold here," he said; "but I will stay with you for one
night, and be your messenger."

"Thank you, little Swallow," said the Prince.

So the Swallow picked out the ruby from the Prince's sword, and flew
away with it in his beak over the roofs of the town.

He passed by the cathedral tower, where the white marble angels were
sculptured. He passed by the palace and heard the sound of dancing. A
beautiful girl came out on the balcony with her lover. "How wonderful
the stars are," he said to her, "and how wonderful is the power of
love!" "I hope my dress will be ready in time for the State-ball," she
answered; "I have ordered passion-flowers to be embroidered on it; but
the seamstresses are so lazy."

He passed over the river, and saw the lanterns hanging to the masts of
the ships. At last he came to the poor house and looked in. The boy
was tossing feverishly on his bed, and the mother had fallen asleep,
she was so tired. In he hopped, and laid the great ruby on the table
beside the woman's thimble. Then he flew gently round the bed, fanning
the boy's forehead with his wings. "How cool I feel," said the boy, "I
must be getting better;" and he sank into a delicious slumber.

Then the Swallow flew back to the Happy Prince, and told him what he
had done. "It is curious," he remarked, "but I feel quite warm now,
although it is so cold."

"That is because you have done a good action," said the Prince. And
the little Swallow began to think, and then fell asleep. Thinking
always made him sleepy.

When day broke he flew down to the river and had a bath. "To-night I go
to Egypt," he said, and he was in high spirits at the prospect. He
visited all the public monuments, and sat a long time on top of the
church steeple. Wherever he went sparrows chirruped, and said to each
other, "What a distinguished stranger!" so he enjoyed himself very much.

When the moon rose he flew back and said to the Happy Prince: "Have
you any commissions for Egypt? I am just starting."

"Swallow, Swallow, little Swallow," said the Prince, "will you not
stay with me one night longer? Far away across the city I see a young
man in a garret. He is leaning over a desk covered with papers, and in
a tumbler by his side there is a bunch of withered violets. His hair
is brown and crisp and his lips are red as a pomegranate, and he has
large and dreamy eyes. He is trying to finish a play for the Director
of the Theatre, but he is too cold to write any more. There is no fire
in the grate, and hunger has made him faint."

"I will wait one night longer," said the Swallow, who had a good
heart. "Shall I take him another ruby?"

"Alas! I have no ruby now," said the Prince; "my eyes are all that I
have left. They are made of rare sapphires which were brought out of
India a thousand years ago. Pluck out one of them and take it to him.
He will sell it to the jeweller, and buy food and firewood, and finish
his play."

"Dear Prince," said the Swallow, "I cannot do that"; and he began to
weep.

"Swallow, Swallow, little Swallow," said the Prince, "do as I command
you."

So the Swallow plucked out the Prince's eye, and flew away to the
student's garret. It was easy enough to get in, as there was a hole in
the roof. Through this he darted, and came into the room. The young
man had his head buried in his hands, so he did not hear the flutter
of the bird's wings, and when he looked up he found the beautiful
sapphire lying on the withered violets.

"I am beginning to be appreciated," he cried; "this is from some great
admirer. Now I can finish my play," and he looked quite happy.

The next day the Swallow flew down to the harbor. He sat on the mast of
a large vessel and watched the sailors hauling big chests out of the
hold with ropes. "I am going to Egypt!" cried the Swallow, but nobody
minded, and when the moon rose he flew back to the Happy Prince.

"I am come to bid you good-bye," he cried.

"Swallow, Swallow, little Swallow," said the Prince, "will you not
stay with me one night longer?"

"It is winter," answered the Swallow, "and the chill snow will soon be
here. In Egypt the sun is warm on the green palm-trees, and the
crocodiles lie in the mud and look lazily about them."

"In the square below," said the Happy Prince, "there stands a little
match-girl. She has let her matches fall in the gutter, and they are
all spoiled. Her father will beat her if she does not bring home some
money, and she is crying. She has no shoes or stockings, and her
little head is bare. Pluck out my other eye, and give it to her, and
her father will not beat her."

"I will stay with you one night longer," said the Swallow, "but I
cannot pluck out your eye. You would be quite blind then."

"Swallow, Swallow, little Swallow," said the Prince, "do as I command
you."

So he plucked out the Prince's other eye, and darted down with it. He
swooped past the match-girl, and slipped the jewel into the palm of
her hand. "What a lovely bit of glass," cried the little girl; and she
ran home laughing.

Then the Swallow came back to the Prince. "You are blind now," he
said, "so I will stay with you always."

"No, little Swallow," said the poor Prince, "you must go away to Egypt."

"I will stay with you always," said the Swallow, and he slept at the
Prince's feet.

Next day the Swallow flew over the great city, and saw the rich making
merry in their beautiful houses, while the beggars were sitting at the
gates. He flew into dark lanes, and saw the white faces of starving
children looking out listlessly at the black streets. Under the
archway of a bridge two little boys were lying in one another's arms
to try and keep themselves warm.

Then he flew back and told the Prince what he had seen.

"I am covered with fine gold," said the Prince, "you must take it off
leaf by leaf, and give it to my poor; the living always think that
gold can make them happy."

Leaf after leaf of the fine gold the Swallow picked off, till the Happy
Prince looked quite dull and grey. Leaf after leaf of the fine gold he
brought to the poor, and the children's faces grew rosier, and they
laughed and played games in the street. "We have bread now!" they cried.

Then the snow came, and after the snow came the frost. The streets
looked as if they were made of silver, they were so bright and
glistening; long icicles like crystal daggers hung down from the eaves
of the houses, everybody went about in furs, and the little boys wore
scarlet caps and skated on the ice.

The poor little Swallow grew colder and colder, but he would not leave
the Prince, for he loved him too well. He picked up crumbs outside the
baker's door, and tried to keep himself warm by flapping his wings.

But at last he knew that he was going to die. He had just enough
strength to fly up to the Prince's shoulder once more. "Good-bye, dear
Prince!" he murmured, "will you let me kiss your hand?"

"I am glad that you are going to Egypt at last, little Swallow," said
the Prince, "you have stayed too long here; but you must kiss me on
the lips, for I love you."

"It is not to Egypt that I am going," said the Swallow. "I am going to
the House of Death. Death is the brother of Sleep, is he not?"

And he kissed the Happy Prince on the lips, and fell down dead at his
feet.

At that moment a curious crack sounded inside the statue as if
something had broken. The fact is that the leaden heart had snapped
right in two. It certainly was a dreadfully hard frost.

Early the next morning the Mayor was walking in the square below in
company with the Town Councillors. As they passed the column he looked
up at the statue: "Dear me! how shabby the Happy Prince looks!" he said.

"How shabby indeed!" cried the Town Councillors, who always agreed
with the Mayor; and they went up to look at it.

"The ruby has fallen out of his sword, his eyes are gone, and he is
golden no longer," said the Mayor; "in fact he is little better than a
beggar."

"Little better than a beggar," said the Town Councillors.

"And here is actually a dead bird at his feet!" continued the Mayor.
"We must really issue a proclamation that birds are not to be allowed
to die here." And the Town Clerk made a note of the suggestion.

So they pulled down the statue of the Happy Prince. "As he is no
longer beautiful he is no longer useful," said the Art Professor at
the University.

Then they melted the statue in a furnace and the Mayor held a meeting
of the Corporation to decide what was to be done with the metal. "We
must have another statue, of course," he said, "and it shall be a
statue of myself."

"Of myself," said each of the Town Councillors, and they quarreled.
When I last heard of them they were quarreling still.

"What a strange thing!" said the overseer at the foundry. "This broken
lead heart will not melt in the furnace. We must throw it away." So
they threw it on a dust heap where the dead swallow was also lying.

"Bring me the two most precious things in the city," said God to one
of His Angels; and the Angel brought Him the leaden heart and the dead
bird.

"You have rightly chosen," said God, "for in my garden of Paradise
this little bird shall sing for evermore, and in my city of gold the
Happy Prince shall praise me."

                                                 --_Oscar Wilde.
                      Courtesy of Augustus R. Keller and Company._

    It would be too bad to mar this beautiful story by asking
    questions about it. This is a story to tell. Your teacher, or
    perhaps the class, will decide who is to come to the front of the
    room and tell the story. It would be a good Christmas story.




CAN YOU FOLLOW DIRECTIONS?


    This exercise is given to see if you can follow directions. Follow
    each direction as you read it. Do not wait for others to start,
    but begin now.

    1. Arrange your paper with your name on the first line and your
    grade on the second. At the left hand side of your paper number
    the next ten lines from number 1 to number 10.

    2. The words NAME IS A JOHN BOY'S do not make a good sentence, but
    if the words are arranged in order they form a good sentence: JOHN
    IS A BOY'S NAME. This sentence is true. In the same way, the words
    BOOKS MADE IRON OF ARE, in this order do not make a good sentence,
    but arranged in the right order they form a good sentence: BOOKS
    ARE MADE OF IRON. This sentence is not true.

    3. Here are ten groups of words which can be rearranged into good
    sentences. When they are rearranged in their right order, some
    will be true and some will be false. Look at the first set of
    words. Do not write the words in their right order, but see what
    they would say if rearranged. If what they would say is true,
    write the word _true_ after figure 1 on your paper; but if what
    they would say is not true, write the word _false_ after figure 1.
    Do this with each group of words.

       1. shepherd the his good sheep cares for.
       2. Pigeons carry frequently used war to were messages.
       3. usually elected kings for are four years.
       4. from get caterpillar we called a silk-worm the silk.
       5. live the far-away Eskimos sandy hot in deserts the.
       6. and coal mined the cotton south are in.
       7. sail Spain three set Columbus from great steamships with.
       8. chief of England the city Philadelphia is.
       9. our days long summer and hot are.
      10. noted California trees is big its for.




FEEDING FRENCH CHILDREN


    You should all begin reading at the same moment. Your teacher will
    time you and tell you how long it takes you to read this
    selection. But do not hurry, for you will be asked to tell the
    class the things you remember best.

    Maybe you had a big brother or sister or cousin or aunt or uncle
    who, during the great war, worked under the Red Cross in France.
    If you did, he or she may have written home just such letters as
    this one, which a big sister wrote to her little brothers in
    America. As you read, see if you do not think she must be a very
    pleasant, friendly big sister, not only to her own little
    brothers, but also to the little French children.

Do you wish you had been born in France and that your names were Jean,
and René, and Etienne instead of Bill and George Albert and Ben? And do
you wish you wore black sateen aprons instead of woolly blue sweaters?

The reason I began to write you this letter is that yesterday
afternoon I put on my hat and coat when I ought to have been working,
and went to visit some French schools. I went with twenty fine people
who all wore Red Cross uniforms.

The reason I went is very interesting. For three years, while all the
men and the big boys in France have been fighting, their mothers and
sisters and all the children whom they had to leave behind them have
been getting poorer and thinner and hungrier. You see, since the men
have gone to war there haven't been enough of them left to grow the
wheat and run the machinery which makes the bread. Well, as I said, the
mothers and the little children got thinner and poorer and hungrier, but
the last thing of all that they gave up was a luncheon they served in
the afternoon in the schools to the smallest and poorest children. It
was such a little luncheon that they called it "the taste", but finally
they had to give up even that; and then when the time came to eat, the
children, who were just as brave as soldiers, had to pretend they
weren't hungry at all. They went without that luncheon for a number of
months, and then an American doctor decided that the boys and girls in
that part of Paris must have that luncheon again. So the doctor rented a
bakeshop and he got a ton of nice white American flour, and hundreds and
hundreds of cans of American condensed milk, and a very great deal of
sugar and some other things, and went to work making buns. And the
reason I went to the schools yesterday was to help give out the buns and
chocolate for the children's "taste".

I suppose you think that one bun and one piece of chocolate wasn't
much--and we thought so too when we saw all those hungry little faces,
and their little legs that looked quite hollow--but the children
thought it was fine. They were so polite, boys! When we marched into
their classrooms they all stood up and saluted us as if they had been
soldiers. They showed us their copy books and told us what the lesson
was. In one class the master himself was quite scared because he
wanted to speak English to make us feel at home. But he made us a fine
speech, saying how thankful they all were to their American friends
for being so generous to them. He thanked us especially for thinking
of the children and for trying to help them when their fathers were
away fighting. Then he asked the boys whose fathers or brothers were
in the war to raise their hands, and, do you know, almost every boy
could raise his hand. They were proud to do it, too. Their hands went
up quickly and some of them waved--as you do when you especially want
the teacher to pay attention to you. The master asked the boys whose
fathers would never come back to raise their hands, and there were so
many of them that we could hardly bear to count them; and this time
the hands went up very slowly and their faces were very, very sober.

In the first school we went to, the big hall was decorated with a long
string of American flags. Every one was drawn very carefully, and then
colored with crayons by the littlest children. There were paper
chains, too, made out of red, white, and blue paper; and finally, when
the buns came in, the baskets were all decorated with the American
flag because the American people had given the bread.

The boys all marched into the hall in a long, long line, and, Bill and
Junior and Ben, I was so afraid that there wouldn't be enough buns to
go around! They marched up to the baskets, their little wooden shoes
making a terrible clatter on the stone floor; and every boy got a bun
in one hand and a bar of chocolate in the other, and every boy said
"Thank you" in French, very politely. I don't think even the smallest
forgot that, though some of them were so excited that they couldn't
march straight and some of them couldn't talk at all plainly, even in
French. There was one time when I got very much excited myself. That
was when one little boy, in a blue soldier suit just like his
father's, said "Thank you" in English. I nearly dropped all the buns I
had in my two hands, I was so surprised.

The Mayor of the district, who probably seemed like the President of the
United States to most of the children, made a speech and told them how
sorry the Americans had been that they couldn't have their lunch in the
afternoon, and how the Americans wanted them to be strong and well and
happy and had given them the buns and the chocolate to help, and he
talked to them in such a pleasant voice and in such a loving sort of
way, that when he said he wanted them to shout, "Vive l'Amerique!" which
means, "Hurrah for the United States of America!" they shouted--really
and truly shouted--just as if they'd been little American boys.

At the next school, we went to the building where the tiniest children
of all learned their kindergarten games. They marched for us, and sang a
little song about the good "Saint Christopher", who was kind to little
children; and a little boy who had lost his mother and father in the war
and who was really too little to understand, said a very polite speech
to us and promised us that he and his little friends would always
remember how kind the Americans had been to them. He was so tiny that he
hid his head in the teacher's apron when he had finished.

Finally we went to the biggest school of all, and there we found a
great hall filled with classes of little girls, all dressed in black,
all looking so pale and thin and sad that we were glad to think that
perhaps the buns and chocolates we had brought would--in a month or
two--bring some color into their poor little faces, and perhaps even
put some fat on their wrists and hands that were so thin they seemed
like birds' claws. One of the older girls had made a fine big panel
picture here showing the children eating their buns and chocolates and
capering up and down just as I've seen somebody caper a bit when he
was going to have--was it ice cream for Sunday dinner?

At the end, the nice old Mayor made another speech, in which he told
us a little bit of how brave the children had been when they were
hungry, and how glad he was that they were now going to have the
American food, and then he thanked us all over again. So, then, one of
the American doctors said that when we came over here to France with
our men, our food, and our love, we weren't making gifts, we were just
trying to pay the debt that America had owed to France since Lafayette
and his men came across the sea to help us in our war. Then the
doctor told us how the Arabs believe that people who once eat even a
tiny piece of bread together will always be friends, so the little
children and their teachers, and the nice old Mayor, and all the
Americans from the Red Cross ate some of the American buns and--that
is the end of the story!

                                   --"_National School Service._"




GENEVIEVE'S LETTER


    Here is part of a letter written by a nine-year-old French girl to
    girls of the William Penn High School, Philadelphia, who had
    "adopted" her as their "war orphan". After you read it, tell what
    kind of little girl you think she is.

Dear Sisters: I have just received your letter. I am much touched by
your kindness to me, and for your generous hearts. I am contented to
find among you so many devoted new sisters for the poor orphan of this
unfortunate war, which has killed all our fathers. Dear Sisters, I don't
want you to see a like war with you, for it is too frightful and too
sad. I shall not speak any more about it; that gives too much trouble.

You ask me of what I have the greatest need; indeed, that will be a
dress if that is possible for you; for mamma does not want us to abuse
your good hearts. The dress, I should like to see it dark blue, for up
to now I have always worn black and white. Mamma permits me now to
wear blue, and I think that will be becoming.

Mamma has made little economies of money. She is going to have my
photograph taken, and I am going to send them. I think that will give
you pleasure, and I will write to you often. I do not forget you in my
morning and evening prayers. Once again, thanks, all these sisters
whom I do not know. But if I have the good fortune to grow up, I will
see you all with pleasure.




TRAVEL


    If you have a strong imagination and have read and have liked your
    geography and, perhaps, some books of travel, you will enjoy this
    poem. As you read see how many different places are hinted at.
    Read the poem through; close your book, and make a list of all you
    can remember.

      I should like to rise and go
      Where the golden apples grow;--
      Where below another sky
      Parrot islands anchored lie,
      And, watched by cockatoos and goats,
      Lonely Crusoes building boats;--
      Where in sunshine reaching out
      Eastern cities, miles about,
      Are with mosque and minaret
      Among sandy gardens set,
      And the rich goods from near and far
      Hang for sale in the bazaar;--
      Where the Great Wall round China goes,
      And on one side the desert blows,
      And with bell and voice and drum,
      Cities on the other hum;--
      Where are forests, hot as fire,
      Wide as England, tall as a spire,
      Full of apes and cocoanuts
      And the negro hunters' huts;--
      Where the knotty crocodile
      Lies and blinks in the Nile,
      And the red flamingo flies
      Hunting fish before his eyes;--
      Where in jungles, near and far,
      Man-devouring tigers are,
      Lying close and giving ear
      Lest the hunt be drawing near,
      Or a comer-by be seen
      Swinging in a palanquin;--
      Where among the desert sands
      Some deserted city stands,
      All its children, sweep and prince,
      Grown to manhood ages since,
      Not a foot in street or house,
      Not a stir of child or mouse,
      And when kindly falls the night,
      In all the town no spark of light.
      There I'll come when I'm a man
      With a camel caravan;
      Light a fire in the gloom
      Of some dusky dining room;
      See the pictures on the walls,
      Heroes, fights, and festivals;
      And in a corner find the toys
      Of the old Egyptian boys.
                        --_Robert Louis Stevenson._




HOW THE WISH CAME TRUE


    Not every child who plans how some day he is going to travel has a
    chance to carry out his plans. But Robert Louis Stevenson travelled
    far enough to see nearly all the places he dreamed of. He did not
    travel just for pleasure, however; his health was so poor that he
    wandered all over the world to find a climate where he could live.
    The place he found was an island in the Southern Pacific, one of a
    group called Samoa, where he spent all the last years of his life.
    Stevenson was a man who made friends wherever he went. In Samoa the
    natives loved him dearly. Their name for him was Tusitala, "the
    Teller of Tales," because he wrote such wonderful stories.




RULES FOR USING THE EYES


    Read the following rules through once; then cover the page with a
    sheet of paper, and answer the questions.

1. When reading, writing, or doing other close work, be sure to have
good, clear light, preferably over the left shoulder if writing, and
not directly in the eyes nor reflected sharply from the paper.

2. Do not hold your work less than 12 inches from your eyes.

3. Do not use the eyes too long continuously--rest them a few minutes
occasionally by closing them or by looking into the distance to relax
them. One should do this at least every hour, especially if reading
fine type or doing intense, delicate work.

4. Keep away from places where stone chips, sparks, or emery dust is
flying. If you have to work where such dangers exist, wear goggles.

5. If strong light bothers you, wear slightly brown non-magnifying
glasses outdoors, with a broad-brimmed hat.

6. Avoid the common towel and do not rub the eyes with dirty hands.
Contagious eye disease is spread in these two ways.


QUESTIONS

    1. Give two rules about the right use of light for reading,
    writing, etc.

    2. How far from your eyes should you hold your book?

    3. Give the rule for resting the eyes.

    4. How can you avoid danger from sparks, emery dust and stone
    chips?

    5. What should you do if strong light bothers you?

    6. Why should you not use a dirty towel or rub your eyes with
    dirty hands?




ACTING FOR THE MOVIES


    Would you like to go behind the screen and see a great film
    produced--to see the hundreds of men and women and horses and
    costumes and properties that are necessary to produce a thrilling
    story? Would you like to take a part in the picture, and dress up
    in one of the costumes, and ride before the clicking cameras?

    See whether you can take one of these brief scenes and, by reading
    carefully all that the paragraph tells you, picture it before the
    class so vividly that the class will know which scene you are
    reproducing. That is what the actor must do every time a film is
    produced. You may take anything in the room that will help you in
    making the picture true to the story. You must remember that your
    success depends upon how well you can express your thought and
    feeling through your face and hands and body.

1. He sat on the bank eagerly watching every little ripple on the
water and Jack sat beside him, not understanding the game at all nor
why his master should have become so lazy. Suddenly, Tom jumped up
and, pulling in the line with a jerk, danced wildly about, while Jack,
now as excited as his master, barked furiously at the tiny wiggles on
the end of the line.

2. Suddenly he drew in his horse and listened anxiously--was that the
far off rumble of guns? Could the battle have begun?

3. Lawrence counted the change in his hand carefully, wondering
whether the amount he held was just enough or just too little. Every
now and then he glanced up anxiously, just to make sure that the
price-tag in the window was still $4.50 and that the cost of the
football had not in some miraculous manner grown to $14.50.

4. The king's wise men and learned doctors brought down great books in
which were written all the laws of the kingdom. They traced through
long pages with trembling fingers and anxious, frowning eyes. At the
end of each page they would shake their heads and mutter among
themselves, and as they closed the last ponderous volume they
approached the king with many gestures of despair. "We cannot find an
answer written in all the Books of the Kingdom, your majesty."

5. I saw some one drawing slowly near along the road. He was plainly
blind, for he tapped before him with a stick, and wore a great green
shade over his eyes and nose; and he was hunched, as if with age or
weakness, and wore a large, old, tattered sea-cloak with a hood, that
made him appear positively deformed. I never saw a more dreadful
looking figure. He stopped a little from the inn, and raising his
voice in an odd sing-song, addressed the air in front of him.

6. Jerry knew that his life would hang in the balance for the next few
minutes, but he hoped that by hugging close to the shadows of the
wall, and by not making a sound, he could pass by the careless group
around the fire. He crouched down in despair when one of the men
turned and apparently looked accusingly at his particular shadow on
the wall. But the man made no sign and Jerry crept on.

7. One day on their daily rounds they found a disagreeable surprise
awaiting them at the lake. Their beaver traps were all sprung and were
all empty. There was a light snow on the ground and they stooped to
examine the signs left by the thief in his hurry. An unmistakable
trail led off down the river and they followed it eagerly until a
shift in the wind brought more snow and the tracks were covered.




CLEAR THINKING


    The following problems are to be answered without the use of
    figures. Read each problem carefully and decide whether your
    answer should be _yes_ or _no_. Each question requires one or the
    other of these words; no other answer will be counted correct. Put
    the answer to the first question on the first line, and in the
    margin of the paper, mark it number 1. Use a separate line for
    each problem and be sure to number your answer to correspond. If
    you are not sure of the answer, guess at it and pass on to the
    next problem. When you have finished, sign your name and grade at
    the bottom of the paper, and wait quietly for the others.

1. It took George thirty-one seconds to read these directions
carefully. John read them in twenty-seven seconds. Can George read
faster than John?

2. Mary was born in February, 1910. Her cousin, Marion, is four months
older. Was Marion born in 1910?

3. John went with his two brothers to the park. One brother spent
twenty-five cents, the other spent thirty cents. John spent more than
these two together. In all did they spend more than one dollar?

4. When flour sells at eight cents per pound, I can get a barrel for
twelve dollars. A barrel of flour weighs almost two hundred pounds.
Would I save more than a dollar by purchasing flour by the barrel?

5. My father bought a talking-machine for sixty-five dollars, and a
dozen records for twenty-five dollars more. Will a hundred dollar bill
pay for both?

6. The regulation boy-scout pace calls for a mile in twelve minutes.
Could a good scout cover four miles in an hour?

7. Coffee grows only in tropical countries. Do you think we import
much from Alaska?




THE LAND OF EQUAL CHANCE


    This little play gives you a chance to pretend that you are a star
    actor or actress; for the central character, Young America, is you.

    In order to succeed in a land of equal chance, Young America will
    need four things. Find what they are. Can you tell how each thing
    will help him?

Time: January, 19--. Place: At the edge of the land. On either side of
the stage there are two small curtained windows. At the centre of the
stage, back, are two long steps leading to a dark, closed curtain.
Enter from one side Father Time, from the other Mother Space.

FATHER TIME.--Happy New Year, Mother Space! What do you carry so
carefully?

MOTHER SPACE.--Shall I let you see? (_Unrolls her large map._) See, a
land of rocks and rills, of woods and templed hills. Here are the
broad prairies, here the great mountains full of treasure, and down
here the sweet, warm southern fields.

F. T. (_Looks at the unrolled scroll._)--That seems to be a map of the
United States.

M. S.--Most people call it that. I call it the Land-of-Equal-Chance.

F. T.--An excellent name!

M. S.--By all the fields, mountains, cities and prairies, what sort of
child do you think should live here?

F. T.--Leave that to me. (_Calls._) Come, Young America. (_Calls again
and again. At last Young America dressed as a boy scout, pack on back,
enters cautiously._)

F. T.--Come, Young America, Mother Space gives you this chart to the
Land-of-Equal-Chance. Go, the land lies beyond. It is your domain.

YOUNG AMERICA (_bewildered_).--But what shall I do there? Must I go
alone?

F. T.--No, my child, you cannot go alone. Do you see these four
windows? Go, draw aside the curtains.

Y. A. (_Goes to the first window and draws aside the curtain. Above
the window is plainly printed "Action"._)--Here am I, Young America. I
must go on a journey. Will you go with me, Spirit of Action?

SPIRIT OF ACTION (_Appears suddenly at the window._)--Go? Yes. Wait a
moment. (_Bounds to the stage._) Where are you going?

Y. A. (_Points to the curtain at rear._)--There, Spirit of Action.
What will you do if you go with me?

SP. OF A. (_Laughs._)--I shall make your blood dance and your heart
beat high. I shall fill your hands with glorious work. Your muscles
shall be strong with the doing.

Y. A.--O, Spirit of Action, you make me want to start at once. I could
not do without you. But, wait. (_Goes to the second window, draws the
curtain back to see the word "Understanding"._) Come, friend
Understanding.

SPIRIT OF UNDERSTANDING.--Here am I, Young America.

Y. A.--I am going away, Understanding.

SP. OF U.--So! Why do you go?

Y. A.--I want to go. I do not know exactly why.

SP. OF U. (_Comes on the stage._)--Then you do need me, Young America.
I will make your eye clear, and your mind aware. If I go with you, you
must think. Will you?

Y. A.--Thinking is hard, but I promise if you show me how. Now, for my
next friend. (_Goes to the third window, draws back the curtain and
sees, "Self-Control"._) Ho, Self-Control, it is I, Young America!
Come, go with me!

SPIRIT OF SELF-CONTROL.--Not so fast! Steady, Young America. Go with
you?

Y. A.--Yes, on a journey.

SP. OF S-C.--If I go with you I must have a big promise.

Y. A.--What?

SP. OF S-C.--You must play the game of life with fair rules--the same
rules for all.

Y. A.--Yes.

SP. OF S-C.--And you must help make the rules.

Y. A.--Yes.

SP. OF S-C.--And the hardest of all, you must obey the rules yourself.

Y. A.--I'll try, Self-Control. (_Self-Control joins the others on the
stage. Y. A. draws aside the curtain from the fourth window, marked
"Sympathy"._)

Y. A.--Come, friend, Young America is going on a journey.

SPIRIT OF SYMPATHY (_Appears._)--A journey? Who goes with you?

Y. A.--Self-Control, Understanding, and Action.

SP. OF S.--You need more than they can give.

Y. A.--What more do I need?

SP. OF S.--Why, don't you see, you have no one to make you feel for
others in the game. You can't play or work alone. You must join hands
and pull together. (_Comes out from the window._) Take my hand.

Y. A. (_wonderingly_).--Your hand is soft and warm, Spirit of
Sympathy. I should like to have you go.

SP. OF A.--Hurry, come, we must be gone. Sit here, Young America, let
me put these sandals on your feet. There.

Y. A.--They fit so well, Spirit. And see, wings! Ah, sandals with wings!

SP. OF U.--Sometimes it will be dark. Keep this torch burning. (_She
lights the torch and hands it to the boy._)

Y. A.--How bright it makes the way.

SP. OF S-C.--There will be rugged heights to climb in that land, dark
abysses into which you might fall. Take this staff. My strength is in
it. If wild beasts attack you, defend yourself. Be steady, steady.

Y. A.--A staff! How strong it is!

SP. OF S. (_A long garland of flowers trails from her hands. She winds
them about Young America and the three other spirits. Then she takes
Young America's hand._)--Come, we go as one to the Land-of-Equal-Chance.
(_The group, bound by their flower chain, moves up the steps towards the
curtain._)

SP. OF A. (_Springs ahead but holds to the chain._)--Open, open! Young
America is here!

ALL.--Open, open for Young America!

(_Father Time and Mother Space, who have been standing aside, take
their places at the large curtain and after a pause slowly lift it,
revealing the figure of Liberty bathed in shining light. Young America
starts back._)

LIBERTY.--Come, Young America!

Y. A. (_Aside to companions._)--Dare I go?

ALL THE SPIRITS.--We will go with you.

LIBERTY.--Come, Young America!

(_Young America advances slowly towards the outstretched arms of
Liberty and kneels. The Spirits follow forming a group which says,
"Onward into the Land-of-Equal-Chance"._)

                                --"_National School Service._"


QUESTIONS

    Each of Young America's companions gave him a present. What were
    the presents? Was each a suitable gift to come from its giver? Of
    what use will each gift be?

    Do you think Young America would be likely to succeed with only
    three of these companions? If so, which one do you think he can
    spare?

[Illustration: "COME, YOUNG AMERICA!"]




THE BROKEN FLOWER-POT


    Is this a real, live boy who tells this story? He did two things,
    a bad one and a good one. You probably would not have done the bad
    one. Try to think out for yourself, not to answer the question to
    your teacher or class, whether or not you would have done the good
    one.


I

My father was seated on the lawn before the house, his straw hat over
his eyes, and his book on his lap. Suddenly a beautiful delft
blue-and-white flower-pot, which had been set on the window-sill of an
upper story, fell to the ground with a crash, and the fragments flew
up round my father's feet. But my father continued to read.

"Dear, dear!" cried my mother, who was at work in the porch; "my poor
flower-pot, that I prized so much! I would rather the best tea-set
were broken! The poor geranium I reared myself, and the dear, dear
flower-pot which Mr. Caxton bought for me my last birthday! That
naughty child must have done this!"

I came out of the house as bold as brass, and said rapidly, "Yes,
mother, it was I who pushed out the flower-pot."

"Hush!" said my nurse, while gazing at my father, who had very slowly
taken off his hat, and was looking on with serious, wide-awake eyes.
"Hush! And if he did break it, ma'am, it was quite an accident. He was
standing so, and he never meant it. Did you? Speak!" this in a
whisper, "or father will be so very angry."

"Well," said mother, "I suppose it was an accident; take care in the
future, my child. You are sorry, I see, to have grieved me. There is a
kiss; don't fret."

"No, mother, you must not kiss me; I don't deserve it, I pushed out
the flower-pot on purpose."

"Ah! and why?" said my father, walking up.

"For fun!" said I, hanging my head; "just to see how you'd look,
father; and that's the truth of it."

My father threw his book fifty feet off, stooped down, and caught me
in his arms. "Boy," he said, "you have done wrong; you shall repair it
by remembering all your life that your father blessed God for giving
him a son who spoke truth in spite of fear."


II

Not long after, Mr. Squills gave me a beautiful large box of dominoes,
made of cut ivory. This domino box was my delight. I was never tired
of playing at dominoes with my old nurse, and I slept with the box
under my pillow.

"Ah!" said my father one day when he found me arranging the ivory pieces
in the parlor, "do you like that better than all your playthings?"

"Oh, yes, father!"

"You would be very sorry if mother were to throw that box out of the
window and break it, for fun." I looked pleadingly at my father, and
made no answer. "But perhaps you would be very glad," he went on, "if
suddenly one of those good fairies you read of could change the domino
box into a beautiful geranium in a lovely blue-and-white flower-pot.
Then you could have the pleasure of putting it on mother's window-sill."

"Indeed I would," said I, half crying.

"My dear boy, I believe you; but good _wishes_ do not mend bad
actions; good _actions_ mend bad actions." So saying he shut the door
and went out.

"My boy," said he the next day, "I am going to walk to town; will you
come? And, by the by, fetch your domino box; I should like to show it
to a person there."

"Father," said I by the way, "there are no fairies now how then can my
domino box be changed into a geranium in a blue-and-white flower-pot?"

"My dear," said my father, leaning his hand on my shoulder, "everybody
who is in earnest to be good, carries two fairies about with him--one
here," and he touched my forehead, "and one there," and he touched my
heart.

"I don't understand, father."

"I can wait until you do, my son."

My father stopped at a nursery-gardener's, and after looking over the
flowers, paused before a large geranium. "Ah, this is finer than that
which your mother was so fond of. What is the price of this, sir?"

"Only seven and six pence," said the gardener. My father buttoned up
his pocket.

"I can't afford it to-day," said he gently, and we walked out.


III

On entering the town we stopped again at a china warehouse. "Have you
a flower-pot like that I bought some months ago? Ah, here is one,
marked three and six pence. Yes, that is the price. Well, when
mother's birthday comes again, we must buy her another. That is some
months to wait. And we can wait, my boy. For truth, that blooms all
the year round, is better than a poor geranium; and a word that is
never broken is better than a piece of delft."

My head, which had been drooping before, rose again; but the rush of
joy at my heart almost stifled me. "I have called to pay your bill,"
said my father, entering a shop.

"And, by the by," he added, "my boy can show you a beautiful domino
box." I produced my treasure, and the shopman praised it highly. "It
is always well, my boy, to know what a thing is worth, in case one
wishes to part with it. If my son gets tired of his plaything, what
will you give him for it?"

[Illustration: MY FATHER STOPPED AT A NURSERY-GARDENER'S]

"Why, sir," said the shopman; "I think we could give eighteen
shillings for it."

"Eighteen shillings!" said my father; "you would give that? Well, my
boy, whenever you do grow tired of your box, you have my leave to sell
it."

My father paid his bill, and went out. I lingered behind a few
moments, and joined him at the end of the street.

"Father, father!" I cried, clapping my hands, "we can buy the
geranium; we can buy the flower-pot!" And I pulled a handful of silver
from my pocket.

"Did I not say right?" said my father. "You have found the two fairies!"

Ah, how proud, how overjoyed I was, when after placing vase and flower
on the window-sill, I plucked my mother by the gown, and made her
follow me to the spot.

"It is his doing and his money!" said my father; "good actions have
mended the bad."

                         --_From "The Caxtons", by Bulwer-Lytton._


    1. What did the boy do when he "lingered behind a few moments"?

    2. If you were to act out this story, you would have to imagine
    yourself in several places. Make a list of them in the right order.

    3. What do you think "seven-and-sixpence" means? How much money do
    you think the boy had left when he had paid for the flower-pot?

    4. What do you think the two fairies were?

    5. This selection is divided into three parts, each headed with a
    Roman numeral. Write a heading or topic for each part.




SAINT GEORGE AND THE DRAGON


    Here is the story of the greatest deed of the patron, or guardian,
    saint of England. As you read the story, try to remember how the
    young men of England, France, and America showed themselves worthy
    followers of this brave, noble knight.

Long ago, when the knights lived in the land, there was one knight
whose name was Sir George. He was not only braver than all the rest,
but he was so noble, kind, and good that the people came to call him
Saint George.

No robbers ever dared to trouble the people who lived near his castle,
and all the wild animals were killed or driven away, so the little
children could play even in the woods without being afraid.

One day St. George rode throughout the country. Everywhere he saw the
men busy at their work in the fields, the women singing at work in
their homes, and the little children shouting at their play.

"These people are all safe and happy; they need me no more," said St.
George. "But somewhere perhaps there is trouble and fear. There may be
some place where little children cannot play in safety; some woman may
have been carried away from her home; perhaps there are even dragons
left to be slain. Tomorrow I shall ride away and never stop until I
find work which only a knight can do."

Early the next morning St. George put on his helmet and all his shining
armor, and fastened his sword at his side. Then he mounted his great
black horse and rode out from his castle gate. Down the steep, rough
road he went, sitting straight and tall, and looking brave and strong as
a knight should look. On through the little village at the foot of the
hill and out across the country he rode. Everywhere he saw rich fields
filled with waving grain; everywhere there was peace and plenty.

He rode on and on until at last he came into a part of the country he
had never seen before. He noticed that there were no men working in
the fields. The houses which he passed stood silent and empty. The
grass along the roadside was scorched as if a fire had passed over it.
A field of wheat was all trampled and burned.

St. George drew up his horse, and looked carefully about him. Everywhere
there was silence and desolation. "What can be the dreadful thing which
has driven all the people from their homes? I must find out, and give
them help if I can," he said. But there was no one to ask, so St. George
rode forward until at last, far in the distance, he saw the walls of a
city. "Here surely I shall find some one who can tell me the cause of
all this," he said, so he rode more swiftly toward the city.

Just then the great gate opened and St. George saw crowds of people
standing inside the wall. Some of them were weeping; all of them
seemed afraid. As St. George watched, he saw a beautiful maiden
dressed in white, with a girdle of scarlet about her waist, pass
through the gate alone. The gate clanged shut, and the maiden walked
along the road, weeping bitterly. She did not see St. George, who was
riding quickly towards her.

"Maiden, why do you weep?" he asked as he reached her side.

She looked up at St. George sitting there on his horse, so straight
and tall and beautiful. "Oh, Sir Knight!" she cried, "ride quickly
from this place. You know not the danger you are in!"

"Danger!" said St. George; "do you think a knight would flee from
danger? Besides, you, a fair, weak girl, are here alone. Think you a
knight would leave you or any woman so? Tell me your trouble that I
may help you."

[Illustration: ST. GEORGE SAW THE HEAD OF THE DRAGON LIFTED FROM THE
POOL]

"No! No!" she cried. "Hasten away. You would only lose your life.
There is a terrible dragon near. He may come at any moment. One breath
would destroy you if he found you here. Go! Go quickly!"

"Tell me more of this," said St. George sternly. "Why are you here
alone to meet this dragon? Are there no men left in yon city?"

"Oh," said the maiden, "my father, the king, is old and feeble. He has
only me to help him take care of his people. This terrible dragon has
driven them from their homes, carried away their cattle, and ruined
their crops. They have all come within the walls of the city for safety.
For weeks now the dragon has come to the very gates of the city. We have
been forced to give him two sheep each day for his breakfast.

"Yesterday there were no sheep left to give, so he said that unless a
young maiden were given him today he would break down the walls and
destroy the city. The people cried to my father to save them, but he
could do nothing. I am going to give myself to the dragon. Perhaps if
he has me, the Princess, he may spare our people."

"Lead the way, brave Princess. Show me where this monster may be found."

When the Princess saw St. George's flashing eyes and great, strong arm
as he drew forth his sword, she felt afraid no more. Turning, she led
the way to a shining pool.

"There's where he stays," she whispered. "See, the water moves. He is
waking."

St. George saw the head of the dragon lifted from the pool. Fold on
fold he rose from the water. When he saw St. George he gave a roar of
rage and plunged toward him. The smoke and flames flew from his
nostrils, and he opened his great jaws as if to swallow both the
knight and his horse.

St. George shouted and, waving his sword above his head, rode at the
dragon. Quick and hard came the blows from St. George's sword. It was
a terrible battle.

At last the dragon was wounded. He roared with pain and plunged at St.
George, opening his great mouth close to the brave Knight's head.

St. George looked carefully, then struck with all his strength straight
down through the dragon's throat, and he fell at the horse's feet--dead.

Then St. George shouted for joy at his victory. He called to the
Princess. She came and stood beside him.

"Give me the girdle from about your waist, O Princess," said St. George.

The Princess gave him her girdle and St. George bound it around the
dragon's neck, and they pulled the dragon after them by that little
silken ribbon back to the city so that all of the people could see
that the dragon could never harm them again.

When they saw St. George bringing the Princess back in safety and knew
that the dragon was slain, they threw open the gates of the city and
sent up great shouts of joy. The King heard them and came out from his
palace to see why the people were shouting. When he saw his daughter
safe he was the happiest of them all. "O brave Knight," he said, "I am
old and weak. Stay here and help me guard my people from harm."

"I'll stay as long as ever you have need of me," St. George answered.
So he lived in the palace and helped the old King take care of his
people, and when the old King died, St. George was made King in his
stead. The people felt happy and safe so long as they had such a brave
and good man for their King.

   --_From "Stories for Children and How to Tell Them"._
                             --_Courtesy of J. Berg Esenwein._


QUESTIONS

    1. Why did St. George feel that he ought to ride away from his
    home? What do you conclude from this must have been the chief duty
    of a knight?

    2. What signs did St. George find that he had come to a place
    where there was work for him to do?

    3. For what do you admire the Princess? Which do you think was
    braver, St. George or she?

    4. What nation recently played the part of the dragon in the
    world? What form of government did this nation have?

    5. What nations played the part of St. George? In what way did the
    governments of all but one of these nations differ from the
    "dragon" nation?




NONSENSE TEST


    This is just a little nonsense test but don't be too sure that you
    can get everything in it exactly right. Carry out the following
    directions very carefully.

No matter whether Benjamin Franklin was the father of his country or
not, draw a circle in the center of your paper. Now if December is
the first month of the year put the largest of these four numbers
in the circle. (17-6-11-21). But if not, put any one of the smaller
numbers there. Then copy this example on your paper under the circle.
(7 + 5 = .) Write a wrong answer to it, mark it correct and sign your
name at the bottom.




TURNING OUT THE INTRUDER

    Arrange your paper with your name on the first line at the right,
    and your grade below it on the second line. Skip the third line,
    but on the next eight lines, in the margin, write the figures, 1
    to 8.

    Here is an exercise that will let you see not only how well you can
    follow printed directions, but also how well you can arrange words
    in classes or groups. Read the first group of words at the bottom of
    the page. What kind of list does it seem to be? A list of several
    kinds of fruit, does it not? Or at least it would be a good list of
    fruit, if we could omit the word ROPE, which does not seem to belong
    to the list at all. After figure 1, on your paper, write the word
    ROPE.

    In each of the other groups there is also a word that should be
    dropped out. You are going to write these words on your paper. Start
    with the next group, and when you find the word that should be
    omitted, write it after figure 2; and in the same way, finish the
    remaining groups in the exercise. When you finish wait quietly for
    the others to do so.

        1.      2.         3.         4.               5.

      apple   lion      mountain   lumbering       automobile
      peach   tiger     gulfs      farming         store
      rope    elephant  hills      grazing         bank
      grape   tusks     plain      manufacturing   station
      pear    horse     valley     jumping         hotel
      orange  cow       island     fishing         church

                6.         7.         8.

              flowers   cup        chair
              grass     saucer     table
              fence     plate      room
              tree      pan        sofa
              bush      pitcher    bench
              weeds     bowl       bookcase




ROOSEVELT'S FAVORITE STUDY


    You should all begin to read this story at the same moment.

    At the end of five minutes you will be asked to close your books
    and follow your teacher's directions.

Very often the things that a boy or girl likes to do as a child are
signs of what he or she will like to do as a man or woman. This is
true in the case of Theodore Roosevelt. One of the subjects in which
he was all his life most interested was his favorite study as a boy.
It seems that he was not an unusually clever student in his early
years. In Latin and Greek and mathematics he was poor; in science and
history and geography he made better progress; but best of all he
loved natural history--the study of animals.

His first experience in this study befell him when he was nine years
old. He was walking past one of the city markets one day, when he saw
a dead seal lying on a slab of wood. He had just been reading about
seals, and it seemed a wonderful thing to see a real one. He became
possessed with a longing to own the seal. Being unable to form any
plan for satisfying that longing, he contented himself with visiting
the market day by day to gaze upon the object which proved so
interesting to him. He took the seal's measurements carefully with a
folding pocket rule and had considerable difficulty when he came to
measuring its girth. Somehow or other he got the animal's skull, and
with it he and two of his cousins immediately founded what they called
the "Roosevelt Museum of Natural History". At the same time his
observations of the seal and the measurements which he had made of it
were carefully set down in a blank book.

In another blank book were recorded further observations in natural
history. This work was entitled, "Natural History on Insects, by
Theodore Roosevelt, Jr.," and began in this fashion: "All these
insects are native of North America. Most of the insects are not in
other books. I will write about ants first."

The beginning of the treatise on ants is entertaining, if not deeply
scientific. "Ants," he writes, "are di_fi_ded into three sorts for
every species. These kinds are officer, soilder [soldier?] and worker.
There are about one officer to ten soilders and one soilder to two
workers." The book then went on to describe other insects which he had
observed, all of which he assured the reader "inhabit North America".
At the end of the volume on insects were a few notes on fishes. Among
these was a description of the crayfish. "I need not describe the form
of the crayfish to you," wrote the young author; "look at the lobster
and you have its form." These observations, recorded at the age of
nine years, are worth mentioning because they show a real interest in
the creatures of which he was writing.

When Theodore was thirteen, his father sent him to a little shop to
take lessons in taxidermy, the stuffing and mounting of animals. Then
the boy wanted to secure his own specimens; so his father gave him a
gun for that purpose. When he first tried to use this gun, he was
puzzled to find that he could not see the objects at which his
companions were shooting. One day some boys with him read aloud an
advertisement written in huge letters on a billboard some distance
away, and Theodore then realized, for the first time, that there must
be something the matter with his eyes because he could not see the
letters. His father soon got him a pair of spectacles, which, he says,
opened up a new world to him.

When he was fourteen the family went to Europe, and, among other
expeditions, took a trip up the Nile. Before they started on this
trip. Theodore picked up in Cairo a book which contained some account
of the birds of that region. Armed with this book and with the gun
which his father had given him, he secured a number of specimens of
birds in Egypt.

Unfortunately for the rest of the family, Theodore insisted on
carrying his natural history specimens about with him from place to
place. One day when the family was in Vienna, his brother Elliot
inquired plaintively of their father whether it would be possible that
he should now and then have a room to himself in the hotels, instead
of being obliged always to share one with Theodore. Mr. Roosevelt was
perfectly willing to comply, but inquired the reason for Elliot's
request. Elliot said, "Come and see our room, and you will
understand." When they reached the boys' room, they found bottles of
taxidermist's supplies everywhere, and in the basin the remains of
specimens which Theodore had lately captured. Theodore himself records
the fact that he was "grubby". "I suppose," he says, "that all growing
boys tend to be grubby; but the small boy with the taste for natural
history is generally the very grubbiest of all."

      --_Adapted from "The Life of Theodore Roosevelt,"
                  by William Draper Lewis.
                     Courtesy of The John C. Winston Co._


TOPICS

    Your teacher will call on you to come to the front of your class
    and tell about one of the following topics:

    1. Roosevelt and the seal.

    2. Roosevelt's eyesight.

    3. His trip up the Nile.

    4. That Roosevelt boy as a room-mate.




WHAT A CHIMNEY IS


    Probably you think you can tell all about a chimney, but you may
    be able to learn something interesting from this selection.

    You should all begin reading at the same time. Your teacher will
    give the signal when to close your books. She will then ask you to
    write answers to the questions at the end.

A hollow tree was the first chimney of our unlettered forefathers.
Accidentally set on fire, this tree illustrated the principle upon
which all chimneys have been constructed. It showed that warm air,
being lighter than cold air, tends to rise. When this warm air is
confined within an enclosure open at the top and bottom, a strong
upward current fills the space. As the warm air rises, the cold air
rushes in through the opening at the bottom of the shaft, and in this
way a draft is created which supplies the fire at the foot of the
chimney with the oxygen it needs to support combustion.

Simple chimneys are constructed of logs and mortar, or of stones and
mortar, such as those built for log cabins; of brick, also of cement and
of iron pipes made for the purpose. Since a long column of hot air
produces a stronger current than a short one, the tallest chimneys,
other things being equal, produce the strongest draft. Tall chimneys are
larger at the base than at the top. This is to make the structure stable
and to increase the draft by contracting the flue at the top. At the
bottom the chimney is usually connected with the fire by a flue. A
fireplace, however, is practically an enlarged part of the chimney.

The size and height of a chimney depend upon the size of the furnace.
For larger furnaces there is greater danger of making the flue too
small than too large. The stacks or chimneys of the largest steamships
like the Mauritania and the Imperator are so large that two railway
trains could run through them abreast, and they are about 175 feet in
length. The difference between a chimney and a smokestack is in name
only; chimneys constructed of tubing made from iron plates are usually
called stacks.

                                       --_From "The World Book".
                                      Courtesy of W. F. Quarrie & Co._


QUESTIONS

    1. How does a difference between warm and cold air make chimneys
    useful?

    2. Why is a tall chimney better than a short one?

    3. How large are the chimneys or stacks on the largest steamships?




IS IT TRUE?


    Arrange your paper as you are accustomed to do. Number the lines
    from one to ten. As you read each of the following statements,
    decide for yourself if it is true or false, and write the word
    _true_ or the word _false_ as the case may be, on the proper line
    of your paper.

1. Cloth is woven on looms.

2. Strawberries grow on trees.

3. The American Indians were always friendly to the early settlers.

4. Russia is a happy country.

5. The monks of the middle ages were the best educated men of their
time.

6. The Pilgrims settled Virginia in 1620.

7. It is not important that a voter should be intelligent.

8. Warm clothing costs less than doctors' bills.

9. Education is cheaper than revolution.

10. Money earns money.




FRANKLIN WRITES FOR THE NEWSPAPER


    Here is Benjamin Franklin's own account of his first attempt at
    writing. You see, he did not have a chance to learn to write, as
    you do, by practice in composition in school.

My brother had, in 1720 or 1721, begun to print a newspaper. It was the
second that appeared in America, and was called the "New England
Courant". The only one before it was the "Boston News-Letter". I
remember his being _dissuaded_ by some of his friends from the
undertaking, as not likely to succeed, one newspaper being, in their
judgment, enough for America. At this time (1771) there are not less
than five and twenty. He went on, however, with the undertaking; and
after having worked in composing the types and printing off the sheets,
I was employed to carry the papers through the streets to the customers.

He had some ingenious men among his friends, who amused themselves by
writing little pieces for this paper, which gained it credit and made
it more in demand; and these gentlemen often visited us. Hearing their
conversations, and their accounts of the _approbation_ their papers
were received with, I was excited to try my hand among them; but being
still a boy, and suspecting that my brother would object to printing
anything of mine in his paper if he knew it to be mine, I contrived to
_disguise_ my hand; and, writing an _anonymous_ paper, I put it in at
night under the door of the printing-house. It was found in the
morning and communicated to his writing friends when they called in as
usual. They read it, and commented on it in my hearing; and I had the
_exquisite_ pleasure of finding it met with their approbation, and
that in their different guesses at the author, none were named but men
of some _character_ among us for learning and _ingenuity_. I suppose
now that I was rather lucky in my judges and that perhaps they were
not really so very good ones as I then _esteemed_ them.

Encouraged, however, by this, I wrote and conveyed in the same way to
the press several more papers which were equally approved; and I kept
my secret till my small fund of sense for such performances was pretty
well exhausted, and then I _discovered_ it, when I began to be
considered a little more by my brother's acquaintance, and in a manner
that did not quite please him, as he thought, probably with reason,
that it tended to make me too vain.

                            --_Autobiography of Benjamin Franklin._


QUESTIONS

    1. What is there in this story that suggests that Franklin was a
    modest boy?

    2. How does it seem to you, from this story, that young people in
    Franklin's day were looked upon by their elders?

    3. Was he a good writer when he began? How do you know?

    4. Can you tell the meaning of the words in italics, from their
    use in the story? Look them up in a dictionary and compare the
    meaning you find with your judgment from the way they were used.




YES OR NO?


1. I need six dozen 1-1/4" screws. They will cost me five cents a
dozen. There are twelve dozen in a box, and a box will cost thirty-two
cents. Would it pay me to get just what I need now?

2. All but three of the girls in our class are members of the United
States School Garden Army. Edith is not a member of the United States
School Garden Army. Is it possible that Edith is a member of our class?




HOW TO MAKE A SUN-DIAL


Did you ever think how hard it would be to get along without clocks?
At almost every city street corner we can look at a clock; every
railway station, every post office, every schoolhouse, has at least
one; and everybody's house contains one or more. And at that, boys and
girls are sometimes late for school.

No, we certainly couldn't manage without these useful mechanisms; and
yet, there was a time, not so many centuries ago, either, when they
were a rare possession; and a time before that when they had not yet
been invented. What did our far-off ancestors do?

Let us pretend that we are going for a walk in the beautiful garden of
a country mansion. Here in the midst of a rose bed stands a low stone
pillar, with an upright, triangular piece of metal attached to its top
near the center, and some figures marked in a circle around the edge.

[Illustration]

This is a sun-dial. The owner of the garden has it here for a pretty
ornament; but in the old times, before the days of clocks, people told
the time by means of sun-dials, judging the hour by the position of
the shadow cast by the piece of metal upon the stone. If you would
like, just for the fun of it, to have such a sun-clock in your own
little garden, there is a very easy way to make one.

Choose a spot of ground that is perfectly flat, where the sun shines
all day long. Set up, or get your father or big brother to set up for
you, a post four or five inches thick. Make it stand perfectly firm
and straight. Now find a thin, flat piece of board--a box top or a
shingle will do--and nail it like a table top on to the top of the
post. After these preparations have been made, you must wait for a
clear, starry night when you can go out and find the North Star. The
way to do this is by looking at the "Big Dipper", the group of stars
that of course you know.

The two stars marked A and B are called the "Pointers"; and, looking
in the direction of the arrow, the next star in line with them is the
North Star. Take a straight, thin stick, and fasten it to the center
of the top of the post, slanting it so that it will point directly at
the North Star. That is all you can do until the next day.

[Illustration]

At twelve o'clock, if the sun is bright, you will find your slanting
stick casting a shadow on the piece of board. Mark the line where it
falls, and put the figure 12 upon it, to show that this line belongs
to twelve o'clock. Do the same thing at one, two, and three o'clock,
and so on through the afternoon. In the same way, the next day, you
can mark the morning hours.

If you like, you can print on your sun-dial the motto that is often
used for them: "Non horas sed serenas", which means "I mark none but
sunny hours".


QUESTIONS

    1. What did our ancestors use instead of a clock?

    2. How can you find the North Star?

    3. Can you draw a diagram of the sun-clock?




PUTTING WORDS WHERE THEY BELONG


    Arrange your paper with your name on the first line and your grade
    on the second line. Divide the rest of your paper into four parts
    with lines drawn as shown below:

      TRAVELING  |  BANKING  |  GRAZING  |  SEASHORE
                 |           |           |
                 |           |           |
                 |           |           |
                 |           |           |
                 |           |           |
                 |           |           |

    Below is a list of words that is not very well arranged. Some
    words suggest a long railroad journey, some an errand to the bank,
    some the lonely occupation of a cowboy, and others a vacation at
    the shore. Write the words, TRAVELING, BANKING, GRAZING, SEASHORE
    at the top of your paper on the fourth line as shown above. Now
    rearrange the words below into four columns under these four
    heads, putting all the words that seem to suggest TRAVELING in the
    first column, and all the words that suggest BANKING in the second
    column, and every word that suggests GRAZING or SEASHORE in its
    proper column. When you finish wait quietly for the others.

      discount     station           flock          cattle
      train        interest          bridge         deposit
      sheep        check             vault          account
      cashier      salt-lick         grass          ranch
      sand         waves             life-guard     balance
      suitcase     taxi              signal         curve
      ocean        swim              fence          herd
      spring       adding machine    pass-book      tree
      beach        fish              conductor      ticket
      boardwalk    engineer          lighthouse     steamer




AN INDIAN BUFFALO HUNT


    This selection was written by a white man who ran away from home
    when a boy and lived among the Indians of the plains for twelve
    years about the middle of the last century. He married an Indian
    maiden, Washtella, and became a chief in the tribe. He gives many
    interesting descriptions of Indian life and customs, which
    probably give some idea of the way our own ancestors may have
    lived thousands of years ago.

    The Indians depended upon the buffalo for their chief supply of
    food. Millions of these animals roamed the plains in vast herds.
    The Indians cannot be blamed in the least for slaughtering these
    animals for food, but the white men who drove the Indians from the
    plains killed the buffaloes often for mere sport, and exterminated
    them except for a few small herds now in captivity.

    Read the story as rapidly as you can without skipping or losing
    the meaning, and be prepared to stand in front of the class and
    give a complete discussion of any of the topics given at the end
    of the selection.

When our camp was pitched, I walked out along the banks of the
beautiful lake, to see what I could discover. Its waters were clear as
crystal and full of fish. Not a boat, and perhaps not even a canoe,
had ever rippled its bosom, and I could not but imagine, as I gazed
across the blue expanse, that one day commerce would spring up, and
towns and cities be built upon its green shores.

Looking to the north, I was startled from my reflections by seeing a
large buffalo cow coming down to the water to drink. Hastening back to
the village, I quickly procured my Hawkins rifle and ran over the little
eminence that hid the lodges from the animal. She had approached quite
near the water, and was not more than one hundred and fifty yards
distant from me, when, hearing a noise in my rear, I looked back and
saw several Indians running toward me with their guns. The cow at the
same moment saw them, and turned to make off; but too late, for I had
drawn a bead on her heart, and at one shot dropped her dead.

All the village came running and shouting, and the squaws gathered
around the dead buffalo, jostling and elbowing each other as they tore
off the meat. It is the Indian rule that game is common property, and
my buffalo was soon reduced to a pile of bones by the knives of the
busy squaws. I could not help laughing as I watched them struggling
for the choice morsels. First, the skin was carefully removed, and
then the muscles and gristle cut away. Then, just as a squaw was about
to take the coveted part, she would be rudely thrust aside, and some
other squaw would take it. These exploits were received with loud
shouts of laughter, and no ill-temper or quarreling was observed among
the excited crowd of women who surrounded the carcass.

On returning to my lodge, I found Washtella in great glee over my good
luck, and she explained that it was no small matter to have killed the
first buffalo slain in the hunt. Presently I received a message from
the chief, and was informed by an old Indian that, having killed the
first buffalo, I would be entitled to lead the hunt on the first day.
Meat was brought me, and the skin or robe, which, according to the
Indian custom, is always given to the one who kills the animal. So
proud was Washtella that she did nothing all the evening but talk of
my good fortune, and I could not help being amused at the boasts of
the little maid. Nothing could possibly have happened that would have
given her more pleasure.

The next morning, as soon as it was daylight, I was aroused, and told
that the warriors were waiting for me to lead them in the chase.
Assembling all of them before my lodge, I addressed them, saying I was
a young man, and lacked experience, but if they would allow me, I
would name one worthy to lead them in my place. This was received with
loud shouts of approval, and as soon as quiet was restored, I pointed
to a young warrior, and said: "He is a good man, go and follow him."
The warrior I had selected was my bitter enemy. As his animosity was
well known in the tribe, the honors thus thrust upon him, by one from
whom he had expected no favors, surprised and pleased them. For a
moment the brave hung his head, and then came forward, and, amid the
shouts of the warriors, gave me his hand. Feeling unwell, I did not go
upon the hunt that day, but in the evening, when the party returned,
my old enemy came to my lodge, and as a token of his friendship,
presented me with two fine robes he had taken during the day.

On the second day I went out with the hunters, and joined in a most
exciting chase. Under the directions of a chief, we deployed at wide
distances, and then, closing in, surrounded a herd of buffaloes on
three sides; and as soon as the herd began to move, the chase began.
Our tough little ponies bore us swiftly along, and soon the herd was
hard pressed. Presently it began to scatter, and then each Indian,
selected a buffalo and followed the beast up until he had killed it.
It is astonishing how fast the great lumbering animals can run, and
although they do not seem to go over the ground very rapidly, it takes
a good horse to come up with them. Their shambling "lope" is equal in
speed to an American horse's gallop, and they can climb steep hills
and get over rough ground faster than a horse. They run with their
heads near the earth, and a hundred of them will make a mighty noise
that resembles the rumbling of distant thunder. The warriors do not
stop to touch the game after it is dead, as the skinning and packing
of the meat is the work of the squaws who follow in the wake of the
hunters. For this purpose they have pack-ponies, and two women will
skin and pack three or four buffaloes in a day.

The meat is brought to the village, is cut in narrow slices, about an
inch thick, and three or four inches long. These slices are then hung
on poles, or stretched on small willows laid across a frame-work of
poles. The meat is frequently turned, and is allowed to remain in the
sun and air for three days. It should be covered or brought in at
night, and must not be allowed to get wet by rain while it is curing.
This is called jerking buffalo, and is a simple and easy process of
curing meat. The pure crisp air of the plains soon dries it, and then
it has a sweet, pleasant taste. I have known climates on the plains
where nearly all the year carcasses could be hung up and left without
spoiling until used. Meat, when jerked, is only about half the weight
and size it is when in a raw state. If soaked in water it will swell
greatly, and then, unless used immediately, it will spoil.

When the buffalo flesh is dried sufficiently, it is put into
parfleshes, or wrappers, made of rawhide cut square, which will hold
about half a bushel. They are sewed up at the bottom and sides, the
laps at the top being left open until they are filled. The meat is
then laid in flat and packed tightly like plugs of tobacco. When two
or three layers of meat have been put in, hot buffalo fat is brought
and poured over it until all the interstices are filled up. Then more
layers of meat are put in and more fat poured on, until the parflesh
is full, when the laps are folded over each other and tightly sewed up
with sinews. The meat is now ready for winter use, and two parfleshes
are fastened together like a pair of saddle-bags, and slung across the
back of a pony when the Indians travel. To prevent these bags or
wrappers from hurting the ponies' backs, the under side is lined with
fur or bear skin.

We had hunted four days from our camp on the lake, and although we had
taken the utmost precaution not unnecessarily to alarm the buffaloes
most of them had gone a long distance from the village. A council was
called, and it was determined we should go over to the lakes that lay on
the Jim River, sixty miles distant. We immediately set out, moving
around the lake to the right of the buffaloes, so as not to disturb
them. Our route lay across a beautiful level country through which
meandered little streams eight or ten miles apart. We traveled leisurely
along, however, halting on the creeks, and making about sixteen miles
per day, for many of our ponies were already heavily laden with meat.

On the fourth day we reached the lakes, and again pitched our village.
Here we found plenty of buffaloes and a great many calves, which were
very acceptable to us, as we wanted some parfleshes of veal.

We hunted four days, and took a great deal of meat. Each family had
from three to six parfleshes, according to its size, which was as much
as it could use during the winter, and enough for the infirm besides.
So the hunt was announced at an end, and we began to prepare for our
return. I had been exceedingly fortunate, and had taken no less than
nine parfleshes of meat and had twelve robes.

There are several methods of killing buffaloes besides the regular
chase. One of these, as practiced by the Indians, is as follows:

The buffaloes are watched until they graze near a precipice, when two
or three Indians put a buffalo skin on sticks, and concealing themselves
under it, approach near the herd slowly, as if grazing. This must be
done when the wind is favorable, and blowing from the buffaloes. If the
decoy is successful, other Indians make a wide circuit, surrounding the
herd on all sides, except that toward the bluff. Then they steal up as
close as possible, and when the buffaloes, discover them, they shout,
shake their blankets and poles, and close in upon the herd. The animals
are greatly alarmed, but seeing the mock buffalo (which has managed to
attract attention) set off for the bluffs, they rush madly after it.
When the baiters reach the bluff, they fling the mock buffalo over the
precipice, and betake themselves to holes in the bank or crevices among
the rocks. It is in vain the leaders of the herd halt when they see the
chasm; the mass from behind, crazed by the poles and blankets of the
Indians, who are now close upon them, rush madly on, and press those in
front over the cliff.

It is exceedingly dangerous to bait buffalo, as the herd frequently
overtake the false buffalo and trample it beneath their feet, or the
great beasts, falling among the rock, crush the Indian baiters to
death. Many reckless young Indians, who as baiters have gone too far
inland, have, after the chase, been found dead on the plain, or their
mangled bodies lay at the foot of the precipice with the carcasses of
the animals they had so cruelly deceived. It takes a brave Indian to
be a baiter, but there are always plenty of young and foolish boys who
are anxious to engage in the dangerous sport.

After the buffaloes have fallen and killed or maimed themselves, a
party of Indians who have been concealed near the foot of the
precipice suddenly advance and finish them with axes and rifles.

Our hunt having ended, the chief ordered that the usual feast and
rejoicing should take place. A long pole was provided, a buffalo head
put on the top of it, and a number of tails nailed, at right angles,
to the sides. The pole was then set firmly in the ground, in the
center of an open space before the village, and buffalo heads were
piled up around it. The heads were set in a circle, and arranged to
look as hideous as possible.

Immense quantities of buffalo meat were now brought, and the feast was
made ready. At these feasts nothing but buffalo meat is eaten, and every
one makes it a point to gorge himself to the fullest extent. Even the
dogs are stuffed, and the women and children are persuaded to eat while
they can force down a bite. The greater the quantity of meat eaten, the
greater the honor; and some starve themselves for two or three days in
advance, in order to do justice to the occasion. The meat is prepared in
every form--boiled, fried, broiled, roasted, and raw.

When one can eat no more, he goes to the pole, and as soon as a
sufficient number have collected, the dance begins. The warriors sit
in a circle around the pole, and the squaws, gaudily dressed and
painted, form a circle around the warriors. At a signal the drums
beat, and all stand up. Then the squaws sing, and the warriors move
around to the right and the squaws to the left, each keeping time to
the drums. The dance is a slow, shuffling motion that soon makes one
very tired. When one of the Indians gets tired, he steps out of the
circle and another takes his place. As soon as it is dark, wood is
brought, fires are made around the pole, and the dancing is kept up
all night. The feasting frequently continues for three days, and at no
time is the pole without its set of dancers. The amount of buffalo
consumed is prodigious, when we consider that, besides the vast
quantities eaten by the Indians, each family has from six to ten days.

When the feast was over, we began to prepare in earnest for our
return. The meat was carefully distributed, so that no pony would be
overloaded, and everything was neatly packed. It took both my ponies
and all my dogs to carry my meat and lodge, so Washtella and I had to
walk. We considered this no great hardship, however, as nearly the
whole village was on foot. We made only eight or ten miles a day; but
at last, after a most fatiguing march, reached the Missouri, and
entered our old camp near Fort Randall.

                              --_From "Belden the White Chief"._


OUTLINE FOR TOPICAL RECITATIONS

Introduction--The Scene of the Camp.

  1. My good luck.

      (_a_) Killing the first buffalo of the hunt.
      (_b_) Cutting up the meat.
      (_c_) Receiving appointment as leader.

  2. Chasing the buffalo.

  3. The winter's food supply.

      (_a_) Drying the meat.
      (_b_) Packing.
      (_c_) Transporting.
      (_d_) Ending the hunt.

  4. Killing buffaloes by a decoy.

  5. Celebrating a successful hunt.

      (_a_) The place for the ceremony.
      (_b_) The hearty meal.
      (_c_) The dance.

  6. The return to the winter camp.




INDIAN LIFE AND CUSTOMS


This selection tells of life among the Indians of our western plains
before the buffalo became almost extinct.

As you read, write topics that will enable you to recall the various
things the author tells about. Your teacher will have two or three of
you put your list of topics on the blackboard and will ask various
members of the class to come to the front of the room and tell the
class about one topic each. While a pupil is reciting no one should
raise his hand nor interrupt. Be a good sport and give the one who is
reciting a chance to make his topic as interesting as he can.

This selection can be divided into several large topics with details
under each. These details may be stated as sub-topics under the large
ones. Your teacher may wish you to look it over again to see if you
can find the four main topics.

Nothing is more important in learning to remember what you read than
the habit of organizing your material in the form of an outline. A
good outline generally takes some such form as this:

  Introduction

  1. First main topic

      (_a_)
      (_b_)
      (_c_)

Sometimes there may be two, and sometimes several sub-topics. Never
use any letter if there is only one topic. When there is only one
topic under any heading, you should simply write the topic out.

  2. Second main topic

      (_a_)
      (_b_)
      (_c_), etc.

Use as many main topics as you need to tell the story or to include
the substance of what you are outlining.

One can have no appreciative idea of an Indian village, unless he has
been permitted to come across the prairie through a hot summer's sun,
and suddenly discovers one nestled under the broad shade trees, beside
a clear running stream, in a green valley. How pleasant the grass then
looks; how refreshing the bright waters, and how cozy the tall lodges,
with their shaded verandas of thickly interwoven boughs!

All day long we had toiled over the scorching plain, through clouds of
grasshoppers that often struck us in the face with sufficient force to
make the skin smart for several minutes. Once we had seen a mirage of
a beautiful lake, fringed with trees and surrounded by green pastures
which invited us to pursue its fleeting shadows, but we knew all about
these deceptions by sad experience, and pushed steadily on over the
burning sands.

These mirages often deceive the weary traveler of the desert. Suddenly
the horseman sees a river or lake, apparently just ahead of him, and
he rides on and on, hoping to come up to it. For hours it lies before
his eyes, and then in a moment disappears, leaving him miles and miles
out of his way in the midst of desert sands. Men have ridden all day
striving to reach the beautiful river just before them, and then at
night have turned back to plod their weary way to where they had
started from in the morning.

The mirage we had seen was most delightful, representing a clear lake,
with trees, meadows, and villages nestling on its shores, but it
scarcely equalled the reality of the scene when, late in the afternoon,
we ascended a rise in the prairie, and saw below us a wide stream lined
with green trees, and on its banks a large Indian encampment.

The ponies pricked up their ears and neighed with pleasure as they
smelt the water, and our own delight was unbounded. We halted for a
moment to admire the beautiful prospect. Through the majestic trees
slanting rays of the sun shivered on the grass! Far away, winding like
a huge silver-serpent, ran the river, while near by in a shady grove
stood the village with the children at play on the green lawns not
made by hands. The white sides of the teepees shone in the setting
sunlight, and the smoke curled lazily upward from their dingy tops.
Bright ribbons and red grass, looking like streamers on a ship,
fluttered from the lodge-poles, and gaudily dressed squaws and
warriors walked about, or sat on the green sod under the trees.

Near the village were hundreds of horses and ponies, with bright
feathers flaunting in their manes and tails as they cropped the rich
grass of the valley.

A group of noisy children were playing at a game much resembling
ten-pins; some boys were shooting at a mark with arrows, and up the
stream several youths were returning home with rod and line, and fine
strings of speckled trout.

Scores of men and women were swimming about in the river, now diving,
and then dousing each other amid screams of laughter from the
bystanders on the shore. Here and there a young girl darted about like
a fish, her black hair streaming behind her in the water.

While we looked, the little children suddenly ceased from play and ran
into the lodges; mounted men surrounded the herd of horses, and the
swimmers and promenaders hastened toward the village. We had been
perceived by the villagers, and the unexpected arrival of strange
horsemen at an Indian encampment always creates great excitement. They
may be friends, but they are more often enemies, so the villagers are
always prepared for a surprise.

Soon men were seen running to and fro with guns and bows, and in a
few minutes, some mounted warriors left the encampment and rode toward
us, going first to the top of the highest mounds to see if they could
discover other horsemen in the rear or to the right or left of us.

No sooner did they ascertain there were but three in the party, than
they rode boldly up and asked us our business. I told them who we
were, and where we were from, upon which they cordially invited us to
the village.

As we approached, men, women, and children poured out of the
encampment to look at the strangers, and having satisfied their
curiosity, the sports and amusements of the evening were renewed.

I asked permission to camp of no one, for I needed none. So I marched
right down to the center of the village, and finding a vacant space,
pitched my lodge.

A few Santee women gathered about my squaws and chatted with them,
anxious to learn the news from down the river. Seeing they were
interfering with the unpacking of the ponies and the erecting of the
lodge, I unceremoniously ordered them to be gone, and they went
quietly away. The lodge was soon up and the ponies unpacked and put
out to graze. Having seen things put in order for the night, I
sauntered out through the village to learn the news.

I was agreeably surprised when I learned there was a white man in the
village, who had been sent out to the Indians as a missionary. All the
savages spoke of him as a kind-hearted, good man, who was a great
friend of the Great Spirit, and of the Big Father at Washington.

I made haste to pay my respects to my white brother and found him
indeed a good Christian gentleman. He had a white wife and child, and
he and they were living comfortably and pleasantly with these wild
children of the desert. I talked more than an hour with the good man;
it was so delightful to see and speak with one of my own blood and
color. When I left him, I promised I would return the next day and
dine with him. It may sound strange to hear one talk of "dining out"
in an Indian camp, but the meal was none the less wholesome or
abundant on account of the place in which it was served.

I found the Santees a most excellent people. The warriors were men of
great pride and bravery. The chiefs of the Santees were men of few
words, but they were dignified, courteous, and truthful in all they
said and did. After all my experiences and disappointments among the
Indians of the plains, I could not help admiring and respecting these
people, for here at last I had found a tribe such as Cooper had
represented, and Longfellow had characterized in "Hiawatha".

The Santee lodges were tall conical-shaped tents, made of buffalo hide
tanned with the hair off, and stretched around twelve poles. These
poles are tied together at the top, and set around a circle of one
hundred and eight feet. The lodge, when finished, is thirty-six feet
in diameter at the ground. The skin or covering is cut bias, the small
end being fastened to the top of the poles and the long end wrapped
round and round the poles, and finally fastened to the ground with a
wooden pin or stone. The poles are not set in the ground, but the edge
of the lodge-cover is pinned down with short pegs made of hard wood.
An aperture is left at the top of the lodge for the smoke to escape,
and the fire is built in the center. When the door is open it draws
well, and all the smoke goes up and out at the aperture.

These lodges, although standing on the surface of the ground and
apparently very fragile, will withstand the most violent wind and rain
storms. I have seen them outlive the strongest modern tents, and
stand up even when great trees were blown down.

During my residence in the Santee village I saw many curious things,
and learned much of the mode of life and ceremonies of the Indians.

Most people have seen the bows and arrows used by boys in the eastern
States, and those who have observed them know how feeble they are, not
even being capable of killing the smallest animal. Do not be surprised,
then, when I tell you that an Indian with his bow, will send an arrow
entirely through a horse, a man, or a buffalo. The shaggy-coated bear or
Rocky Mountain lion will fall beneath a few shots from the savage's
strong bow, while the fleet wild deer is not swift enough to escape the
flight of his arrow. With unerring aim the hunter sends his deadly
shaft, at eighty yards, into the heart or eye of his game, and with ease
tips birds from the tops of the highest trees. Of course, it requires
long practice to acquire such skill in the use of the bow, but the
Indian will tell you that more depends upon the manufacture of the
weapon than the skill of the marksman. With a good Indian bow and arrow
a white man can, in a few hours, learn to shoot fairly well, while with
a bow and arrow of his own manufacture he can hardly hit a tree the size
of a man's body a rod off.

Let me teach you how to make a good bow and arrow. And first we will
begin with the arrow. The shoots, or rods, must be cut in the arrow
season; that is, when the summer's growth is ended. They must not have
any branches or limbs on them, but must be straight and smooth. The
Indians cut their arrows late in the fall, when the timber is
hardening to withstand the blasts of winter. The sticks are not quite
as thick as one's little finger, and they are sorted and tied in
bundles of twenty and twenty-five. These bundles are two and two and
one-half feet in length, and are wrapped tightly from end to end with
strips of rawhide or elk skin. The sticks are then hung up over fire
in the teepee to be smoked and dried, and the wrapping keeps them from
warping or bending. When they are seasoned, which takes several weeks,
the bundles are taken down, the covering removed, and the bark scraped
off. The wood is very tough then, and of a yellowish color. The next
process is to cut the arrow shafts exactly one length, and in this
great care must be used; for arrows of different lengths fly
differently, and, unless they are alike, the hunter's aim is
destroyed. Another reason for measuring the length of arrows is to
identify them; for no two warriors shoot arrows of precisely the same
length. Each warrior carries a measuring, or pattern stick, and it is
necessary only to compare an arrow with the stick to find out to whom
it belongs. But should the arrows by chance be of one length, there
are other means of identifying them; for every hunter has his own
private mark in the shaft, the head, or the feather. Of many thousands
I have examined, I have never found two arrows exactly alike when they
were made by different warriors.

When the shafts have been made even, the next work is to form the
notch for the bow-string. This is done with a sharp knife, and, when
made properly, the bottom of the notch will be precisely in the center
of the shaft. The arrow is then scraped and tapered toward the notch,
leaving a round head an inch long near the notch to prevent the string
from splitting the shaft, and to make a firm hold for the thumb and
forefinger in drawing the bow.

All the arrows are peeled, scraped, and notched, and then the warrior
creases them. To do this, he takes an arrow-head and scores the shaft
in zigzag lines from end to end. These creases, or fluted gutters, in
the shaft are to let the blood run out when an animal is struck. The
blood flows along the little gutters in the wood and runs off the end
of the arrow. The arrow-head is made of steel or stone. It is shaped
like a heart or dart and has a stem about an inch long. The sides of
the stem are nicked or filed out like saw-teeth. Nearly all the wild
Indians now use steel arrow-heads, which are a great article of trade
among the savages. Certain firms in the East manufacture many hundreds
of thousands every year and send them to the traders who sell them to
the Indians for furs.

When the shaft is ready for the head, the warrior saws a slit with a
nicked knife in the end opposite the notch, and inserts the stem of
the arrow-head. The slit must be exactly in the center of the shaft,
and as deep as the stem is long. When properly adjusted, the teeth of
the stem show themselves on each side of the slit. Buffalo, deer, or
elk sinew is then softened in water, and the wood is wrapped firmly to
the arrowhead, taking care to fit the sinew in the teeth of the stem
to prevent the head from pulling out.

The next process is to put on the feathers. To do this properly great
care must be taken. Turkey or eagle quills are soaked in warm water to
make them split easily and uniformly. The feather is then stripped from
the quill and put on the shaft of the arrow. Three feathers are placed
on each shaft, and they are laid equi-distant along the stem. The big
end of the feather is fastened near the notch of the shaft and laid six
or eight inches straight along the wood. The feathers are glued to the
shaft and wrapped at each end with fine sinew. The arrow is next
painted, marked, dried, and is ready for use. It takes a warrior a whole
day to make an arrow, for which the trader allows him ten cents.

Arrow-heads are put up in packages of a dozen each. They cost the
trader half a cent, or six cents per package, and are sold to the
Indians at enormous profits. Thus, twelve arrow-heads will be
exchanged for a buffalo robe, worth $8 or $9, and three, for a beaver
skin, worth $4. Indians often buy arrow-heads at these enormous
prices, and then sell the arrow back to the trader at ten cents, in
exchange for goods, beads, or knives.

Travelers on the prairie have often seen the Indians throwing up
signal lights at night, and have wondered how it was done. I will tell
you all about it. They take off the head of the arrow and dip the
shaft in gunpowder, mixed with glue. This they call making
fire-arrows. The gunpowder adheres to the wood, and coats it three or
four inches from its end, to the depth of one-fourth of an inch.
Chewed bark mixed with dry gunpowder is then fastened to the stick,
and the arrow is ready for use. When it is to be fired, a warrior
places it on his bow-string and draws his bow ready to let it fly; the
point of the arrow is then lowered; another warrior lights the dry
bark, and it is shot high in the air. When it has gone up a little
distance, it bursts out into flame, and burns brightly until it falls
to the ground. Various meanings are attached to these fire-arrow
signals. Thus, one arrow meant, among the Santees, "The enemy are
about"; two arrows from the same point, "Danger"; three, "Great
danger"; many, "They are too strong, or we are falling back"; two
arrows sent up at the same moment, "We will attack"; three, "Soon";
four, "Now"; if shot diagonally, "In that direction." These signals
are constantly changed, and are always agreed upon when the party goes
out or before it separates. The Indians send their signals very
intelligently, and seldom make mistakes in telegraphing each other by
these silent monitors. The amount of information they can
communicate, by fires and burning arrows, is perfectly wonderful.
Every war party carries with it bundles of signal arrows.

The bow--the weapon so long in use among the different Indian tribes
of this continent and so typical of Indian life--is made of various
kinds of wood, and its manufacture is a work of no little labor. Even
at this day the bow is much used, and although an Indian may have a
gun, he is seldom seen without his long bow, and his quiver well
filled with arrows. The gun may get out of order, and he can not mend
it; the ammunition may become wet, and there is an end of hunting; but
the faithful bow is always in order, and its swift arrows ready to fly
in wet as well as dry weather. Thus reasons the savage, and so he
keeps his bow to fall back upon in case of accident.

Until the invention of breech-loaders, the bow was a far more deadly
weapon at close range than the best rifle. A warrior could discharge
his arrows with much greater rapidity and precision than the most
expert woodsman could charge and fire a muzzle-loading rifle.

The Indian boy's first lesson in life is to shoot with a bow. He is
furnished with a small bow and "beewaks", or blunt arrows, so that he
will hurt nobody, and with these he shoots at marks. By and by, when
he has acquired some skill in handling his weapon, he is given small
arrow-points, and with these he shoots birds, squirrels, and small
beasts. As he grows older he receives the long-bow, and at last the
strong-bow.

These strong-bows are powerful weapons, and I have seen them so stiff
that a white man could not bend them more than four inches, while an
Indian would, with apparent ease, draw them to the arrow's head. A
shaft fired from one of these bows will go through the body of a
buffalo, and arrow-heads have been found so firmly imbedded in the
thigh bones of a man that no force could extract them.

The parents take great pride in teaching young Indians to shoot, and
the development of the muscles and strength of their arms is watched
with much interest. A stout arm, ornamented with knots of muscles is a
great honor to an Indian, and no one but those who can handle the
strong-bow are deemed fit for war.

Of all the Indians of the West, the Sioux and Crows make the best bows.
The Sioux bow is generally four feet long, one and a half inches wide,
and an inch thick at the middle. It tapers from the center, or "grasp",
toward the ends, and is but half an inch wide and half an inch thick at
the extremities. At one end the bow-string is notched into the wood and
made permanently fast, while at the other end two notches are cut in the
wood, and the string at that end of the bow is made like a slip-knot or
loop. When the bow is to be used, the warrior sets the end to which the
string is made fast firmly on the ground, and then bends down the other
end until the loop slips into the notch. This is called "stringing" the
bow. The bow is never kept strung except when in actual use, as it would
lose its strength and elasticity by being constantly bent. When
unstrung, a good bow is perfectly straight, and, if properly made and
seasoned, will always retain its elasticity.

The wood generally used in manufacturing bows is ash, hickory,
iron-wood, elm, and cedar. No hickory grows west of the Missouri, and
it is very difficult to get; and an Indian will always pay a high
price for a piece of this wood.

When the bow is made of cedar, it need not be seasoned; but all other
woods require seasoning, and are not worked until perfectly dry. Every
teepee has its bow-wood hung up with the arrows in the smoke of the
fire well out of reach of the flames. A warrior with a sharp knife and
a sandstone, or file, can make a bow in three days if he works hard,
but it generally takes a week, and sometimes a month, to finish a
fancy bow. When done, it is worth three dollars in trade.

All the bows differ in length and strength, being gauged for the arms
of those who are to use them; but a white man would, until he learned
the trick of it, find himself unable to bend even the weakest war-bow.
This has given rise to the impression that the Indians are stronger
than white men, which is an error; for, although only a slight man
myself, I learned, after some practice, to bend the strongest bow, and
could send a shaft as far or as deep as any savage. On one occasion I
shot an arrow, while running, into a buffalo so that the point came
out on the opposite side; another arrow disappeared in the buffalo,
not even the notch being visible. I have seen a bow throw an arrow
five hundred yards, and have myself often discharged one entirely
through a board one inch thick. Once I found a man's skull transfixed
to a tree by an arrow which had gone completely through the bones, and
imbedded itself so deep in the wood as to sustain the weight of the
head. He had probably been tied up to the tree and shot.

The surface of the bow is made perfectly flat, then roughened with a
file or stone, the sinew being dipped in hot glue and laid on the
wood. The sinew is then lapped at the ends and on the middle or grasp
of the bow. The string is attached while green, twisted, and left to
dry on the bow. The whole outside of the wood and sinew is now covered
with a thick solution of glue, and the bow is done. Rough bows look
like hickory limbs with the bark on, but some of them are beautifully
painted and ornamented. I once knew a trader to glue some red velvet
on a bow, and the Indians paid him an immense price for it, thinking
it very wonderful.

In traveling, the bow is carried in a sheath attached to the arrow
quiver, and the whole is slung to the back by a belt of elk or
buckskin, which passes diagonally across the breast, and is fastened
to the ends of the quiver. The quiver and bow-sheath is generally made
of the skin of an ox or some wild animal, and is tanned with the hair
on. The quiver is ornamented with tassels or fringe of buckskin, and
the belt across the breast is painted or worked with beads. Each
Indian has his sign or name on his belt, bow, sheath, or arrow quiver.
The celebrated Sioux chief, Spotted Tail, or "Sin-ta Gallessca", had
his bow-sheath made from the skin of a spotted ox he had killed in a
train his warriors captured, and as the tail was left dangling at the
end of the sheath, the Indians ever afterward called him Spotted Tail,
or "The man with the Spotted Tail". You may be curious to know what
this Indian's name was before he was called Spotted Tail, and I must
tell you many Indians never have a name, while others have half a
dozen. Some act of bravery, or an article of clothing, generally fixes
an Indian's name, but a new deed, or a new head-dress, may change it.

To shoot with the bow properly, it must be held firmly in three
fingers of the right hand; the arrow is fixed on the bow-string with
the thumb and forefinger of the left hand, and the other three fingers
are used to pull the string. The shaft of the arrow lays between the
thumb and forefinger of the right hand, which rest over the grasp of
the bow. To shoot, the bow is turned slightly, so that one end is
higher than the other, and the arrow is then launched.

                              --_From "Belden the White Chief"._




CAN YOU UNDERSTAND RELATIONSHIP?


This drill will test your ability to recognize easily relationships
between words. Beginning on the first line, write the figures 1 to 10.

In each group of words below, the first two words have a certain
connection in meaning. When you discover this relationship between the
first two words, you can find among the five words that follow, two
other words that bear the same relationship. For example, in group
one, the TIRE is made of RUBBER. Now if you look among the words that
follow, you will easily see that the words HOUSE and BRICKS are
related in the same way. (The HOUSE is made of BRICKS.) Write these
four words after figure 1 on your paper:

1. TIRE RUBBER house bricks

Look at group two. We can easily see that just as the TAILOR makes
CLOTHES so the BAKER makes BREAD. So you will write these four words
after figure 2 on your paper:

2. TAILOR CLOTHES baker bread

Complete the exercise by selecting the two words in each remaining group
that are related in meaning in the same way that the given words are
related in meaning. When you have finished, wait quietly for the others.

1. TIRE, RUBBER (wagon, circle, house, brush, bricks).

2. TAILOR, CLOTHES (baker, store, city, ship, bread).

3. FIRE, HEAT (knife, candle, burn, light, wood).

4. SAILOR, SEA (book, sing, soldier, fight, land).

5. GUN, BULLET (bow, horse, shoot, arrow, fly).

6. YOUNG, QUICK (old, fast, grow, father, slow).

7. APPLE, TREE (oranges, south, grape, vine, sweet).

8. CEILING, FLOOR (sky, attic, stair, earth, high).

9. WINDOW, GLASS (silk, knife, book, steel, pencil).

10. SQUIRREL, CHATTERS (bird, tree, sings, fly, nuts).




OPENING THE GREAT WEST


    Here is a picture of the work of the army of the United States in
    opening the great prairie country of the West. Today we get
    immense quantities of our food from the states between the
    Mississippi River and the Rocky Mountains. Seventy years ago the
    most of this territory, now the richest farming country in the
    United States, was inhabited chiefly by roving tribes of Indians
    who lived mainly by hunting the buffalo.

    You will notice many details that show that the story was written
    many years ago. For instance, the soldiers are spoken of as "blue
    jackets". Make a list of these points as you read.

    Read the selection as rapidly as you can without overlooking
    important details. When the majority of the class has finished,
    your teacher will ask you in turn to stand before the class and
    recite on the topics given at the end. You should try to make your
    recitation interesting by giving details that will help your
    hearers to see what the author has described.

As soon as the traveler crosses the Missouri, and enters the
territories, he begins to find the blue jackets, and the farther west
he goes the more numerous they become. It is only just to the army to
say that it has ever been the pioneer of civilization in America. Ever
since Washington crossed the Alleghanies, and, with his brave
Virginians, pushed to the Ohio, the work has been steadily going on.
From Pittsburgh, the army led far down the Ohio to the Mississippi,
and thence along the Father of Waters to New Orleans; next west to the
Miami, and far up the lakes; then to the Missouri, and so on for
thousands of miles until the other ocean was reached through Oregon
and California. A line of forts is pushed out into the new and
uninhabited country, and presently people come in and settle near the
posts. A few years elapse, and there are hundreds of citizens in all
directions. Then the forts are sold or pulled down, and the troops
march farther west to new posts.

The knapsacks are packed, the cavalry are mounted, and we are ready to
occupy a new line of country. "Head of column west, forward, march!"
and away we go. What an outfit! The long lines of cavalry wind over
the hills, and then follows the compact column of infantry. Then come
a few pieces of artillery and the train. What a sight! Hundreds of
wagons, filled with every conceivable article of food and implement of
labor: steam-engines, saw-mills, picks, shovels, hoes, masses of iron,
piles of lumber, tons of pork, hard bread, flour, rice, sugar, coffee,
tea, and potatoes, all drawn in huge wagons. Six mules or ten oxen are
seen tugging the monster wheeled machines along. The train is
generally preceded by a score or two of carriages, ambulances, and
light wagons, containing the families of officers, women, children,
and laundresses. Behind the wagon train are driven the herds of cattle
and sheep, and, last of all, comes a company of infantry, and,
perhaps, one of cavalry.

Day after day the living, moving mass toils on toward the setting sun.
Bridges are built, gulleys filled, hill-sides dug down, and roads cut
along precipices. We wonder how the pioneer corps can keep out of our
way; but each day we go steadily forward, seeing only their work,
never overtaking them. A ride to the front will show us how this is
done. It is mid-day, and a company is going out to relieve the
pioneers. The knapsacks are lightened, and off we go at a quick pace.
At sundown we come upon the pioneers, and find some building a bridge,
while others cut down the hill so the wagons can pass. We relieve them
of their shovels, picks, and axes, and one-half of the company goes
into camp, and the other half goes to work. At midnight we are aroused
by the beating of the drum, and the half of the company that is in
camp goes out to relieve the working party. At daylight we are
relieved in turn; the work goes on day and night, and that is the way
the pioneers keep ahead of the train.

Let us return to the column. It is near sunset, the bugles sound the
halt, and the columns file off into camp. The cavalry horses are sent
out to graze, the tents put up, fires lighted and the suppers put on to
cook. The white canvas gleams in the setting sun, and the camp resounds
with mirth and laughter. Water is brought from the brook, and soap and
towels are in great demand to remove the dust and stains of travel.
Folding chairs, tables, beds, mattresses, are opened out, and carpets
spread on the ground. The butchers have slaughtered a beef or two, and
the fresh meat is brought in for distribution. The commissary wagons are
opened, and sugar, coffee, rice, hominy, and canned fruits dealt out. In
an hour we sit down to a smoking hot dinner and supper of roast beef,
hot coffee, fried potatoes, fresh biscuit, and canned peaches. If the
air is cool the little peaked Sibley stoves are put up, and the evening
is spent in telling stories, playing cards, and singing songs. Here is
heard the thrumming of a guitar; there are a lot of officers playing
euchre, and yonder a group of soldiers gathered about their camp-fire
telling tales of how they campaigned in Oregon, or fought the Comanches
and Apaches in Texas and New Mexico twenty years ago.

The bugles sound tattoo, the rolls are called, taps blow, the lights
are put out, and the busy camp sinks into stillness. Only here and
there a light is left burning, where the quartermaster in his tent is
busy over his papers, the adjutant making the orders for the morrow's
march, or a noisy trio of officers continuing to a late hour their
jests and songs. No soldier is allowed to have his light burning after
taps, but the officers can do as they please.

Every one sleeps soundly, for each knows he is well guarded. It is
near midnight, and, if you like, we will walk about the camp a little.
Here is the officer of the day, and we will accompany him. We go out
to the edge of the camp, where a large group of men are gathered about
a blazing fire. "Who comes there?" rings out upon the still night air.
"Friends," is answered back. "Advance one and be recognized." This is
done, and then comes the cry of "Officer of day, turn out the guard".
There is a rattling of muskets, a hurrying and bustling to and fro,
and the guard falls into line and is inspected--so far as to ascertain
that all are present and every thing right. Frequently an officer, but
most generally a sergeant of experience, commands the guard, and all
the sentinels are posted according to the directions of the officer of
the day, who receives his instructions from the commanding officer.

The wagons are drawn up in long lines or semicircles, with the tongues
inward, to which are tied the mules and oxen. Sentinels pace up and down
to see that all goes right, and rouse the teamsters to tie up the mules
that are constantly getting loose. The cry of "loose mules" will bring a
dozen teamsters out of their wagons, and at least a hundred oaths before
the animal is caught and secured. The cavalry wagons are placed twenty
to thirty feet apart, and long ropes drawn through the hind wheels, to
which are picketed the horses. Guards are everywhere, and the sentinels
are keenly on the alert. Each hill-top has its silent watcher. The herds
are kept where there is as much grass as possible, and mounted herders
constantly watch them, ready for an Indian alarm or a stampede. A cry of
"Indians, Indians," produces great life and commotion among the herders,
guards, and sentinels, but the body of the camp does not deign to move
unless the firing is very heavy, and the order given to "turn out".
This is the Regular Army on the march.

When the troops enter the Indian country, and the attacks become
frequent, the column marches more compactly; the herds and wagons are
kept well up; the women and children are put among the infantry;
flankers thrown out, and a howitzer sent to the front to throw shells
and frighten off the savages. The boom of a cannon seems to be the
voice of advancing civilization, and greatly terrifies the Indians.

At last the line of country that is to be occupied has been reached,
and a fort is built. This consists of a stockade, log-houses, and
shelters for the stores. Then the troops are divided, and another fort
is built fifty or a hundred miles from the first, and so on until the
whole line is "occupied". If there is danger, earthworks are thrown
up, and one or two pieces mounted. Now begins the work in earnest;
keeping open the communication between the forts; getting up supplies
from the rear, and securing the way for immigration. The country is
mapped, the land surveyed, the streams looked up and named, and
saw-mills built. Settlers come in and open farms near the forts, and
they creep up and down the valleys, and over the hills, until they
stretch away for hundreds of miles. Meanwhile, there are Indian
battles, surprises, and massacres by scores. Hundreds lose their
lives, but the settlements go on. There is a little grocery, a rum
shop, a town, and by and by a city.

Every spring, as soon as the grass grows, the cavalry takes the field
and scours over the country for hundreds of miles. The infantry remains
in the posts, or guards trains to and fro. From April until December,
the cavalry is on the go constantly, and the officers are separated from
their families. When the snows fall they come into the forts to winter,
but are often routed out by the approach of their savage foes, and made
to march hundreds of miles when the thermometer is far below zero. It is
this that makes the troops so savage, and often causes them to slaughter
the Indians without mercy. After a long and hard summer's campaign, the
officers and men come in tired, weary, and only too glad to rejoin their
families and rest, when scarcely have they removed the saddles from
their horses' backs, when murders, robberies, and burnings announce the
approach of the fierce foe, and they are ordered out for a winter
campaign. Full of rage and chagrin, they go forth breathing vengeance on
all Indians, and after toiling a month or more, through ice and snow,
with freezing hands, feet, and ears, they overtake the savages and
punish them with terrible severity.

In this way our great western plains are opened to civilization. Every
year millions of acres are added to our national domain. The wild
prairie with its countless buffaloes and its skulking, murderous
war-parties of red men becomes the frontier; the frontier becomes the
settled farms and villages; the iron horse and the telegraph connect
it with the great East; and still the pioneer and the army push ahead
to open up still more of the richest land in the world to the
conquering axe and plow of the Anglo-Saxon.

                               --_From "Belden the White Chief"._

    Pupils should be prepared to recite on the following topics:

    1. Moving west, then moving west again.
    2. What an army train carried.
    3. The work of the pioneer corps.
    4. An army camp at night
        (_a_) Supper.
        (_b_) Changing the guard.
        (_c_) How the camp was protected.
    5. Development of a fort into a settlement.
    6. Summary.

    Write answers to the following questions:

    1. Who of your relations might have been one of these soldiers;
    your older brother, your father, your grandfather, or your great
    grandfather?

    2. Name three kinds of food that we eat every day that come from
    the part of the country opened as described in this selection.

    3. Tell some of the sounds you might have heard if you had been
    sleeping in one of the wagons when camped for the night.




TURNING OUT THE INTRUDER


    Here is another exercise that will help you see how well you can
    arrange words in groups. What kind of list is the first group of
    words below? Do all the words under figure 1 belong in that list?
    Would it be a better list without the word VELVET? Write VELVET on
    the first line of your paper.

    In each group of words, there is one that does not belong there.
    Find the misplaced word in each group, writing one under the
    other. You have now made a new list of words of one class by
    taking one word out of each group. Pick out a good heading for
    this new list and write it as the top.

        1.         2.       3.         4.          5.
      corn       copper   satin      teaching    horse
      velvet     tin      coasting   surveying   sheep
      potatoes   muslin   swimming   building    oxen
      wheat      lead     tennis     linen       dog
      barley     brass    skating    mining      silk
      beets      gold     football   printing    cattle




THE TRAINING OF A BOY KING


    We think little of kings and princes nowadays. They appear chiefly
    in our fairy stories when we know they are pure creations of
    somebody's imagination. Possibly some of you have wished you had
    been born a prince or princess. This story will give you a glimpse
    of the real life of a prince who was the son of one of the most
    powerful kings of England.

    Almost everybody knows something about Queen Elizabeth, the famous
    queen who made England such a powerful country long ago in the
    sixteenth century. And almost everybody knows something about her
    older sister, Queen Mary, who caused so much sorrow to England
    because of religious persecution. But not nearly so many people know
    about their younger brother, King Edward the Sixth, who came to the
    throne before either of his sisters, and whose short life was full
    of burdens and anxieties. This story tells something about the way
    in which a boy had to be educated if he was going to be a king. You
    will see that he had very little chance for freedom or happiness.

    Read the story through quickly, and then glance back and make an
    outline of it. Your teacher will let two or three of you tell the
    story from the outline you have made.

Almost four hundred years ago all London was rejoicing because of the
birth of a prince, the son of the wicked Henry the Eighth. To be sure,
Henry had two other children, Mary and Elizabeth; but there were
reasons, it was thought, why neither of them could inherit the throne.
So the people were glad when little Edward was born; anthems of joy
were sung in all the churches; bonfires were lit, and bells rang.

Three days later, when the baby prince was baptized, the way from the
palace to the chapel was hung with silk and velvet and cloth of gold,
and lined with torch-bearers. Noble lords held a shining canopy over
his head, and others carried the towels and basins needed in the
ceremony. His sister Mary, a gracious lady of twenty-one, was his
godmother, the archbishop was his godfather, and little red-haired
Elizabeth, only four years old, also had a share in the ceremony.

Ten days later joy was turned to mourning, for the Queen died, and
little Prince Edward was left motherless. The baby, however, had a
kind nurse and many servants, four of whom were called "rockers", as
it was then thought right to rock a baby in his cradle or in the arms.
All these servants were charged to watch and guard the Prince night
and day lest any harm should befall him, for, as King Henry said, he
was "the whole realm's most precious jewel".

While Edward was a little child he lived chiefly in the country, and
was brought up till he was six years old by the women of the
household. After that he had learned men for his schoolmasters, and
they taught him languages, philosophy, and such art and science as
were known at the time. Such studies sound like very grown-up lessons
for a little boy, do they not? A large part of education in those days
consisted of Greek and Latin. Both Edward and his sister Elizabeth
were very fond of books, and many were the happy mornings that the two
children spent together over their lessons.

Besides his sister, Edward had other school companions. In order that
he might not be alone, several boys, the sons of noblemen, were
brought up in the palace along with the Prince. One of them, it is
said, was known as Edward's "whipping boy"; that is, if the Prince
misbehaved, as he seldom did, this boy was punished for it, as it was
not thought proper to punish the Prince himself.

By the time he was eight, the boy could both read and write Latin. He
wrote his letters in Latin, and several of them, along with three of
his exercise books, have been handed down to the present time. The
books are filled with Greek and Latin exercises. He must have been a
clever boy, and must also have studied hard and long.

One winter morning when Edward was nine years old, gentlemen came
riding out from London with the news that his father, King Henry, was
dead, and that Edward was the new King. He wept bitterly, for to him
his father had always been loving and gentle, however cruel he was to
others. But the boy could not weep long, for he had to mount his horse
and ride to London to be welcomed by the people. The next day all the
nobles came and knelt before him to kiss his hand and swear that they
would always be loyal. But Edward was still too young to be really
king. His father had left the government in the hands of eighteen men
whom he named. These men now decided that they would put all the power
into the hands of the most important one among them, Edward's uncle,
the Duke of Somerset, who should be called Lord Protector.

For a long time hardly a day passed without some tiresome state
ceremony to which the little King had to go. You can imagine that he
grew very tired of so much showing off. At last came the coronation.
The day before it, King Edward rode through the streets in solemn
procession, clad in a suit of white velvet and silver, adorned with
pearls and diamonds. The trappings of his horse were crimson and gold
embroidered with pearls. The progress of the procession was very slow,
lasting from noon till nightfall; for in every open space was a raised
platform hung with gay curtains, where a company of actors, acrobats,
or singing children would give some kind of exhibition which the King
must stay to watch. One thing that we must suppose he particularly
liked was a wonderful tightrope walker. But after all, he was only a
little nine-year-old boy, and you can imagine that he was very tired
when the long day was over and he went home to bed.

Next day at nine Edward was on his way to Westminster Abbey for the
long and splendid ceremony of the coronation, at which he was formally
presented to the people and crowned by the Archbishop of Canterbury.
After two more days of feasting and celebration, the young King
settled down to a quiet life again. But now it was a very lonely life
and not so happy a one. He saw little of his sisters; and though he
went on with his lessons, they were often interrupted by the business
of the state. For though he had no real power, and the Lord Protector
actually ruled England, yet the little boy had to go through the form
of approving or disapproving of what was done.

Now the Duke of Somerset was very ambitious, and since he had so much of
the power of a king, he began to act and to talk as if he were really
king. This made some people angry and other people jealous. One of the
jealous ones was Lord Seymour, the Protector's brother. Somerset was
very stern with Edward, and kept him very short of money, so Seymour
tried to win the young King's liking by kindness and by gifts of
pocket-money, which kings like as well as other boys. But Seymour's
enemies were too strong for him; he was shut up in the tower, and
Somerset so influenced the child king that he consented to have his kind
uncle condemned to death. It seems a pity that a boy so wise and good
should have been so cold-hearted. It must have been because all the men
around him were hard and cold; if he had only not been a king he might
have been warm and loving and full of gratitude for kindness.

Meantime Somerset went on being more and more proud and ambitious and
making more and more people hate him. Finally, after he had put down
two rebellions by very cruel means, another nobleman, the Duke of
Northumberland, formed a plot to kill Somerset and become Protector
himself. When Somerset heard this, he went to Edward's palace, and
frightened the boy into going away with him on his flight. He thought
that the people would spare his own life out of love and respect for
Edward, and like a coward he used the young King as a shield. It was
dusk when they set out, and the crowded courtyard of the palace was
alight with moving torches and glittering armor. Confused and alarmed
by the champing of the horses, the rattle of steel, and the sound of
voices, the boy cried out, "I pray, good people, be good to us and to
our uncle."

Then Somerset made a long, angry speech to the people, telling them
that he knew of the plot to kill him and seize the King. He finished
his speech in truly cowardly fashion. "I tell you," he said, "if
anything is attempted against me, here," pointing to the King, "is he
who shall die before me."

The King and his uncle fled away safely to Windsor. They rode almost
all night, and arrived at dawn. Nothing was ready for them; they were
not expected, and there was neither food nor fire. The October nights
were cold, and the boy, who was never strong, fell ill of cold and
weariness and fear. At Windsor he lived closely guarded, and felt as
if he were in prison, for the place was then only a fortress, not a
beautiful castle as it is now.

He did not stay long at Windsor, however. Somerset's enemies came
after him, and presented to Edward all their charges against the
cruel, ambitious Protector. Edward seems to have listened to them very
readily, and not to have tried to save his uncle when he was taken and
shut up in the Tower of London. And later, when Somerset was beheaded,
the King cared little about his uncle's fate. It seems strange that
so lovable a boy should have said not one word of regret, even though
he had never liked his uncle.

So, in the midst of anxiety and strife and scenes that hardened his
boyish heart, Edward grew to be fifteen years old. He was now beginning
to take great interest in the government, and to show that he had a mind
and will of his own. Yet, King though he was, he still went on with
lessons. So earnest was he that he was held up to all the boys of
England, as an example. At the same time, however, he liked to play,
though he had sadly little chance for it. He played a game something
like baseball, and tennis, and was fond of archery as a sport.

You will be interested to read what were the things that a boy who was
to be a king had learned by the time he was fifteen. He could speak and
write Latin and French as well as English. He read Greek, Italian, and
Spanish. He had studied the geography of his own country thoroughly, and
knew all about the chief ports of England, Ireland, Scotland, and
France. He had studied fortifications, and the places where they needed
to be built or strengthened. He astonished his advisers by the
intelligence with which he could talk about affairs of state.

It seems likely, does it not, that Edward would have made an excellent
King if ever he had taken the government into his own hands? For the
only fault that shows plainly in him is his coldness of heart. But he
had never been strong, and before he was sixteen he became very ill,
as a result of a cough that he had had for a long time. He had not
strength to fight off the disease; so, patiently and gently as he had
lived, the boy King died. He had had a chance to be neither a real boy
nor a real King.

                      --_Adapted from "Boy-Kings and Girl-Queens",
                                                  by H. E. Marshall._




"SOME UGLY OLD LAWYER"


    One of the things that made President Lincoln great was his
    kindness in small things. Here is a story, told by a man who saw
    the incident take place, that gives an instance of such kindness.

    You should all begin reading this story at the same moment. At the
    end of one minute your teacher will ask you to close your books
    and answer the questions she asks.

One day President Lincoln was met in the park between the White House
and the War Department by an irate, crippled soldier, who was swearing
in a high key, cursing the Government from the President down. Mr.
Lincoln paused and asked him what was the matter.

"Matter enough," was the reply. "I want my money. I have been
discharged here, and can't get my pay."

Mr. Lincoln asked if he had his papers, saying that he used to
practice law in a small way, and possibly could help him. The soldier
rather ungraciously said that he had the papers.

My friend and I stepped behind some convenient shrubbery where we
could watch the result. Mr. Lincoln took the papers from the hands of
the angry soldier, and sat down with him at the foot of a convenient
tree, where he examined them carefully, and writing a line on the
back, told the soldier to take them to Mr. Potts, Chief Clerk of the
War Department, who would doubtless attend to the matter at once.

After Mr. Lincoln had left the soldier, we stepped out and asked him
if he knew whom he had been talking with. "Some ugly old fellow who
pretends to be a lawyer," was the reply. My companion asked to see the
papers, and on their being handed to him, pointed to the indorsement
they had received. To the soldier's great surprise and confusion, this
indorsement read:

"Mr. Potts, attend to this man's case at once and see that he gets his
pay. A. L."


QUESTIONS

    1. Why was Mr. Lincoln willing to help the soldier?

    2. Why didn't he tell the soldier who he was?

    3. Is there a joke in this story? If so, whom was the joke on?




ADDING THE RIGHT WORDS


    Arrange your paper with your name on the first line and your grade
    on the second line. Do not write anything on the third line, but
    on the next six lines, write in the margin the numbers 1 to 6.

    Below are six lists of words. All the words included in each list
    are related in some way. For instance, all the words in the first
    list name colors--

                      red  yellow  orange

    After figure 1 on your paper write two other words that might be
    included in this list of colors. Any two color-words will be
    correct.

    Now in the same way find out what kind of words are included in
    the second list and after figure 2 write two words that could be
    added to this list. Complete the exercise by adding to each of the
    remaining lists in the same manner. When you finish, wait quietly
    for the others.

      1. red, yellow, orange.

      2. wash, scrub, dust.

      3. trolley car, bicycle, carriage.

      4. desk, picture, bookcase.

      5. Marion, Louise, Ruth.

      6. harp, piano, cornet.




THE DESERT INDIANS' "FIRE BED"


    You may have one minute in which to read this selection.

The Indians of our "American Sahara" are compelled by circumstances to
overcome conditions not encountered by their brothers of the plains
and mountains.

The "fire bed" is among the most useful and original methods employed
by them to "sleep warm", in the "open", as in fall and spring the
nights are very cold.

A shallow trench is "scooped out" in the sand, about six feet in
length, three feet wide, and six or eight inches deep. The sand is
"banked up" on the sides, and a fire is then made in the "pit",
covering the entire length. This not only warms the bottom but the
banked sides as well.

After the fire has burned long enough to warm the sand thoroughly, the
larger unburned sticks are thrown out, but all live coals are left in
the pit. The sand on the sides is now covered over the coals to a
depth of about four inches. The "sleeper" will then lie down in the
warm sand; and, if he possesses a blanket, he will throw it over him,
thus keeping in the heat, and will sleep warm.

I have tried this out myself many times, both upon the desert and in
the mountains, and have never suffered from the cold.

                                      --"_Boy Scouts' Year Book."
                              Courtesy of D. Appleton and Company._


    Describe to your teacher how the Desert Indians are able to sleep
    out of doors in warm beds.




YES OR NO?


1. All dogs have a keen sense of smell. My pet animal has a keen sense
of smell; do you know that my pet is a dog?

2. It took George six minutes to finish his exercise correctly. John
finished in five minutes, but most of his answers were wrong. Was
George the better reader?




PIETRO'S ADVENTURE


    You should all begin reading at the same moment. Your teacher will
    announce before you begin how much time she is going to give you.
    She will divide the class into three equal groups according to
    speed and find out which group writes the best answers to the
    questions at the end of this selection.


I

Pietro Vittori was playing in the shade of an olive grove on a
mountain side that overlooked the sea near Naples. Just below him was
a white road that stretched away into the distance for many miles. Far
below the road the blue water sparkled in the sunshine. It was a
beautiful spot. Pietro, who had never been far from the olive grove
and the mountain side, supposed that all the world was like it.

As he looked at the road, he saw a little cloud of dust in the
distance; soon a motor car moved slowly along the road until it came
to a stop. The driver and a man on the seat behind him got out and
busied themselves about the car. They looked at the long slope of the
road before them and shook their heads.

Drawn by curiosity, Pietro moved nearer and nearer until he stood beside
the road. He could see that something was wrong, but he understood no
word that the strangers spoke. Suddenly the glance of the man fell on
the bright-eyed, barefoot lad, and he asked Pietro a question. His voice
was kindly, but Pietro could only shake his head. Then the man laughed
and patted Pietro's brown curls. He led the boy to the side of the car,
and pointed to a tank beneath the seat of the driver.

This time Pietro understood; he knew that the tank contained the
wonderful fluid that made the car go. This car could go no farther
because the supply of the wonderful fluid was used up. It was all
plain enough, and he knew what he could do to help. His dark eyes
shone brightly as he looked up at the man.

[Illustration: "SI, SI, SIGNORE!" HE CRIED EAGERLY]

"Si, si, signore!" he cried, eagerly; and in an instant more he was
flying up the long slope, until at last he was out of sight round a
curve. The driver of the car started to follow him, but soon gave up
the attempt, for it was very hot. All the way to the village Pietro
ran as fast as his bare feet would carry him--two kilometres or more.

It was nearly an hour before Pietro came hurrying back. With him was
the man from the shop in the village, and he bore a filled can in
either hand. The travelers were patiently waiting. They could do
nothing else, for their only hope lay in Pietro, unless by chance
another motor car should come along.

When they were ready to start again, the man patted Pietro's curly head
once more, and slipped some bright silver coins into his hand--to the
great surprise of Pietro, who had never seen other coins than those made
of copper. Then the man leaped to his seat, and the whole party waved
their hands to Pietro, and called out gayly to him in their strange
language; then the car sped out of sight. Then Pietro hurried up through
the olive grove to his little home, where the bright silver coins
surprised his parents even more than they had surprised him.

Now that was only a small adventure; but adventures were few in
Pietro's life, and so he thought of it often through the weeks and
months that followed. A year later, with his parents and his brothers
and sisters, he went over the mountains to Naples, and sailed in a
great ship across the ocean to Boston; and all that meant so many
adventures that he almost forgot his long run over the hot and dusty
road to help the strangers.


II

Pietro had lived in the North End of Boston about two years, when he
had another adventure. Late one afternoon, toward the end of November,
he was walking slowly along the street on his way home from school.
His heart was heavy. At school he had just been learning the story of
Thanksgiving, and he had heard much about Thanksgiving celebrations;
but he knew that there would be no Thanksgiving dinner in the crowded
little rooms where he lived, for the family was large, and his father
had long been without work.

As two men passed him, one said to the other, "How this part of Boston
has changed! I thought I could take you straight to the Old North
Church, but I seem to be getting lost."

Pietro sprang to the man's side. "I know the way!" he cried. "Let me
show you! And I can tell you all about the church where Paul Revere
hung the lanterns."

The two men looked down, and laughed. "That is the way with the little
Italian boys; they soon become real Americans," said the one who had
spoken first. "We shall be glad to have you guide us," he added to
Pietro.

So Pietro proudly walked before them, and led the way, first to the
historic church, and then to the old cemetery on Copp's Hill, near by.
All this time the man was watching him curiously. "I think you and I
have met before," he said at length. "Do you remember me?"

For the first time Pietro looked long and hard at the man's face. Then
he cried out, "Yes, yes! I did not see before! You were the man in the
car that stopped on the Amalfi road." He fairly danced for pleasure
that the strange man had remembered him so long. Then he hurried on:
"See! I can talk with you now! I am an American! I go to school!"

"You see," said the man laughingly, as he turned to his friend, "I can
remember the face of a bright Italian boy better than I can the
streets of my own city."

Then he told his friend of the help that Pietro had given when the
motor car stopped on the Italian mountain side. With a few questions,
he drew from Pietro his own story, and he watched the brown-eyed boy
closely as they talked.

"Pietro," he said, at last, "I like you, and I want to be your friend.
Keep on in school and study. Come and see me to talk things over once
in a while. I'll be able to help you when it is time for you to go to
work. In the meantime I can find work for your father." He gave Pietro
his address, and checked the words of thanks that came pouring out.
"And this," the man went on, "will give you all a Thanksgiving dinner
as a reward for your work as guide this afternoon."

A bill was pressed into Pietro's hand, and the men hurried on. Pietro
stood where they left him, and looked first at the bill in his hand,
and then at the two men, who turned and waved their hands as they went
round a corner.

So it came about that the fortunes of the Vittori family took a sudden
change for the better, and there was a happy Thanksgiving dinner in
their tenement--all as a result of Pietro's cheerful readiness to be
of help three years before, when strangers were in trouble on an
Italian mountain side.

                                          --_John Clair Minot.
                            Courtesy of "The Youth's Companion"._


QUESTIONS

    1. Near what city did the first part of this story take place?

    2. In what city did the second part occur?

    3. What service did Pietro do for the travelers in the first part?

    4. What happened to Pietro between the first and second parts of
    the story?

    5. Did Pietro do anything in the second part of the story similar
    to what he did in the first?

    6. Do you think the American gentleman had a good memory?

    7. Pietro was very polite and obliging, wasn't he? What two good
    things did he do for his family by being so?

    8. What do you think "_Si, si, signore_" means? Why are these
    three words printed in italics?




SOME PATRIOTIC MINE WORKERS


    You should all begin reading this selection at the same moment.

    Can you read it thoroughly in thirty seconds?

    Not all the good soldiers in the American army which helped to win
    the World War were in the trenches, or even in France. And they
    were not all young men. See if you do not think the following
    occurrence proves the truth of this statement.

In October, 1918, shortly before the war ended, one hundred and fifty
mine workers, who had retired from service after earning enough to
support themselves in their old age, returned to the mines at
Stoneboro, Pennsylvania, when they learned of the shortage of men
during the war. They mined four thousand tons of coal while they
waited for the railway siding to be completed to the new opening where
they were to work.

                                         --"_Youth's Companion._"


QUESTIONS

    Why is it right to call these men patriotic?

    Is that kind of patriotism needed only in war time?




FATHER DOMINO


It was the early spring time. The snow banks were melting away,
leaving the brown earth soft enough for the flowers to push through as
soon as they felt the warmth of the sun.

Across the high hill, which sloped down to the river, came a pair of
foxes. The splendid Silver Fox, with a black mark across the eyes like
a mask, was called Domino. The dainty little lady fox by his side,
with a red coat and an elegant ruffle of white, was Snowyruff. They
had met one day in the woods, and chosen each other for mates and
friends for life, as is the way of foxes. Now they were searching
through the woods for a place to build their home.

Snowyruff looked about the piney glade, nosed the ground, then began
to dig. It was her way of saying, "I am satisfied. We'll set up
housekeeping here."

She did not know that she had chosen the same sunny slope on which
Domino himself had lived as a tiny cub, but she did know that it was a
fine place for a home for a family of foxes. The hillside would be
sheltered and warm; the den door would be hidden by the pine thicket
near.

The deep snow and deep leaves had kept the earth soft enough for her
to dig, so she worked away with a will. Domino sat on the hill and
kept guard for an hour, then he took her place and worked while
Snowyruff kept watch. So, working together, they built their home; a
cozy, well-hidden den it was, too. No eye could detect it, though
within a dozen feet; and as the warm spring sunshine set the grass
growing, it was better hidden each day.

The pair were more and more careful not to be seen near the den. At
last one day Snowyruff said to Domino: "Keep away now!" and he kept
away from the den for days. While he was absent a wonderful thing
happened: Five little foxes were born! When Snowyruff left them to
slip down to the river for a cooling drink of water, Domino was there
on the bank watching. She said to him in plain Fox language: "You must
not come home yet," so he crouched with his head flat on the leaves,
and she hurried back to the den.

The next day when she was hungry, she ate some of the food which they
had stored up in the dry sand of the side chamber of the den. Two days
later, she went to the door, and there was a pile of food--Domino had
stolen down and left it for her and their babies. After that, every
day, there was food at the door, or hidden in the grass near by.

When the cubs were nine days old their eyes opened, they whimpered
less, and Snowyruff felt it safer to leave them. Domino now came in to
see his family, and a proud father he was. He guarded them with the
greatest care, and was as devoted to them as Mother Snowyruff herself.

When they were about a month old, the little toddlers were brought out
into the sunlight in front of the den. There they romped and wrestled
and raced with each other. Sometimes they chased flies or bumble-bees,
sometimes they made a fine game of catching Mother's tail, or tussled
over a dried duck's wing.

As the days passed and the young foxes grew stronger, Domino and
Snowyruff began teaching them to find food for themselves. Live game
was brought home each day. Sometimes a frog, or a fat field mouse, was
brought, and then turned loose for the youngsters to re-capture. Once
Domino called, "Chur-chur-chur," and when the rollicking cubs came
tumbling over one another, he dropped a live muskrat in their midst.
They pounced on it, but the muskrat was a desperate fighter. It seemed
for a time that he would win, but the father and mother only looked
on. They must let their children learn to do hard things for
themselves, so they waited until one cub was strong enough and quick
enough to lay the muskrat low.

The happy growing days went by, and the cubs had not learned the
meaning of fear. One day Domino was returning home with food. Five
little black noses, ten little beady eyes, set in woolly heads, were
bunched at the den door. Suddenly the bay of a hound sounded near and
Domino leaped on a stump to listen. There was no mistake; the hound
was coming nearer the home place. Snowyruff warned the little ones,
and Domino loped bravely out to meet his enemy. He showed himself
boldly, and even barked defiance at the big hound, then dashed away,
leading him farther and farther from the den.

Domino ran hard for an hour, then began trying to throw the hound off
his trail, but it was not easy. The hound was swift and keen in
following the trail, and though he doubled, crossed, and tried every
trick he knew, Domino could not throw him off. The fox ran lightly
ahead, the hound crashing heavily after him, baying loudly. At last
Domino led his enemy along a narrow ledge which ran at the edge of a
cliff overhanging the river.

On they went. Domino was growing very tired. His steps were lagging so
that the hound was gaining upon him at every jump. Up and up they
went; Domino went slower still. The hound could see him just ahead. He
drew closer with each bound. At last Domino reached the top of the
cliff. His black coat gleamed against the sky. He could go no farther;
it was the end of the trail. The hound plunged forward, and leaped at
the fox; but Domino sprang lightly aside, and the hound plunged
headlong over the rugged cliff. He was hurled down into the icy
flood below. He swam out as best he could, battered and bleeding, and
limped home, whining with pain. Domino turned back and ran to the den,
where five little black noses, ten little beady eyes, set in five
little woolly heads, waited for their father.

[Illustration: LIVE GAME WAS BROUGHT HOME EACH DAY]

The hound never came back again, and the Fox family lived in peace
until the little foxes grew large enough to leave the home den and
make homes for themselves.

       --_From "Stories for Children and How to Tell Them".
                                  Courtesy of J. Berg Esenwein._


QUESTIONS

    1. What kind of home does a fox build for his family?

    2. What kind of lessons did the Fox children have to be taught?

    3. What did Domino do that reminds you of what a human father
    would do for his family?

    4. Make a list of the things the Fox family did that seem almost
    human.




THE GOOD GIANT WINS HIS FORTUNE


    Here is just one "movie" scene, just enough to fill up this page.
    If you have forgotten how to play it, refer to the directions on
    page 38.

"Ha," said the giant as he stooped down and picked up something. "Here
is the key." Then he unbolted the door and walked into the vault where
he saw chests of gold and silver arranged along the wall. He marked
dozens of them with the chalk that he had in his pocket. When he had
finished, he put a purse full of diamonds in his pocket, swung a bag
full of money over his shoulder, and went out without another word,
locking the terrified steward in.




THE MOLE AWAKES


    One of the facts discovered by a student of nature is that every
    part of an animal's body is fitted to perform its special task,
    and to help the animal live in the surroundings where it finds its
    home. Notice three ways in which the mole's bodily equipment is
    fitted to the life he leads.

"Dig" is expressed in every line of the mole's body. Digging is his
life-work, and to this Nature has adapted his every organ. His eyes are
of no use in this underground life, and so they have dwindled away until
externally there is little sign of them. Objects he probably never sees
with any distinctness, though he still can tell light from darkness. But
he seems to recognize light only to avoid it. In the darkness of his
tunnels not only would his eyes be useless, but dirt would be apt to get
into them while he is digging; so they are gradually leaving him.

The ears, too, or that part of them that projects from the head, would
be in the way. So they have been discarded. The inner and most important
part of the ear, however, still remains, and the mole hears quite well.

His most remarkable difference from ordinary animals is in the arms.
These are very short, and the hands are broad, hard, and horny, and
have very firm claws. When I catch a good, vigorous mole, I find I
scarcely have force enough in my thumb and forefinger to hold his
front feet together. He can often separate them in spite of all my
straining. His other muscles are comparatively weak. The hands have
been altered into great shovels, and when he tries to walk over
smooth, level ground or on a floor he moves with odd, quick steps,
resting on the sides and not on the palms of his hands. He reminds one
of a wound-up toy that is held in the air and allowed to run down.
But when he gets under the sod, the heaving line that forms over him
as he digs shows that there he is in his proper element. Most animals
would get dirty leading such a life, but you never see a cleaner
animal than the mole. He comes out of the loose earth and squirms
about a little, and he is clean. His smooth gray fur, shading to a
silvery hue when it is ruffled, is very short and close and
exceedingly dry. Indeed I know no animal with a more velvety coat. He
would be a delightful pet to handle were it not for his ceaseless
wriggling. Then too he carries a strong musky odor. This latter,
indeed, is his only defence and I fear it is a poor one. Certainly it
does not usually deter a dog from snapping him up. But perhaps it is
meant for his friends rather than his foes. Friendly moles may scent
each other from afar.

The mole is a reversible machine. He can run forward or backward at
will. Probably as a result of this habit, it is wonderful how alike are
the two ends of his body, his nose and his tail. Each is slender and
each is bare; each is very sensitive, and the tail is just about as long
as the nose. I think he uses whichever happens to precede, as a feeler,
when he is making his way through his tunnel. For once having made a
good big runway, he is very apt to keep on using it through the season.
I doubt not he is often forced to travel backwards through his burrow.
Then his tail must serve him as an effective guide.

          --_From "Under the Open Sky", by S. C. Schmucker.
                               Courtesy of J. B. Lippincott Co._


QUESTIONS

    1. Explain what the author means by saying, "The mole is a
    reversible machine."

    2. How long did it take you to read this selection?




THE COUNT AND THE ROBBERS


    Ever since the World's War began, we have heard a great deal about
    Belgium, the gallant little country which saved the world, and
    Holland, her sturdy neighbor which stayed neutral. Both these small
    countries were once called the Netherlands. "Nether" means "lower";
    you can see how suitable a name "lower lands" is for a country that
    is much of it below sea level. Until the fifteenth century this
    country had no one ruler, but was cut up into many little parts,
    each governed by a duke or count. Here is the story of a kind count,
    who ruled in one part of the land in the twelfth century.

In the twelfth century there ruled in Bruges a certain Count Bordewyn,
whose fathers had reigned for many years before him. Bruges, in those
days, was one of the most important centres of the Netherlands, and
the count was a kind and good man whose only thought was to make his
people happy. In order that they might not be afraid to tell him their
needs, he went about among them dressed as a farmer and a peasant; and
they, thinking he was one of themselves, spoke out freely in his
presence. One night he left his castle, and, poorly dressed, went out
into the country to see if there was any good he could do. It was a
dark, cold night, and after walking for some time he was glad to see
the lights of a house in the distance. When he reached the building,
he knocked at the door and went in. He found himself at a
wedding-party given by a farmer whose daughter had been married that
day. The good count was very happy to be of the party, and without
letting the people know who he was, he sat down with them and sang and
feasted. It was very late when they, much against their will, let him
leave them, and he walked back through the lonely country, making
plans for his people's happiness.

Suddenly he heard a whistle, and five men rushed out from a clump of
trees and threw themselves upon him. The Count struggled to the trees,
set his back against one and prepared to fight. The robbers were armed
with knives, but the Count had only a big stick. On they rushed at
him. He struck at the first one with all his strength, and hit him so
hard that he fell to the ground. Another one crept up to his side, and
would have cut his head open; but the Count turned quickly, and,
catching the stroke on his stick, snatched the knife from the robber's
hand, and with a blow sent him to join his comrade senseless on the
ground. This left three against one, and the Count felt his strength
giving way under their blows. Still full of courage, he swung the
stick round his head to keep the wretches at a distance, and, as
loudly as he could, he prayed to God to send him help. At this moment
he saw dimly outlined against the darkness a human figure. In its
hands it wielded a strange weapon, which soon was falling again and
again on the heads and shoulders of the three bandits until they took
to their heels and ran. At first the Count thought it was some angel
from heaven come to his help, but as the figure drew nearer he saw
that it was a farmer, and that the mysterious weapon was a flail.

The Count and the farmer embraced each other, and for a moment did not
speak. Then said the Count, "My brave fellow! How can I thank you? You
have saved my life!"

But the farmer would not listen to his thanks; "No, no," said he; "I
have done only what you would have done for me in the same
circumstances, and nothing more need be said. I take it that you are a
merchant earning a living for your wife and family, as I try to do for
mine."

But the Count insisted that the farmer should ask some favor.
"Listen!" said he; "I am in the service of the Count, and perhaps can
do you some great good."

[Illustration: THE ROBBERS WERE ARMED WITH KNIVES]

For a time the farmer was silent, and then, hesitating very much, he
told the Count his dearest wish. "For thirty years I have worked on a
piece of land; with this flail I have beaten the corn, and I have
loved the farm as my child. Yesterday my master died, and the land
will pass into strange hands and out of my care."

The Count had listened quietly to his story, and at last spoke: "But,
my friend, this is not such a difficult matter. How would you like the
land for your own?"

The poor farmer wept with emotion. "Really, is it possible that you
have such influence?" said he.

"Come to the castle to-morrow," said the Count, "and ask for the
Captain of the Guard."

And the farmer, mystified and wondering, went slowly home. When his
wife opened the door, she was very angry with him for being so late;
but Cornelius--that was the farmer's name--explained what had
happened, and although the wife could scarcely believe that such good
fortune could be theirs, yet they went to bed full of hope.

At daybreak Cornelius dressed in his best and set off for the castle,
followed by the prayers and blessings of his wife. When he arrived he
was so frightened that he could hardly speak to the big soldiers who
guarded the door, but at last he gave his message and asked to see the
Captain. He followed the soldier into a splendid hall richly hung with
tapestries, and soon the man whose life he had saved came into the
room. He was dressed so beautifully in silk and cloth of gold that
Cornelius hardly recognized him, and when he did he was afraid to ask
his question. But his friend told him not to fear, that the Count was
favorable to him.

He led the trembling Cornelius through many rooms and at last stopped
outside a big door. "In this hall you will see the Count. Ask for what
you wish," he said.

But Cornelius said he was so much afraid that he dared not ask.
"Besides, how shall I know the Count from all his followers?" he
inquired.

And the answer was that all the people in the room would kneel,
bare-headed, except Count Bordewyn himself. So Cornelius followed his
guide into the great hall where all the Court was assembled in
grandeur, and, looking round him, he perceived that the only persons
standing were himself and the man whose life he had saved. Seeing
this, he at once knew that this man was the Count, and he flung
himself on his knees and begged forgiveness for his presumption in
speaking to him as he had done. But the Count, taking his hands,
raised him to his feet and embraced him, and telling his Court the
history of the previous night, he commanded them to treat Cornelius
with every respect. He gave him the farm and land for his own, and
stocked it with grain and cattle.

                             --_From "A Peep at the Netherlands,"
                                            by Beatrix Jungman._


    1. What was the Count's object in going about in disguise?

    2. What do you think he gained by it?

    3. What risks did he run?

    4. Do you think the farmer deserved so great a reward?

    5. What is a _flail_? You can find out from the story, without
    using a dictionary.

    6. Do you suppose the Count's people loved him? Why?

    7. What difference do you see between the way the subjects of the
    Count treated him in his castle and the way Americans would treat
    their mayor, governor, or president?

    8. Name the three scenes in this story.




WHAT THE EARLIEST MEN DID FOR US


    You are now going to read a chapter of history. It will help you
    to see how our ancestors learned some things that are very common
    to us today, but which had to be learned before the wonderful
    comforts we enjoy were possible.

    You will like to study history if you keep in mind that it does
    not just tell of something that happened a long time ago, but that
    it shows how our civilization with its homes and schools and
    churches and government and our great railroads and steamships and
    factories came into existence. The thing we call civilization has
    grown and changed in thousands of years much as you have grown and
    changed in the few years that you can remember.

    You will need to read this selection very carefully. Your teacher
    will ask you the questions at the end and probably a good many
    more. See if you can read it the first time so thoroughly that you
    can answer all the questions. It will help you very much if you
    will write topics as you go along. In the fourth paragraph you
    will find a list of things that man has always needed. If you use
    each of these things as a heading and under it make a list of the
    steps of man's progress, you will probably find that you have
    mastered the selection.

History is the story of what men have done in the past. It was not
until men had learned how to write that they could keep a record of
what they did. But men lived upon the earth for many thousand years
before they knew how to write. In that early time they learned how to
do many things which we are still doing and to make many things which
we are still making and using. In these ways they did much to make
life what it is for us.

How is it possible for us to know anything about what life was like in
those ancient times when men could not write? Did you ever find an
Indian arrow-head? Perhaps you have seen a collection of stone
arrow-heads and axes. These relics and others like them tell us many
things about the people who made them. Then there are people now
living, like the natives of Australia or some of the tribes of
American Indians, who still use, or used until very recently, these
crude stone implements, and who live very much as our own ancestors
lived many thousand years ago.

The earliest men lived but little better than the animals in the
forest about them. They were without shelter or clothing and had only
such food as they could find from day to day. Men have either found or
made everything that we now have. Early man possessed a great
advantage over all the animals because he had a better brain and a
wonderful pair of hands with which he could make the weapons, tools,
and other things that he needed.

Men have always needed food, shelter, clothing, and the means of
protection against the dangers around them. It took our early
ancestors many thousand years to learn how to provide themselves with
these simple necessities of life.

At first men lived upon the roots, herbs, wild berries, and fruits in
the forest. Sometimes they found birds' nests in the trees and ate the
eggs or the young birds. Occasionally they found a dead bird or animal
and thus learned to like the taste of flesh. They hunted for shellfish
by the seashore and caught fish in the streams and lakes. Then they
began to kill the smaller animals with stones or clubs and in this way
they became meat eaters. When men had learned how to make knives,
spears, and bows and arrows, they could kill the larger animals and
get a better supply of food.

For a long time all food was eaten raw, because the use of fire was
unknown. We do not know how man discovered fire. He may have kindled it
first from a tree set aflame by the lightning. By and by he found that a
spark could be produced by striking two stones together in the right
way or that he could make a fire by rubbing two pieces of wood together.

The making of fire was one of the most wonderful inventions in the
world. Men could now cook their food. At first they roasted bits of
meat before the blaze or in the hot ashes. Later, when they had
learned how to make vessels that would hold water, they began to boil
all kinds of food over the fire.

For a long time men procured their food by hunting, trapping, and
fishing. During this time they began to capture and tame the young of
some of the wild animals. Probably the dog was the first domestic
animal. The cow was also domesticated at a very early period. Man used
her meat and milk for food and her skin for clothing. He made tools and
implements out of her bones and horns. No other animal has been more
useful to him. The goat and the sheep, the hog and the ass, and later
the horse, were tamed by early men long before real history began. After
these animals had been domesticated by the hunters and trappers, some
men became shepherds and herdsmen and wandered from place to place with
their flocks and herds in search of the best pastures.

Presently another step was taken toward civilized life. Men had long
known that the seeds of some of the wild grasses and plants were good
to eat. Now some one noticed that if these seeds were sown they sprang
up and brought forth many more seeds. Then it was discovered that the
seeds grew better and yielded a more abundant crop if the ground were
broken up and made soft before the seed was sown. Because of these
discoveries some men began to be farmers. By cultivation, the wild
grasses which grew in the fields or beside the rivers were developed
into wheat, oats, barley, and rice, the great cereals of the world.

When men began to procure their food by cultivating the soil it became
necessary for them to remain in the same place in order to gather the
harvest when it ripened. They could no longer wander from place to
place as they had done when they were only hunters or shepherds. They
now began to live in permanent villages and to cultivate the land
lying near by. In this way the beginning of farming led to a settled
life and the making of permanent homes.

Probably the earliest men had only such shelter from the rain and
protection from wild animals as the trees gave them. After a time men
began to live in dens and caves in the earth. These people are called
the "cave dwellers". Still later men built huts by bending young trees
together, weaving branches between them, and covering the whole
structure with leaves and bark. When the hut was built of poles covered
with the skins of animals it became a tent. Many of the people who
wandered from place to place with their flocks and herds dwelt in tents.

When men settled near the fields that they were beginning to cultivate,
they built permanent homes of stone plastered with mud or of bricks made
of clay and dried in the sun. The roofs were covered with brush or
timber. Then fire places and rude chimneys were added to these simple
houses, and in other ways man's dwelling place was gradually improved.

The first clothing was probably made from the leaves of trees or from
grasses matted together. When man became a good hunter he wore the skins
of the animals that he killed. The ancestors of all of us were once clad
in skins. The women of those early days used to cure the skins of small
animals by drying them. They then made garments of them by sewing them
together with needles of bone and the sinews of animals for thread.

The women scraped and worked the large skins until they were soft and
pliable. These they used for clothing, or for blankets, or for the
covering of their tents. Still later, the women learned to spin yarn
from wool sheared from the sheep and from the thread of the flax which
they were beginning to raise. The next step was to weave the yarn and
the thread into woolen and linen cloth.

It was because early man had the mind to invent and the hands to make
the weapons, tools, and utensils which he needed that he was able to
make such progress in procuring food, shelter, and clothing.

Man's first weapon was a club. A stone which he used to crack nuts
with probably was his earliest tool. At first he simply found stones
of the right shape for his purpose. Then he began to chip a piece of
flint until it had a rough edge. Now he had a hatchet as well as a
hammer. Because he held this hatchet in his hand it has been called a
fist-hatchet. A great many of these fist-hatchets have been found. In
the course of time man learned how to use thongs of rawhide to bind
handles to his fist-hatchets. Now he had axes and spears.

It was a great day in the long climb toward civilized ways of living
when some unknown inventor made the first bow. With arrows tipped with
sharp bits of stone, man could now kill the larger animals. Stone knives
were used to skin the game. Flint scrapers and other implements were
very useful in scraping and softening the skins to fit them for use.

By using pieces of flint with rough edges as saws and files, men began
to make tools of horn, bones, and shells. They now possessed daggers
and hammers of horn and awls and needles of bone.

[Illustration: THE EVOLUTION OF THE HOUSE]

For many thousand years, stone arrow-heads, knives, and axes were made
with rough, chipped edges. This time is sometimes called the Old Stone
Age. When men had learned to make better tools of their stone knives
and axes by grinding and polishing them to a smooth, sharp edge, they
had entered upon the New Stone Age.

The next great forward step in human progress was taken when men
discovered metals and began to use them. Copper was the first metal
used, but it was soon found that it was too soft for making many
articles.

Presently it was discovered that if a little tin were mixed with the
copper it made a harder metal called bronze. So many weapons, tools,
and ornaments were made of bronze that the time when it was used is
called the Bronze Age.

Iron is the most useful of all the metals. It is much harder than
bronze and better suited in every way for making tools and implements.
It took man a long time to learn how to use it, because it is not so
easy to work as copper and bronze. When man made this "king of metals"
his servant, he traveled a long, long way on the road which leads to
civilization.

The men invented the weapons and some of the tools of the earliest
ages. But it is probable that the women first made many useful tools
and utensils. Women wove the first baskets to use in gathering and
carrying berries, nuts, and other articles of food. They used to cover
fish with clay in order to bake them in the coals and they noticed how
the fires hardened the clay. Then by molding clay over baskets so that
they could be hung over the fire, women gradually learned how to make
earthenware pots and bowls. Afterwards they cut spoons, ladles, and
drinking cups from shells, gourds, and the horns of animals. In these
ways our foremothers made their first cooking utensils and their first
dishes for holding and serving food and drink.

[Illustration: CLAY BOWLS AND WOVEN BASKETS]

Women were not only the first basket-makers and potters. They were
also the first spinners and weavers. They ground the first grain into
flour with mortars and pestles of stone. Later they made simple mills
for this purpose. In fact, women who lived before the dawn of history,
began nearly all the household arts and crafts and in this way helped
all the people who have lived since then.

Our earliest ancestors, like ourselves, found it necessary to carry
things from place to place. But they lived long before the days of the
railroad and the steamship. The first burdens were borne by the women.
They followed the men who hunted, and carried the meat and the hides
of the slain animals back to the camp. After the dog, the donkey, and
the horse had been tamed, articles to be transported were packed upon
their backs or dragged upon the ground behind them. Sleds were made in
the northern lands. Canoes and boats were built by the dwellers by the
rivers and the sea. Last of all, the wheeled cart was invented. All
these things are older than history.

We often call our own time the age of invention. The steam engine, the
telegraph, and the many uses of electricity are all modern. They have
made wonderful changes in our ways of living. But these changes in our
lives are not as remarkable as were those made in the lives of our
earliest ancestors so long ago by such inventions as the fishhook and
the bow and arrow, and such discoveries as how to make fire, how to
make pottery, how to domesticate animals and plants, and how to smelt
and work the metals.

Nowadays children have homes and are cared for by their parents. Among
the very earliest men there was nothing like our homes or our
families. Each person found his own food and took care of himself. Of
course, mothers cared for their babies, but nobody took care of a
child after he was large enough to find his own food. Then he had to
shift for himself. When he wanted his breakfast or his dinner he dug
roots or hunted for berries, nuts, or acorns. Sometimes he feasted
upon birds' eggs or upon a rabbit or a squirrel which he had caught.
The honey which he found in the nests of the wild bees was his only
candy and he was apt to get well stung in taking it. He lived in
constant fear of the wild animals around him and usually slept in a
tree for safety. He spent his entire life in this way.

There are many things that people can do better by working together.
It took many years for early men to learn to help one another. When
they became cave dwellers and learned how to make fire, the first
family group began to be formed. This group was called the clan. The
clan simply means those who were kin to each other; that is, a number
of men and women who believed that they were descended from a common
ancestor. At first the common ancestor was a woman, the clan mother.
In those days, relationship was always counted on the mother's side.
When a man married he went to live with the clan of his wife. In the
course of time groups of clans came to be called tribes.

[Illustration: THE DEVELOPMENT OF TRANSPORTATION]

A long time later, after the animals had been domesticated and men had
come to own flocks and herds and other things that we call property, the
father became the head of the family, as we know it today. Our kind of a
family with the father as its head existed before history began.

Words had to be invented, just as tools were. At first men had no
language. Very slowly they gave names to the things about them and
learned to talk to each other. Mothers sang jingles and lullabies to
their babies. Around the campfire at night men told how they had
hunted the wild beasts. Women talked as they gathered and prepared
food or dressed the skins of the wild animals. Mothers wanted their
children to be brave and wise, so they told them stories about the
bravest and wisest of their clan in the olden time. Perhaps this is
why children, and older people too for that matter, have always been
fond of stories. In these ways languages grew and the simple
beginnings of literature were made.

People have always been fond of ornaments. The earliest men wore
necklaces of teeth and claws. Later they made beads of bronze or of
gold. The women tried to make their baskets and their clothes as
beautiful as possible by coloring them with natural dyes. Some of the
men liked to draw pictures of wild animals upon pieces of bone or upon
the walls of their homes in the caves. People learned to count upon
their fingers, and to use various parts of their bodies, like the
finger, the hand, and the arm, as measures of length. For example, the
cubit of which we read in the Bible was the distance from the elbow to
the end of the middle finger. Our arts and sciences have grown from
such crude and simple beginnings.

Our early ancestors lived in fear of many things about them. They
thought that fire, the rivers, the sea, the sun, and many other
natural objects were alive and could harm them or help them. So they
offered gifts to all these things and prayed to them for help. Early
men also believed that the souls of their ancestors lived after death,
and that these ancestors could help them or harm them. They thought
that if they offered gifts of food, and drink at the graves of their
dead, the spirits of the departed would be pleased and would protect
the living members of their families. If, on the other hand, the dead
were neglected or forgotten they would become evil spirits who might
bring great misfortune upon the living. They also thought that if the
dead were not properly buried they would become ghosts, haunting the
places they had known when they were alive. Because of these ideas
early men were very careful to worship their ancestors. The first
religions of the world grew out of these beliefs and practices of
primitive men with reference to nature and to their own ancestors.

         --_From "Our Beginnings in Europe and America",
                                     by Smith Burnham.
                        Courtesy of The John C. Winston Co._


QUESTIONS

    1. Make a list of the things in everyday life which we take for
    granted as necessities which the earliest men had to learn how to
    make.

    2. What was the earliest important discovery made by man? Do you
    think this was as important as the discovery of electricity? Why?
    Name any inventions that have come into common use within your own
    or your parents' lifetime.

    3. Before man discovered fire, what did he eat? Mention two steps
    by which he came to have better food to eat.

    4. Mention in order five kinds of dwellings which the early men
    lived in, and three kinds of clothing which they wore.

    5. What useful things did women do in these early days?

    6. Why is your hand more useful than the paw of an animal?

    7. From what source did each article of food on your dinner table
    to-day come? How many people had something to do with this food
    before it reached you?

    8. Compare the clothing of people to-day with that of primitive
    man. Are we more or less dependent on others for food and clothing
    than primitive man?

    9. We are still making new words. Make a list of words that have
    come into use since the World War began.




TRY THIS


    This nonsense test must be worked out carefully or it may fool
    you. You will need only a small piece of paper for your answers.

1. If your name is Geraldine, or if you are not yet past 37 years of
age, or

      "If lollypops grow on butternut trees
      And godgillies ride on the galloping breeze"--

sign your name anywhere on your paper. Then, if you have signed your
name, never mind the second paragraph, but skip to the third.

2. Rub out your name and write the name of the first president of the
United States in its stead. Then take the remaining paragraph.

3. Write your name again in some other part of your paper and hand it
in.




PUTTING WORDS WHERE THEY BELONG


Arrange your paper with your name on the first line and your grade on
the second line. Divide the rest of your paper into four parts with
lines drawn as shown below. Let the lines be drawn up as far as the
third line of your paper.

      SHIP BUILDING | AGRICULTURE |  MINING  | MANUFACTURING
                    |             |          |
                    |             |          |
                    |             |          |
                    |             |          |
                    |             |          |
                    |             |          |

Write the words, SHIP BUILDING, AGRICULTURE, MINING, MANUFACTURING, at
the top of the four spaces on the fourth line, as shown above.

Below is a long list of words that is not very well arranged. On your
paper re-arrange the words so that every word that concerns SHIP
BUILDING is placed in the first list, and every word that concerns
AGRICULTURE is placed in the second list, and every word that concerns
MINING or MANUFACTURING is placed in its proper list. If you finish
before the others wait quietly for them to complete their work.

  ore            crane             mast            dock
  mill           loom              bulkheads       blast
  weaving        cultivation       drill           crop
  irrigation     keel              fertilizer      carpets
  launch         safety-lamp       silk            dyes
  reaping        lace              soil            rigging
  riveter        pick              pump            cave-in
  shaft          spinning          anchor          shuttle
  miner          steel plates      elevator        sowing
  harvester      grain             textiles        tractor




MAKING MONEY EARN MONEY


The table given below tells how much your savings will amount to at
four per cent interest compounded semi-annually. One dollar a month is
a little less than twenty-five cents a week. From this table, answer
the following questions:

1. If you save one dollar a month, how much will you have in three
years? Five years? Eight years? Ten years?

2. If you save four dollars a month--less than a dollar a week--how
much will you have in six years? Ten years?

3. If you save ten dollars a month, how much will you have in seven
years? Ten years?

4. If you save five dollars a month for ten years, will you have more
or less than if you save ten dollars a month for five years?

5. Can you explain to the class how to read the table?

  ------------------+---------+---------+---------+---------+---------
   Monthly savings. |  1 year | 2 years | 3 years | 4 years | 5 years
  ------------------+---------+---------+---------+---------+---------
  $1                |  $12.24 |  $24.98 |  $38.24 |  $52.03 |  $66.39
  $2                |   24.48 |   49.96 |   76.48 |  104.06 |  132.77
  $3                |   36.73 |   74.94 |  114.71 |  156.10 |  199.16
  $4                |   48.97 |   99.93 |  152.95 |  208.13 |  265.55
  $5                |   61.21 |  124.91 |  191.19 |  260.16 |  331.94
  $10               |  122.42 |  249.81 |  382.38 |  520.32 |  663.87
  ------------------+---------+---------+---------+---------+---------

  ------------------+---------+---------+---------+---------+---------
   Monthly savings. | 6 years | 7 years | 8 years | 9 years |10 years
  ------------------+---------+---------+---------+---------+---------
  $1                |  $81.32 |  $96.87 | $113.04 | $129.83 | $147.35
  $2                |  162.65 |  193.74 |  226.09 |  259.67 |  294.70
  $3                |  243.97 |  290.61 |  339.13 |  389.50 |  442.05
  $4                |  325.30 |  387.48 |  452.18 |  519.34 |  589.39
  $5                |  406.62 |  484.35 |  565.22 |  649.17 |  736.74
  $10               |  813.25 |  968.89 |1,130.45 |1,298.35 |1,473.48
  ------------------+---------+---------+---------+---------+---------

                      --_From "Fifteen Lessons in Thrift"._




HEROES OF HISTORY


There were four children at the big second-story window that looked
out over the broad avenue where the historical pageant was to pass;
four children in very high spirits. Of course they were excited and
happy; it was a wonderful place for seeing, and it was a wonderful
parade that they were to watch--a celebration of the ending of the
great World's War. The procession was to take the form of a series of
groups of figures representing great persons from the history of the
five important nations that had been allies in the struggle. Alfred
and Betty and Francis and Dick had been talking for days about the
great event. They were sure that they would enjoy it, for though
Alfred, the oldest, was not thirteen yet, and Dick, the baby, was but
seven, they all thought they knew something about history. And if they
weren't able to recognize all the characters in the pageant, they need
only ask Aunt Eleanor, who sat with them in the group at the window.

From far up the street came the sound of a band, and all the watchers
stood on tiptoe or craned their necks to catch the first glimpse of the
marching lines. It was a regimental band, with the colors carried
proudly. How everyone cheered for the lines of khaki soldiers who
followed next! Then noisy enthusiasm gave place to eager and interested
questions about the first historical group. And nobody in all the
watching crowd had more questions to ask than our windowful of children.

The center of the strangely costumed company was a blonde, bearded,
kingly figure, wearing a crown of gold, a coat of mail, and a long,
flowing cloak. One hand was on the jeweled hilt of his sword; the
other clasped to his breast a parchment-bound book. Behind him were
two attendants. Aunt Eleanor, watching her charges with as much
interest as they watched the street, saw that they looked puzzled,
though Alfred was trying to pretend that he knew the name of the king.

"You ought to feel honored, Alfred," said Aunt Eleanor. "That splendid
looking Englishman has the same name as you."

"Of course," said the boy, pretending that he had understood all the
time. "It's Alfred the Great. He," turning loftily to the younger
children, who couldn't be expected to know so much, "was the first
really important king of England. He was a great fighter, and finally
conquered all his enemies. But once he had to run away, after a battle,
and hide in a peasant's hut in disguise. The woman there didn't know who
he was, and she went away and left him to watch some cakes that were on
the fire baking. He was so busy thinking about how to get his kingdom
back that he let them burn, and when she came back she scolded him."

"Those queer round things that the other man is carrying on that
wooden tray must be the cakes," exclaimed Betty.

"Yes," said their aunt. "And do you see the musician with the harp? That
is to remind us that King Alfred was fond of music, and did all he could
to help it flourish. He was more than just a fighter; he wanted his
people to learn all they could, so he started schools, and he founded
Oxford College, the oldest college in England. Don't you see the book in
his hand to show that he was fond of reading? It was very unusual in
those days, a thousand years ago, for even a king so much as to know how
to read. But right after him in the procession is another warrior king
who loved learning and music and all the arts of peace."

And sure enough, as King Alfred of England passed out of sight, there
followed another kingly figure, very tall and clad all in iron.
Helmet, shield, gloves, boots--all were iron, and the wearer was
terrible to look at, so strong and merciless he seemed. Behind him
came a group of horsemen carrying iron spears with glittering points
and with gay banners fluttering from their shafts.

"Well," said Betty, "he may have loved peace, but he doesn't look it.
Who is he, anyway?"

"He represents the first great king of France, Charlemagne, a name
that means Charles the Great. He lived at about the same time with
Alfred. He was a great conqueror and overcame all his neighbors. He
even led a huge army across the Alps and conquered the northern part
of Italy. There he had himself crowned with a famous Iron Crown that
was worn by the king of that country. But when he was not fighting he
was building beautiful palaces and chapels, and encouraging all the
learned men of the country."

"There seem to be a lot of soldiers in this parade," said
nine-year-old Francis, "Here comes another. Who's he?"

"He must be a Crusader," said Betty, "for he has a red cross on his
white cloak, and armor underneath it."

"He's a king, too," said little Dick. "He's got a crown on. What's a
Crusader, Auntie? And is he one?"

"The Crusaders lived about three hundred years later than Alfred and
Charlemagne. In that time the Turks--yes, the same kind of Turks whom
you have heard about as persecuting the poor little Armenian
children--had come into possession of the Holy Land in Palestine. All
the Christian countries wanted to drive them out, so that heathen
might not be in possession of Jerusalem and the Holy Sepulcher. So
from France and Italy and Germany and England great armies went out
to fight against the Saracens, as the Turks in Palestine were then
called. And they wore red crosses on their cloaks to show that they
were going on a holy war."

"Did they get the land back?" asked Francis.

"Why, no, silly," cried Alfred. "Don't you remember just last year
General Allenby conquered Jerusalem, in the big war? The Turks had
been there all that time. But wasn't that Crusader," nodding toward
the rider disappearing in the distance, "somebody special?"

"Yes, indeed. You aren't the only boy here that has a king's name.
This was a king with the same name as Dick--Richard of England, whom
his people loved to call the Lion Hearted, because he was so brave. I
could tell by the banner with the lion on it that floated above his
head. There are lots of fine stories about King Richard. One tells how
he was captured by an enemy on the way home from one of the Crusades
and kept shut up in a tower for a year; and how he was found and
rescued by a friend of his who was a sweet singer, and who went about
singing a little song that the king loved, until at last he heard the
king's voice sing in answer to him from the tower window. Then there's
a story of how he came back to England in disguise, and kept his
wicked brother John from stealing his throne. Some day you must read
Sir Walter Scott's famous novel, 'Ivanhoe,' which tells all about the
adventures of Richard in disguise."

A convenient gap in the procession had given Aunt Eleanor time to tell
the children this much about King Richard; but now another group, a very
soberly dressed company, too, claimed their attention. The central
figure was not a king in armor this time, but a grave, determined
looking man clad in black velvet, with a deep lace collar and a wide
black hat and feather. The children at once demanded his name.

"I must look at my program to find out who he is," said their aunt.
"Oh, yes; William of Orange. Both he and his little country, Holland,
have a wonderful story. Five hundred years ago the lands that are now
Belgium and Holland belonged to Spain. As time went on the Spanish
king, Philip, oppressed them more and more cruelly, and wouldn't let
them have any freedom at all, either in politics or religion. But they
were a liberty-loving people, and toward the end of the sixteenth
century they rose in rebellion against Spain. This stern-looking
Hollander was their greatest leader. He was called William the Silent,
because of an event early in his career. One day the French king, who
was in league with Spain, and who thought Prince William was in
sympathy with their side, betrayed to him all the details of a secret
plot. William was filled with horror and very angry, but he kept
perfectly still, and didn't even show by the movement of an eyelash
that he was anything but friendly and interested. He was called
'silent', you see, not because he didn't talk much, but because he
could keep a secret."

"And was that when Holland and Belgium got to be independent
countries? And why aren't they all one country, then?"

"Oh, the part that is Holland won its independence then, though poor
William was murdered before the fight was finished. It was one of the
earliest of European republics. But the part that is Belgium came to
terms with Spain after William's death, and wasn't a separate country
till long after. You see, the Holland part was made up of people of the
Protestant religion, while the Belgian part, like Spain, was Catholic."

"I suppose that's why he's in this procession, because when he lived
he really belonged to Belgium as well as to Holland," said Alfred
thoughtfully.

"Oh!" cried Betty, clapping her hands, "I know who that next lot are!
The lady in the ruff, with the little jeweled band in her hair, must
be Queen Elizabeth, and those are her courtiers. Now every one of us
has a namesake in the pageant, except Francis."

"If I'm not mistaken," said her aunt, "Francis has a namesake in this
very group. Yes, surely--do you see the man with the pointed beard and
the model of a ship in his hand? That is Sir Francis Drake, the great
seaman. Over and over his little ship went in chase of the Spaniards,
who were England's greatest enemies at this time. Elizabeth ruled at
the same time when the Dutch, too, were fighting Spain. There was
nothing too daring or dangerous for Drake to attempt. He was the first
Englishman to sail around the world, a voyage which took more than two
years. Once he sailed right into a Spanish harbor and burned all the
Spanish ships there, which were being made ready for an attack on
England. And he and his friends, bold adventurers like himself, laid
the foundation of the power of England on the sea."

"I suppose the man with the red velvet cloak is Raleigh, and that's
the cloak he spread down for Elizabeth to walk on."

"Yes. And do you see that kind, merry-looking man in black, with the
simple white collar, carrying an actor's mask in his hand? That must
be Shakespeare, the greatest writer of plays that ever lived. And I
believe the man beside him, holding a great roll of manuscript and a
quill pen, is Spenser, the poet who wrote a wonderful book called the
'Faerie Queen' in honor of Queen Elizabeth."

"We've had somebody from France and Belgium and England," said Betty.
"I wonder if there won't be an American pretty soon?"

"There couldn't have been an American yet, stupid," Alfred informed
her, "because there weren't any people in our part of America in Queen
Elizabeth's time."

"Oh, so there weren't. There comes a soldier with an Indian chief and
an Indian girl close behind him--he must be American, or the Indians
wouldn't be there."

"Guess he's John Smith," spoke up Francis, "'cause I know he had his
life saved by Pocahontas--that's the Indian girl. But I don't know
what else he did."

"Oh, he was the leader of the first colony to be settled by the English
in this country. What colony was it, Alfred? You can tell, surely."

"Of course, Jamestown, in Virginia. That was why the Indians got mad
at him, because the white men were taking their lands away."

A burst of specially enthusiastic cheering arose from the street. The
reason for it was the approach of a kindly-faced gentleman in dark
gray coat and knee-breeches, with silver shoe-buckles and
broad-brimmed Quaker hat. It was William Penn, of course, looking for
all the world like the statue on the high City Hall tower. There was
no need for Aunt Eleanor to give any information about him, for these
were Philadelphia children, who knew and loved the founder of the
"green country town" that had grown to be so large a city. Nor was
there any need to explain about the next figure to arrive, a stately
general on horseback, in white wig, cocked hat, and Revolutionary
uniform of blue and buff. Behind him, in an old-fashioned carriage,
rode Betsy Ross, holding the newly adopted Stars and Stripes, at which
the men in the crowd doffed their hats.

But the next figure puzzled our little group of children. It was a
very short man, stockily built, yet full of dignity. He, too, wore a
cocked hat, and a plain uniform. He walked with head bent forward and
hands clasped behind him, and his piercing black eyes looked at the
ground. The children could not guess who he was, so Aunt Eleanor had
to tell them.

"That is the great French conquerer Napoleon Bonaparte. He began life as
an ordinary citizen, and won his way to the very top by his wonderful
military genius. He won so many battles in command of the French armies,
after the French Revolution at the end of the eighteenth century, that
the people chose him to be consul, a position something like that of the
president of a republic. Then he loved power so that he got control of
the government and had himself made emperor, so that France wasn't a
republic any more. After that he set out to conquer all of Europe, and
he nearly succeeded. But one winter he went to Russia, and the cold and
snow almost entirely destroyed his army; and he never could succeed in
beating England. It was the great English general, the Duke of
Wellington, who finally crushed Napoleon at the battle of
Waterloo--you've heard of that? Well, after that the fallen Emperor was
sent away to a little island, St. Helena, that belonged to England, and
there he was kept a prisoner till the end of his life."

"He was something like the German Kaiser in the World's War, wasn't
he?" said Alfred. "He wanted to conquer all Europe--and the United
States, too."

"Yes, you'll learn that every once in so often history repeats itself.
But we'll hope that the Kaiser's effort to conquer the world will be
the last of such things, and that such a war may never be repeated."

"Oh, who is that rough looking man in the red flannel shirt?" cried
Betty.

"That very red shirt tells me who he is," said her aunt. "Have you
been wondering when we were going to have one of the heroes of Italy?
Well, this is an Italian patriot named Garibaldi. About sixty years
ago, when Italy was struggling to get free from Austria, and to be an
independent nation, Garibaldi gathered together as many brave soldiers
as he could, in the southern part of the country, and they marched to
the help of their countrymen in a time of very great need. As a part
of their uniform they wore red shirts. But one of the most interesting
things about Garibaldi is that when his country wanted to give him a
high position, he said he would rather go back to the farm he had
bought for himself, and live his life out as a plain, ordinary man."

Little Dick had been keeping very still and listening, for all the
people in the parade had been those that he never had heard of before.
But suddenly he jumped to his feet in excitement. He, like every other
child in the crowd, knew who was that tall, awkward, homely person in
the long black frock coat and the high silk hat. There could be no
mistaking that kind, sad face, with the patient, farseeing eyes.
Behind the great president rode two soldierly figures--General Grant
in his blue uniform, and General Lee in the gray, on his beloved white
horse, Traveller. Nor could there be any mistaking of the energetic
figure in hunting dress that followed him, whose face wore a smile
that could not be spoiled by the heavy eyeglasses that were so
familiar a part of a well-known countenance.

"Teddy," cheered the crowd, with the enthusiasm that always is stirred
by true, generous manliness.

The afternoon was growing late. One group remained, with which the
procession was to close. On horseback rode a tall, soldierly figure,
dressed in khaki, with an officer's hat bearing royal insignia, and with
his breast covered with medals. A pair of keen blue eyes smiled out of a
clear-cut, earnest face. Behind him, in an automobile, rode a thin, worn
old man in the scarlet robe and close scarlet cap of a cardinal.

"I need not tell you who they are," said Aunt Eleanor. "They stand to
us for the little country that in 1914 saved the world by sacrificing
herself. King Albert of Belgium led his own armies into battle; his
queen, Elizabeth, nursed the wounded in the hospitals; and Cardinal
Mercier stayed with his people to cheer and comfort them."

"I think they are the greatest heroes of all," said Betty softly.

"Any man is a hero, dear," said her aunt, "who spends his life for the
help and safety of his people, not thinking what it costs himself."

                                           --_Mabel Dodge Holmes._


QUESTIONS

    1. Make a list of the heroes whom you can remember in the
    procession.

    2. Was there any one of them whom you did not know about before?

    3. Which one would you like to read more about?

    4. Do you know any facts about any of these heroes that are not
    told in this story? If so, write a title for the story you can
    tell, and be ready to tell it to your classmates.

    5. Do you know the name of any hero whom you would have added to
    those in the procession?

    6. Some of the figures are not mentioned by name. Give the names
    of any of these you remember.




THE SKELETON IN ARMOR


    In the poem that follows, the poet tells us of a strange and fearful
    visitor that once came to him--the spirit of some ancient viking of
    the Northland all dressed in armor and carrying sword and shield.

    In order to understand the poem, you must remember that the vikings
    were bold sea-rovers and fierce warriors who set out in their long
    swift boats in search after plunder and adventure. Some of them are
    even said to have come over to America long before Columbus ever
    dreamed of the new world. The poem was suggested to Mr. Longfellow
    by the finding of a skeleton clad in broken and rusted armor and
    buried in the sands of the New England shore, and by a very ancient
    tower that must have been built on the coast by the Northmen many
    years before 1492. These two facts are true, but of course the story
    that the poet made of them is merely a good story.

    The poet's strange guest is one of these sea-robbers, who tells how
    as a youth he had won the love of a blue-eyed princess of the far
    North, only to find that her father forbade their marriage. In the
    first stanza the poet asks a question; the rest of the poem tells
    what the spirit of the viking said.

    But you will want to read the story as the poet has told it.

      "Speak! speak! thou fearful guest!
       Who, with they hollow breast
       Still in rude armor drest,
       Comest to daunt me!
       Wrapt not in Eastern balms,
       But with thy fleshless palms
       Stretched, as if asking alms,
       Why dost thou haunt me?"

      "Then, from those cavernous eyes
       Pale flashes seemed to rise,
       As when the Northern skies
       Gleam in December;
       And, like the water's flow
       Under December's snow,
       Came a dull voice of woe
       From the heart's chamber.

      "I was a Viking old!
       My deeds, though manifold,
       No Skald in song has told,
       No Saga taught thee!
       Take heed, that in thy verse
       Thou dost the tale rehearse,
       Else dread a dead man's curse;
       For this I sought thee.

      "Far in the Northern Land,
       By the wild Baltic's strand,
       I, with my childish hand,
       Tamed the gerfalcon;
       And, with my skates fast-bound,
       Skimmed the half-frozen Sound,
       That the poor whimpering hound
       Trembled to walk on.

      "Oft to his frozen lair
       Tracked I the grisly bear,
       While from my path the hare
       Fled like a shadow;
       Oft through the forest dark
       Followed the were-wolf's bark,
       Until the soaring lark
       Sang from the meadow.

      "But when I older grew,
       Joining a corsair's crew,
       O'er the dark sea I flew
       With the marauders.
       Wild was the life we led;
       Many the souls that sped,
       Many the hearts that bled,
       By our stern orders.

      "Once as I told in glee
       Tales of the stormy sea,
       Soft eyes did gaze on me,
       Burning yet tender;
       And as the white stars shine
       On the dark Norway pine,
       On that dark heart of mine
       Fell their soft splendor.

      "I wooed the blue-eyed maid,
       Yielding, yet half afraid,
       And in the forest's shade
       Our vows were plighted.
       Under its loosened vest
       Fluttered her little breast,
       Like birds within their nest
       By the hawk frighted.

      "Bright in her father's hall
       Shields gleamed upon the wall,
       Loud sang the minstrels all,
       Chanting his glory;
       When of old Hildebrand
       I asked his daughter's hand,
       Mute did the minstrels stand
       To hear my story.

      "While the brown ale he quaffed,
       Loud then the champion laughed
       And as the wing-gusts waft
       The sea-foam brightly,
       So the loud laugh of scorn,
       Out of those lips unshorn,
       From the deep drinking-horn
       Blew the foam lightly.

      "She was a Prince's child,
       I but a Viking wild,
       And though she blushed and smiled,
       I was discarded!
       Should not the dove so white
       Follow the sea-mew's flight,
       Why did they leave that night
       Her nest unguarded?

      "Scarce had I put to sea,
       Bearing the maid with me,
       Fairest of all was she
       Among the Norsemen!
       When on the white sea-strand,
       Waving his armed hand,
       Saw we old Hildebrand,
       With twenty horsemen.

    [Illustration: "I WOOED THE BLUE-EYED MAID"]

      "Then launched they to the blast,
       Bent like a reed each mast,
       Yet we were gaining fast,
       When the wind failed us;
       And with a sudden flaw
       Came round the gusty Skaw,
       So that our foe we saw
       Laugh as he hailed us.

      "And as to catch the gale
       Round veered the flapping sail,
       Death! was the helmsman's hail,
       Death without quarter!
       Mid-ships with iron keel
       Struck we her ribs of steel;
       Down her black hulk did reel
       Through the black water!

      "As with his wings aslant,
       Sails the fierce cormorant,
       Seeking some rocky haunt,
       With his prey laden,
       So toward the open main,
       Beating the sea again,
       Through the wild hurricane,
       Bore I the maiden.

      "Three weeks we westward bore,
       And when the storm was o'er,
       Cloud-like we saw the shore
       Stretching to leeward;
       There for my lady's bower
       Built I the lofty tower,
       Which, to this very hour,
       Stands looking seaward.

      "There lived we many years;
       Time dried the maiden's tears;
       She had forgot her fears,
       She was a mother;
       Death closed her mild blue eyes,
       Under that tower she lies;
       Ne'er shall the sun arise
       On such another!

      "Still grew my bosom then,
       Still as a stagnant fen!
       Hateful to me were men,
       The sunlight hateful!
       In the vast forest here,
       Clad in my warlike gear,
       Fell I upon my spear,
       O, death was grateful!

      "Thus, seamed with many scars,
       Bursting these prison bars,
       Up to its native stars
       My soul ascended!
       There from the flowing bowl
       Deep drinks the warrior's soul,
       Skoal! to the Northland! skoal!"
       Thus the tale ended.

                 --_Henry Wadsworth Longfellow.
               Courtesy of Houghton, Mifflin Company._




ACTING FOR THE MOVIES


    Here is another set of "movie" scenes. If you forget how we played
    the first set, look on page 38 and see just what to do.

1. The blind man came slowly down the road, tapping restlessly with his
stick to guide him, and stopping every now and again to listen for some
fellow traveler who might lead him to the town beyond the hill.

2. When they reached the open country, Aladdin had to gather sticks and
to build a great fire for the magician, his uncle.

3. Aladdin's uncle stirred the fire until it blazed brightly. Then he
threw in some magical powder and as a thick cloud of smoke arose, he
made mystical signs over the fire, and muttered some strange words that
Aladdin could not understand.

4. The Indian squatted down with legs crossed under him and waited for
the morning sun to enable him to take up the trail again. Whenever the
fire died away, he arose silently and replenished the fuel, but except
for these breaks, one might have thought him a beautifully carved image.

5. None of the villagers knew Rip when he came back. He was old and
stiff and bent with age. He carried on his shoulder his cherished
musket, now useless and covered with rust. As the people crowded round
him he scanned each face in turn, hoping to recognize some former
familiar acquaintance.

6. Sir Roger drew his sword, and taking advantage of a corner in the
garden wall, which might make a cowardly attack in the rear impossible,
he waited for the band to approach. He knew that he was caught like a
fox in this narrow garden, and he looked eagerly to count how many were
against him.

7. Hardly had the Sheriff ridden off with his men, before Robin Hood
came down the road, still dressed in the long gown that old Mother
Hobbes had given him, and walking with the help of a cane, like an old
woman, bent with years.

8. The savage raised his spear, and was about to cast it, but some
slight sound caused him to hesitate an instant with the long shaft
balancing lightly in his grasp.

9. An aged palmer came down the road. He was evidently returning from a
long pilgrimage, for his cloak was old and tattered, his shoes were
dusty and patched, and every few steps he stopped to rest on his long
staff.

10. The tinker, very tired from his run, sat down on a large stone by
the roadside. After looking cautiously about, he took the king's letter
from his pocket and read it. Then folding it carefully again, and
returning it to his pocket, he rose and started down the road singing
cheerily.

11. He had tramped for three hours and had not discovered a single
familiar sign. There was no sign in the cloudy sky to serve him as
finger post. He climbed a tall tree that seemed to promise a view of the
surrounding landscape, but everything was strange. He had read somewhere
that the trees are mossy and green on the north side, but when he
looked, even the trees seemed to be as uncertain as he. In despair he
sat down on a fallen log and waited.

12. White Eagle looked far out over the plain. Beyond the now dry river
basin and the green strip of brush and scrubby trees that bordered it,
he could trace the slow, crawling wagon-train trailing out and winding
like a lazy serpent through the dust. When he had counted for a second
time to be sure, he drew back from the edge of the bluff, built two tiny
fires, and watched the thin columns of smoke as they curled straight up
in the air.




THE SAFEST PLACE


    Here is a story of real human interest. We are all foreigners here
    in America except the American Indians. The ancestors of some of us
    came before those of others; and it is the duty of those of us whose
    ancestors have been here the longest to help the strange-looking,
    strange-speaking people who come to us from Europe to feel at home
    in our country.

    The government has tried hard to protect the immigrants from
    dishonest people who have tried to cheat them out of their earnings.
    One of the good things that came out of the World's War was a
    knowledge on the part of almost all of our people of the safe
    investments that the government offers in bonds and thrift stamps.

"At last the way is clear!"

Stefan spoke with much emotion as he counted the roll of notes, clean
and soiled, that lay before him on the table in his little room in the
over-crowded boarding house.

As he fingered the bills, he saw before him each detail of the past two
years--New York harbor with Liberty flinging up her welcome torch; the
thrill of arrival in the city of his dreams; the days that followed,
days of discouragement, home-sickness, and poverty, among strangers
speaking strange tongues, with a medley of unfamiliar manners and
customs. He saw with vivid clearness the first dollar he had earned, and
he forgot the slow, painful processes of saving--the self-denial and the
sacrifice--in the picture of what those sacrifices were to bring.

"She will come," he murmured. "On the same boat perhaps. When she gets
the ticket, she will leave that war-threatened land and she will come
to me." He smiled. Then as his face suddenly clouded he started
forward on the rickety chair with a violence that threatened its
frailness. "If anything should happen! If I should lose the money!"

Greatly disturbed he gathered up the precious bills as though to
shield them from possible loss. He rose to place them in the old
hiding place in his trunk, but that no longer satisfied him. He
wavered, then said:

"No, that won't do. I must see Ian about this. He knows. He is wise. I
will see Ian this very minute."

Wrapping the money in a piece of old newspaper and carefully placing
it in an inner pocket, he set out. He went straight to the dingy
office in a side alley of the foreign section of the town, where
through the dusty window could be seen the grizzled head of Ian
Skeemersky, the real estate agent and private banker, whose sign,
written by his own hand, hung over the entrance.

After greetings had been exchanged, he anxiously put the case before
his shrewd friend, whose eyes sparkled with eagerness as he replied
smoothly.

"Nothing so easy and so safe in the world, my dear fellow. Put your
money in my bank. You will get good interest and can withdraw it
whenever you want it."

Stefan hesitated for a second. So much was at stake! His slow mind
must have time to weigh the proposal. As he noted the earnestness and
assurance of Skeemersky's face, belief in this shrewd friend decided.
He drew out the pack and laid it on the desk before Skeemersky, whose
long fingers closed over it at once.

"You have done well, Stefan Broda, your money is as safe with me as if
it was in Mt. Vavel," he declared.

Stefan felt that he had done well. The phrase "as safe as Mt. Vavel"
lingered in his mind. It helped him be patient in the long weeks in
the factory where he worked during the winter; it consoled him during
the dull days while he waited for the open springtime when he planned
to send for Agatha. When he heard of others losing their small savings
in various ways he congratulated himself on the security of his own,
"as safe as Vavel," he would repeat.

One sunny morning in March, just as he decided to stop on his way from
work to withdraw the three hundred dollars for Agatha's expenses,
there came to him a neighbor, in great excitement. Peter's face was
red, his eyes startling and his voice hoarse.

"That--that robber, that scoundrel!" he stuttered. "That Skeemersky.
He has gone, gone, do you hear? He has taken it all, all the money in
his cursed bank."

Stefan could not believe his ears. Skeemersky gone, and the money,
too! "As safe as Vavel!" he had said. He stared for a moment and then
broke out, weeping for the first time since his mother's death,
cursing the smooth trickster with hearty Polish curses.

"May the thunder-bolt strike him!" he cried. "I will lay hands on him.
I will choke that money out of his black soul. Come, we will go!"

They rushed out, boiling with rage, only to find a crowd of other
dupes before the shabby little office in the side-alley. The tightly
closed door and the blank windows told the story more clearly than any
words. Skeemersky had gone--the bank was no more!

Despair took strong hold of Stefan. For two days he roamed the
streets, not eating nor drinking, sleepless. He saw no further, no
hope--all was blackness and desolation. When he came back to the
boarding house on the third day he found a letter from Agatha. He read
it with tears and intolerable anguish and he passionately kissed the
final sentence: "Every bit of me is yours and I shall never change."
This tender faith was balm to his anguish.

He put the letter in a pocket nearest his heart, while a new look came
to his tired face. Almost unconsciously he began to build a new future
on the ruins of the old.

He swiftly mapped out his course. The season for farmwork was at hand.
He would go back to the open skies and broad fields of God's world. He
packed a few belongings in the rusty brown-paper suitcase and boarded
the trolley for the long ride. He knew what he should do if he could
rent a suitable piece of land.

He had spent the previous summer on a farm in the onion-growing
section of the Connecticut Valley; he knew what large profits might be
gotten with hard labor from a comparatively small plot of ground. He
figured that three or four acres would give him the needed amount in
the fall, if he had health and good weather.

He found the man whom he sought, secured the land, and went to work.
All that season he slaved early and late, weeding on his knees in the
damp earth the interminable rows of tiny, delicate plants where the
weeds sprang like magic. He heeded neither scorching sun, nor soaking
rain. He cared nothing for the monotony of the toil. Always he saw
before him the steamer that should bring Agatha, from the hazards of
war, to him and security.

By September he had once again the dream within his grasp. He was back
in the old room in the crowded boarding house, and in his bluish tin
trunk at the foot of the bed were hidden five hundred and fifteen
dollars in crisp, clean notes. His earliest belief in his trunk had come
back a hundredfold. He would not trust any bank, private or national,
with the fruit of his heart-breaking toil. Banking systems and
government investments were all beyond his grasp. Skeemersky had taught
him to distrust others--the little thin trunk would not run away.

This conviction of safety obsessed him. He preached it to others, to
his fellow-boarders, especially to the friendly young man in the room
across the hall. "See," he would say, waving a hand toward the great
untrustworthy world of finance beyond his little window. "They run
away--those bankers. I have a better place."

He did not tell the friendly young man where or how much he had hidden.
He merely smiled mysteriously. His faith in his trunk was absolute. Day
after day, when returning from work in the factory, he took out his roll
of notes and rejoiced that he had found the solution; he counted the
days when he should send for his love. It was hard for him to wait for
the lagging spring, but a winter journey in war-time from Russian Poland
to New England was not to be thought of for his Agatha.

Blind faith often leads to the pit. Stefan, upon a night in late
winter, found his theory shattered. The friendly young man had gone,
and the crisp, clean notes had disappeared with him!

In this second crash of his hopes he was numbed. He neither wept nor
cursed. He silently shrank into himself. He grew abstracted. He stared
at the world with unseeing eyes. In the turmoil of his distracted mind
there was but one growing determination not to be beaten by fate.

It was not, however, until the news of the German campaign in Warsaw,
that his resolve took definite shape. Borrowing two hundred dollars,
he sent the money to Agatha in Poland, and regardless of winter or
war, urged her to come at once.

When, after long weeks of suspense, he stood by the gate at Ellis Island
waiting for the sight of her dear, familiar face among the surging crowd
of tagged and numbered immigrants beyond the iron barrier, a great wave
of joyous hope flooded his heart. All his disasters were forgotten when
he caught the glint of her pale hair under the embroidered kerchief.
Banks and trunks went to oblivion as he took her small roughened hands
in his own. Destiny had no terrors for him.

On the train he poured out his heart to her. He told her of his great
efforts and his greater misfortunes. He made her see his challenge to
destiny. He pictured his emotions in the last weeks. And he wound up
with an eager entreaty for immediate marriage.

"Let us no longer delay," he urged. "Let us find the good priest." But
Agatha was not to be hurried. Her blue eyes showed her own sorrow for
the words her lips spoke. "Our love, my Stefan, will not change. But
your money is gone. We cannot live without money. I shall work, and
you shall work. Then we will marry."

Stefan protested vigorously, but he knew that she was right. He saw
that he must yield. He proposed a compromise. "Let us work then for
this spring and summer--you in the silk mill and I in my onion patch,"
he said, "and marry in the fall. I can wait no longer than that."

Agatha could find no fault with this. It won her approval of both
heart and her reason. Slipping her hand in his, she nestled closer and
they began their hopeful planning, while the train sped on, bearing
them to the peaceful valley of their future labors.

All the plans--sensible and practical--they made that wonderful first
day, were marvelously realized, not by mere happy chance, but through
a great steadfastness of purpose and unfaltering toil. By thrift and
frugality, by self-denial and sacrifice, they accomplished the
miracle. And they were happy in the doing of it, because they worked
together. Neither Stefan nor Agatha had ever labored so willingly.
The radiance of a united future lighted the way--always just ahead
they saw the hearth-fire gleaming.

The spring and summer passed swiftly. Stefan and Agatha learned of
America's entry into the world war with anxious hearts. They dreaded the
quenching of that hearth-fire. But their fears were groundless. Instead
of depreciation and loss the war brought added prosperity. The wages in
the silk mill were raised. Stefan's onion sets sold at double prices. At
the end of the season they found that they had exceeded their hopes, in
spite of paying off the debt and the increased cost of living.

At last, as Stefan had said, the way was clear. The crown of their
hopes, the wedding day, was set and their friends invited. A stone house
with a little ground had been secured. The furniture was installed.
Everything was ready for the marriage feast on the next day.

As they left the cozy little house in the long shadows of the
September sunset, Stefan turned at the gate to look back. His dream
was realized. Destiny had not taken up his challenge so far, and he
determined to make the future sure. Unconsciously his hand stole to
the inner pocket where a modest roll of notes--the remains of their
combined savings lay warm and safe. In all their anxious discussions,
he and Agatha had not been able to find a place safe enough to satisfy
their fears. Bankers and trunks had betrayed their trust. Stefan
sighed. He had hoped to have this matter off his mind before the happy
morrow. He wished Agatha would offer some solution and he turned to
her with the old question on his lips. But he did not ask it. Another
voice took up the story.

It was old Shelton, the farmer for whom Stefan had worked the first
summer in the valley. His small eyes were twinkling and his long chin
beard wagged importantly. "Hello, Steve, how'r ye? Settin' up in fine
style, I see. Must be gittin' rich these days."

Stefan thought at first that the shrewd old fellow's chuckle of
delight was a tribute to his and Agatha's achievement. But he was soon
enlightened as to its real source. Old Shelton bestowed hearty praise
on the little house and neat garden, he congratulated him in advance
for the morrow, but his small eyes fairly snapped as he added, tapping
his own pocket.

"Ye'v spent a pile of money on all this there, and I s'pose you ain't
got much left--I got somepin here that 'ud interest ye."

It was the answer to Stefan's unuttered question. He started as old
Shelton pulled out from his pocket two yellowish, stiff folders with
much black lettering upon them, which, when opened by Shelton's
toil-worn fingers, disclosed a number of large square stamps pasted on
the printed squares. Agatha, woman-like, was quick to inquire. Old
Shelton explained with zest.

He showed them first the Thrift card with its green twenty-five cent
stamps. "I got them at odd times, at the post office," he told them
with his exultant chuckle. "These here," showing the Savings
Certificates with blue five-dollar stamps, "I bought right out when I
saw what a sure thing it was. Safe as Uncle Sam's Capitol at
Washington. Can't never bust up, these can't. No, siree! Long as this
here country holds out, these here stamps are worth the coin! And look
at the money ye make on 'em."

And he explained the process by which today's purchaser of a blue
stamp would be the possessor of a five-dollar note when the stamps
matured at the end of five years. "Only four-nineteen, ye see," he
pointed with a horny finger. "Only four-nineteen today, but five good
round dollars in five years. Ye can't beat that, I tell ye. Not to be
safe and sound, ye understand."

Stefan and Agatha looked at each other. They knew old Shelton to be
the shrewdest, most cautious man in the community. In a moment they
knew what they should do with the modest roll of bills. The safe place
had been found. The United States Treasury was the only spot.

"As safe as Vavel!" murmured Stefan as the old farmer after repeated
congratulations and chuckled approval of the young people's eager
acceptance of his gospel of thrift, disappeared down the long road.

"As safe as Vavel," he repeated, and a great surge of joyful relief
flooded his very soul.

He put his arm about Agatha and they turned their faces toward the
sunset glow. In the dim glory of the skies they saw the steadfast
gleam of their own dear hearth-fire.

"The good God has shown us the way," they said.

                                   --_Casimir A. Sienkiewicz.
                  Courtesy Federal Reserve Bank of Philadelphia._

    This story can be easily divided into a definite series of shorter
    stories. The titles of these shorter stories will serve as an
    outline. Look over the selection quickly, and write the outline.


QUESTIONS

    Even government bonds and thrift stamps have to be guarded so that
    they will not be lost, burned, or stolen.

    Where is the safest place to keep such valuable things as liberty
    bonds and thrift stamps? How much does it cost to rent a safe
    place for your savings? Where can you rent one in your town?




UNPATRIOTIC CARELESSNESS


Are you careless? That makes you stop and think a bit, doesn't it? If
you are honest with yourself, the answer probably will be "_Yes_," for
almost everybody in this country is careless. That is the principal
reason why we have so many fires.

Here are some figures that should open our eyes. In 1913, the year
before the outbreak of the war, the average fire-loss for each man,
woman and child in France was 49 cents; in England it was 33 cents; in
Germany, 28 cents; in Austria, 25 cents; in Italy, 25 cents; in
Switzerland, 15 cents; and in Holland, only 11 cents. In the United
States for the same year the direct loss was $2.10--and the indirect
loss was far higher. Our record was, therefore, more than four times
as bad as that of France, and nearly twenty times as bad as that of
Holland.

Vienna and Chicago are cities of about the same size. Vienna had fire
losses for the year 1913 of $303,200; Chicago's were $5,513,237, or
more than eighteen times as great. New York City's fire losses were
about four and one-half times as large as those of London. A similar
comparison might be made with many other cities. Can we be proud of
such figures?

Of course there are more wooden buildings in America than in Europe.
This is a condition which will take many years to change. But the most
serious cause of fires could be removed at once, if all the people
would assist; this cause is found in one word--_carelessness_.

It must be admitted that the United States, with all its advantages,
is a nation of careless people. Carelessness is not a thing to be
proud of; it is a great national sin. It shows itself in many habits
of recklessness, wastefulness, and untidiness. It burns our towns; it
leads people to risk their lives at railroad crossings and other
places of danger; it takes chances with health; it is shown in all
dirty streets, littered back yards, and untidy homes. It has been well
described by Roy K. Moulton, a writer in the "_News_" of Grand Rapids,
Michigan, as follows:


_WHO AM I?_

I am more powerful than the combined armies of the world.

I am more deadly than bullets, and I have wrecked more homes than the
mightiest of siege guns.

I steal in the United States alone over $300,000,000 each year.

I spare no one, and find my victims among the rich and poor alike, the
young and old, the strong and the weak; widows and orphans know me.

I massacre thousands upon thousands of wage-earners in a year.

I lurk in unseen places, and do most of my work silently. You are
warned against me, but you heed not.

I am relentless. I am everywhere; in the home, on the street, in the
factory, at railroad crossings, and on the sea.

I bring sickness, degradation and death, and yet few seek to avoid me.

I destroy, crush and maim; I give nothing, but take all.

I am your worst enemy.

I AM CARELESSNESS.

If a foreign army should land upon our shores, it could not wreak more
destruction than this. If such an army should come and any American
were found to be giving it aid, he would be called a traitor to his
country. Every patriot would rise against such a foe.

The spirit of carelessness in the United States is really a greater
enemy than any foreign invader, and it is found in millions of little
unconscious acts of carelessness. Whenever you, yourself, commit such
an act, therefore, you really range yourself as an enemy of your
country, but if you begin earnestly to watch your actions and to form
new habits of carefulness, you will be helping our great nation to
become safer, healthier, happier, and more useful to humanity. This is
the spirit of true patriotism.

If, then, you are determined to try with all your might to form these
new habits of carefulness, the first great step toward preventing fire
will have been taken.

                          --_National Board of Fire Underwriters._


QUESTIONS

    When you have finished reading, write the answers to these
    questions. If you can not answer immediately, find the answer
    somewhere in the story, but do not read it all again; read only
    enough to get the correct answer.

    1. What two reasons can you find to account for the greater loss
    by fire in the United States than in Europe?

    2. Which of these two reasons can be the more quickly removed?
    Which one can you help to remove?

    3. What other bad results besides fires come from our great
    national sin?

    4. Do you think it is fair to call a careless person unpatriotic?
    Why?




A MEMORY TEST


Can you memorize by one careful reading these five lines which tell of
the great result of a small piece of carelessness?

      For want of a nail the shoe was lost;
      For want of a shoe the horse was lost;
      For want of the horse the rider was lost;
      For want of the rider the battle was lost;
      For want of the battle a kingdom was lost.




CALIPH FOR ONE DAY


    This story, "Caliph for One Day," is a tale from "The Arabian
    Nights". If you have never read this story, you will find it very
    interesting. Of course you have heard of Ali Baba, and of Aladdin
    with his wonderful lamp, and of the Old Man of the Sea.

    Your teacher would like to know which of you have read any of the
    "Arabian Nights" tales and which of these tales you have read.

    You ought to try to read such stories as this rapidly. To some
    extent the rapidity with which you read is a habit. Every one
    forms his own habits; and if you will try hard you can form habits
    that will be useful to you as long as you live. One of these
    habits is that of reading rapidly.

The sun was just setting, and its last rays gilded the roofs and
towers of the City of Bagdad, on the river Tigris; and far away, also,
on the ripples of the river fell the evening light, and the numerous
boats and ships which moved about on the surface of the water seemed
to plough through melted gold. On the railing of a high bridge which
led over the Tigris leaned a young man, who now turned his face
towards the sparkling water, now towards the people passing over the
bridge. His attention, however, appeared to be given less to the
inhabitants of the city than to those who might be taken for strangers
through their appearance and behavior. The eyes of many a passer-by
were turned also upon him, and it seemed many times as if one or
another of them wished to approach him. But a stern, repelling glance
from the young man had the effect, each time of making them go on
their way after a slight hesitation, shaking the head.

Suddenly two men drew near. The first of them seemed, judging from his
clothing, to be a rich business man from the city of Mussal; the
second, who followed him at some distance, was apparently his servant.
When the man waiting upon the bridge saw them come up to him, he
straightened up and went to meet them. Greeting respectfully the man
who was apparently a merchant, he said: "Sir, if, as I assume, you are
a stranger in this city, I beg you to come home with me and sleep in
my house."

As the stranger seemed rather taken by surprise, he continued: "I am
called 'Queer Abu Hassan', and live in my own house. I have made it my
duty for some time to take a stranger home with me every evening as my
guest, and entertain him there as well as I can until the following
morning. You would do me a great honor if you would accept my
invitation."

The stranger was no one else than the Caliph Harun Alrashid, who was
thus caught on one of his favorite wanderings through the city
accompanied by one of his slaves.

After a few kindly words he agreed, called his servant to him, and both
joined Abu Hassan, who soon brought them to his house not far away. Here
he bade them lie down and make themselves at home. Soon a servant
appeared and brought their supper. It consisted of several well prepared
dishes, and seemed to please both strangers very well. All kinds of
fruit were placed upon the table for dessert, and after the meal was
finished they had a lively conversation, in which Abu Hassan's mother
took part when she came in to greet the guests. Although neither she nor
her son had any idea of the lofty position of their guest, they bustled
around him so pleasantly and kindly that Harun stretched himself out
comfortably on a divan and took his share in the talk with real
enjoyment. At last the Caliph requested Abu Hassan to tell him his
history. And so the host of the evening began as follows:

"I am the son of a very rich merchant, who died only too young, and I
had a good education as a boy. But if my father made any mistake at
that time, it was that he gave me very little money, and so prevented
my learning how to spend more wisely, which must really be learned in
order to be done properly. So, after his death, I devoted myself to
this occupation with a number of other young fellows, and enjoyed
myself at such a rate that I soon had got rid of a great part of my
property. Fortunately I saw soon enough the abyss into which my way of
living must lead me. For this reason I drew back, but first decided to
test my friends and see whether they were true or not. I told them
that I had gone through all my money, and asked them to help me. Not
one of them gave me a reassuring answer. Furthermore, they avoided me,
and acted on the street as if they had never known me. This
contemptible behavior hurt me so deeply, that I came near to hating
the whole human race. But after I had lived a long time in melancholy
loneliness, I pulled myself together again, and decided to go out
among people once more. I promised myself, however, never again to
invite a friend, but only strangers, and never to keep one longer than
one night in my house, and if I ever saw them again to act as if I had
never seen them. So this evening, just before I saw you, I turned away
from several persons who had been my guests before, and who were about
to speak to me."

The Caliph laughed, and said: "No one can blame you under such
circumstances, and because of your extraordinary experience."

After Abu Hassan's mother had retired the young man brought out a bottle
of his best wine, and presented a glass of it to the Caliph, after first
politely tasting it. The Caliph drank to him, and asked Abu if he could
not do him a favor in return for his kind hospitality. But Abu answered
with a smile: "You understand, sir, that I do not count upon
recognition, and to-morrow morning will not know you any more."

"That's so," laughed Harun; "but I had forgotten it. You can, however,
pay no further attention to me if you wish, and yet if it is
distasteful to you to ask a favor for yourself, request a helping hand
to be given to somebody else."

"Sir," cried Abu Hassan, "my friends were not of the quality that I
would want to do anything for them, nor will I harm them, either. So I
would not know what wish I could make. But wait!" he broke out
suddenly. "There is one wish which I have often thought of and will
tell you of, although you cannot fulfil it, and perhaps will find it
extremely ridiculous. But you will at least understand why people call
me 'Queer Abu Hassan'."

"Let's hear it," said the Caliph.

Abu Hassan sighed, and announced: "Just for one day I would like to be
Caliph."

"And what influences you to this wish?" asked Harun. "Would you carry
out some important law in the State? Or look out for yourself
immediately?"

"Neither one nor the other," answered Queer Abu Hassan. "I would just
like to have some scamps among my neighbors thoroughly beaten."

"And you would like to be caliph merely for this purpose?" laughed
Harun Alrashid.

"Certainly, sir," replied Abu Hassan, "because I cannot get a suitable
punishment measured out to them in any other way. Since they are
rascals, they would easily get away from the judge to whom I might
denounce them."

"Do you think so?" asked the Caliph.

"They would the more surely avoid punishment," said Abu Hassan,
"because their ringleader is a holy Imam of respected appearance, whom
the judge would never believe capable of any wrong action, and yet
they slander all the respectable people in this quarter of the city,
and try by using every means to gain an influence over the consciences
of the Faithful, while they themselves pay but scant attention to the
laws of the Koran."

"Well," said the Caliph, as he tried to calm Abu Hassan, who had
worked himself up to a rage, "perhaps your wish to see these
scoundrels properly punished will come true in some way, even if you
are not the Commander of the Faithful. Let us drink to the realization
of your wish."

The Caliph seized the bottle and filled the glasses full, at the same
time dropping a pinch of white powder into Abu Hassan's glass without
his noticing it.

Hardly had they drank it off before Abu Hassan nodded his head and
fell into a deep sleep. The Caliph immediately called his slave, and
ordered him to take the sleeping man on his shoulders and bear him to
the palace. Then he left Abu Hassan's house, pulling the door to, but
not shutting it.

Once arrived at his palace, Harun Alrashid ordered Abu Hassan to be
clothed in a splendid night robe and laid in the Caliph's own costly
bed. Then the officers, servants, slaves, and slave women received the
strictest orders to carry out Abu Hassan's commissions faithfully next
morning, and, above all, to treat him as if he were the Commander of
the Faithful.

You can imagine Abu Hassan's astonishment when he woke up next morning
in the splendid bed and looked around at the room so beautifully
decorated with gold and expensive wall hangings. At first he thought
he was dreaming. He kept opening and closing his eyes, trying to find
out for sure if he were asleep or awake. Still greater was his
amazement when he caught sight of a garment of woven gold near his
bed, and a caliph's cap on a silken cushion. But yet he could not
believe that these were all real things, and he had to convince
himself by feeling them that he was not in a world of dreams.

[Illustration: "PLEASE BITE MY FINGER"]

"Where am I, then?" he cried. "What has happened to me? Everything
looks as if I were in the Caliph's palace. Or have I become Caliph
myself over night?"

While scolding himself for his foolish thoughts, he was trying all the
time to go to sleep again. But suddenly the lofty double doors of his
chamber opened, and a troop of wonderfully beautiful women and black
slaves stepped in. One band of women began to sing and play charming
music on different instruments. The others threw themselves down
before him, and one of the black slaves stepped to the bedside and
said: "Commander of the Faithful, it is time for early prayers. May it
please you to get up?"

"Whether I'm Caliph or not, I will get up at least just to see how
this adventure turns out!"

Hardly did he show his intention of raising himself when the slaves
jumped in a hurry to help him, and to dress him in the golden morning
gown. At the same time all those present shouted: "Commander of the
Faithful, God give you a blessed day!"

Now, this was too much for poor Abu Hassan. He called one of the women
to him, and said: "Please bite my finger, so I can see if I am
dreaming or not."

The slave that he called knew that Harun Alrashid was watching
everything from the next room, and wished to amuse the real Commander
of the Faithful. So she bit Abu Hassan's finger sharply. The
quickness with which Abu Hassan pulled back his finger made the hidden
Caliph almost split his sides with laughing, and he congratulated
himself that he had found such an enjoyable diversion by carrying his
plan through. He said to himself: "Abu Hassan could hardly be more
curious than I am to know how the story will end."

But Abu Hassan was thinking: "I cannot understand this surprising
change, but it seems to me that the queer Hassan of yesterday has
become the real Caliph of today." So he let them put his clothes on
him without resistance, and with a certain dignified manner which the
Caliph noticed with great pleasure. Then they washed his head, face
and hands with deliciously scented water. Finally the Grand Vizier
announced, with many a bow of respect, that the great people of the
court and of the realm were assembled and expecting the appearance of
the Commander of the Faithful. So Abu Hassan drew himself up to his
full height, and, preceded by armed soldiers and a number of
chamberlains resplendent in gold, walked to the great throne room,
where he was led to the throne by the chamberlains.

The doors of the hall opened, and the Commanders-in-Chief of the Army,
the Governors of the Provinces and the nobles of the country marched
in in a wonderful parade and greeted Abu Hassan as Caliph. They
stepped forward to the throne, dropped on their knees, and touched the
carpet before him with their foreheads. Abu Hassan took all of this as
quietly as if he had been Caliph since youth. He listened to the Grand
Vizier's address, took part in the consultations over matters of
state, and decided difficult points with such a sound understanding of
human nature that the real Caliph, who stood disguised among the
officers, was greatly pleased. Suddenly Abu Hassan made a sign to the
Grand Vizier to interrupt his address.

"Where is the Chief of Police of our capital city?" he cried. "Let him
be brought here immediately."

When the man called for had appeared and announced himself, "at the
command of his mighty master," Abu said: "In the mosque of the new
quarter you will find an Imam and four other old men. I wish you to
arrest them and give each one hundred stripes with the bastinado. Then
let them be mounted backwards on camels and led through the city
accompanied by a herald, who shall call out these words: 'In this way
the Commander of the Faithful punishes those who meddle in matters that
do not concern them, and who know nothing better to do than bring
trouble and pain to their neighbors.' After this sentence is completed,
however, you are then to tell them that they must leave that quarter of
the city, and not set foot in it again under penalty of death."

While the magistrate hurried away to carry out Abu Hassan's command,
the Grand Vizier went on with his address. An hour later the Chief of
Police came back with the news that the Caliph's orders had been
conscientiously fulfilled, at which Abu Hassan felt the greatest
satisfaction, while Harun Alrashid thoroughly enjoyed seeing his
substitute arrive so quickly at the realization of his long cherished
wish.

After the business matters were finished, there took place another
stately reception of numerous foreign ambassadors, and finally the new
Caliph betook himself with his whole court to dinner. It consisted of
a selection of the most delicate food and wine, and lasted late into
the evening, with music and all kinds of dancing.

Abu Hassan had behaved in such a dignified manner for all this time
that now he showed every favor to the people in his neighborhood, and
even condescended to talk with the slaves. It was fairly late when one
of the most beautiful of the slave girls came up to Abu Hassan and
offered him a glass of the sweetest wine prepared especially for the
Caliph. Abu Hassan was charmed, and had not any suspicion that the
delicious mixture contained a potent sleeping powder. He drank it off,
and in a few minutes fell into a sound sleep.

As quickly as he was brought away the day before, just so speedily now
was he transported into his own dwelling. Next morning the Caliph for
One Day woke up again as Abu Hassan, and found himself in his old
circumstances. In spite of all his calls and shouts, neither the
slaves nor the court officers of yesterday hurried to him to ask his
wishes. He was sadly perplexed at first at this new change, but he
soon got over it, and consoled himself with thinking that at least he
had had a beautiful dream. When his mother told him that he had in
fact disappeared for a whole day, and when he also learned that the
Imam and his fellows had been punished exactly as he had ordered when
Caliph, he did not know what to think of the whole adventure at all.

Finally, he leaned to his mother's view, who explained it by saying
that some spirit had taken him away and had executed the Imam's
punishment. He was thankful indeed to be rid of his rascally
neighbors, but he could never give himself an explanation of what had
moved the spirit to help him. In the end, however, he put the whole
story out of his mind, and became again what he had been before--Queer
Abu Hassan, or the Caliph for One Day.

                                                --_Arabian Nights._




THE FIRST POTTER


Ang was a mighty hunter and also a priest of Odin, but Oma was a
famous housewife or cave-wife, and not only Suta, the wife of Wang,
came to take lessons of her, but many other women who had heard of her
wonderful skill in cooking old food in new ways and discovering new
foods which the magic of the fire made palatable. She had learned not
merely how to cook the meat which Ang brought, but to dry it so that
it would keep for a long time. She discovered how to make a coarse
flour from nuts and acorns and to bake cakes on flat stones. At the
fire feast the cooking of Oma made as great an impression as the
wisdom and strength of Ang.

But her greatest discovery was the art of making pottery dishes out of
clay and baking them before the fire. For a long time women had made
baskets of reeds and willow twigs in which they could carry dry foods,
but the problem was to get something in which they could carry
liquids. Sometimes they used skin bottles, but they soon leaked and
the water rotted them out. Then some clever woman smeared the inside
of a closely woven basket with resinous pitch. Another lined her
baskets with clay and baked them in the sun, but water would soon
soften the clay. Then came Oma and the fire and the art of baking
clay. This is the way it happened. Oma had been lining some baskets
with clay, and little Om tried to imitate her. Since it was cold he
sat as near to the fire as he could, and after he had finished one, he
would put it on a stone near the fire until he had a row of them. Then
the wind changed suddenly and blew the fire towards him, and he had to
move quickly, leaving his clay baskets on the rock. He called to his
mother to get them, but she had no notion of getting burned for so
small a cause and she was too busy to bother, as mothers often are.

That night after Om had gone to sleep she sat by the fire with Ang,
and her eyes spied the little row of clay baskets. She picked one up
to show the father what a clever boy his son was getting to be. As she
touched the clay, she found it dry and hard as no clay she had ever
touched before. Some of the baskets were dry and crumbly, but two or
three in the center were hard as stone. A thought came to her. She ran
to the brook and filled the hardest with water and brought them back
to the fire. They did not soften or leak. Then she put them on a flat
stone and pushed them almost into the fire. Soon the water in them
began to bubble and steam.

"Look!" cried Oma. "At the touch of the Red One a little Cloud Spirit
goes up to the great Cloud Spirits that fly in the blue above us."

Then Ang knew that Odin had given a new gift. "This time the Red One
has spoken to you; what has he said?"

Oma carefully drew the little clay pots from the fire, and after they
had cooled she examined them. Two of them were cracked, but one was
firm and solid as if it had been cut from stone. She held it up before
Ang in triumph. "This is what we have been waiting for since the
beginning of time. The Red One has worked magic on the clay, and its
old enemy, the water, cannot eat through it."

The next day Oma made baskets lined with clay, and then, putting them
on flat stones, pushed them into the heat of the fire. Some of them
crumbled, but others baked hard and firm. As the heat burned off the
inclosing basket, the pattern was left molded on the clay.

After many experiments Oma learned just what clay to use and how to
bake it. And she made pots of all sizes and arranged them on ledges
of her cave and filled them with nuts and seeds. Then she learned how
to use the clay pots for cooking. In the old days she had placed
scraps of meat and bone and roots in a pitch-lined basket and then
added water and hot stones from the fire. Of course the pitch softened
and gave an unpleasant taste to the stew, and often the hot water
softened it so much that the basket became like a sieve. But now Oma
could mix her stews and brews and boil them until they were soft and
delicious, and the clay dish was just as good as before.

And Suta and other women came to look; and they wondered and tasted,
and smacked their lips, and asked how it was done, then went home to
do likewise. And the fame of Ang and Oma grew in the north land, and
men said, "They are loved by the Great One".

But if Oma made the first pottery and the most useful, Suta, wife of
Wang, made the most beautiful. After she had learned to bake the clay
so that neither fire nor water would harm it, she amused herself by
making dishes of queer shapes. Then she discovered it was not
necessary to make the basket molds, and that if she made marks on the
clay they would be baked in. She began by making a little row of nail
prints about the rim--((((((((((. Then she made rough pictures of
animals and men with a sharpened stick. And the fame of Suta went out
also through the north land, and they came from far away to see the
wonderful things which she had done. Others tried, but no one could
make such beautiful dishes as Suta.

Before the great fire feast an idea came to Suta like a dream in the
night, she knew not from where. She would make a great bowl for Odin and
she would mold on it pictures of his gifts, so that all who saw would
remember from whom the good things came. With great care she shaped a
bowl as high as a five-year-old child and so large that a grown man
could not circle it with his arms. On it she pictured the man who shot
the first deer with a stone-tipped arrow, the man who made the first
snare for the wild birds, the man who first crossed the deep water in a
hollowed log, Ang striking fire from the flints, Oma baking the clay
dishes. Then she hesitated. These and many things more the Great One had
given; what would He give next? What did she want most?

[Illustration: THE FIRST POTTER]

Now Suta was not like Ang or Wang or even like Oma. Wang had thought
sometimes that she was not so good a cook as Oma, and that she spent
too much time listening to the song of the birds and watching the play
of the light on the water and the woods and the far-off hills. She did
these things sometimes when he thought she ought to get wood for the
fire or cook something for him, and he grumbled a little. But now that
she made dishes of clay which no one else could make and all men said,
"What a fortunate man Wang is to have a woman that can make such
things!" Wang began to be very proud of her. He even went so far as to
get wood for the fire, which he did not think man's work.

And what did Suta the dreamer want? She did not want more food or more
clothes or a bigger cave; she wanted the power to mold in clay the
things she saw and loved. So she put on the great bowl for the
All-Father a picture of a woman, with her back turned on the lookers
and a sharpened stick in her hand, just ready to work the soft clay,
but waiting for the power to draw on clay the picture in her mind. It
was the first expression of the unsatisfied yearning of the artist for
beauty and the power to express it. For Suta was the mother of those
who love the beautiful and long to give it permanent form.

When the bowl for the Giver was finished, it was placed on a stone
foundation in front of the stone altar, which Ang and Wang had made.
At the feast it was filled with sparkling water from a spring near by,
and as the men danced about the fire they dipped their hands in it as
they passed by and sprinkled the water on the fire and on themselves
and sang:

      Singing water of the brook,
        Shining laughter of the wood,
      Talking picture of the clay,
        Earth and fire and water, all
      Are voices of the Great.

All who saw the great bowl which Suta had made were filled with wonder,
and they wanted her to make something for them. Then the great idea came
to Wang. Now Wang was not so strong as Ang or so good a hunter, but he
wanted just as much to eat and just as warm furs to wear. He liked
better to sit talking with some crony in the shade in summer or by the
fire in winter. Talking and sitting were the two things of which he
never tired. Now when the world was young, such men went hungry and
cold, and Wang had done so often, and, more's the pity, Suta and little
Sut; but then came the idea. Every one wanted Suta's clay dishes; he
wanted deer's meat and bear's, and furs, and the choicest seeds and
nuts. He would barter the things which Suta made for the things he
wanted. Suta would do the work; others would bring food and furs and
fruits; he would sit in front of the cave and give as little of the
first for as much of the second as possible. And the idea worked. Suta
loved to mold the plastic clay and decorate it. Many wanted the things
which she had made, and Wang's wily tongue multiplied the number of
those who were willing to pay for what they wanted.

So Wang became the father of a long line of traders, and the Wang
family had more food than they could eat and more furs than they could
wear. Wang grew thick in the belly and thin in the calf, but it suited
him, and Suta was too busy with her clay to care. And Wang the trader
became almost as great a man as Ang the priest.

And Oma, wife of Ang, grew envious of Suta, wife of Wang. And she
grumbled to Ang: "Did not you find the Red One and bring Wang and Suta
so that they should not perish from the cold? Have you not fed them
with meat of your own hunting? Did not I learn from the Red One how to
harden and mold the clay? Did I not show Suta? Do I not work harder
than she? Am I not a better cook? Can I not make better coats of fur?
But see, little Sut has finer furs than Om and is fatter. And all who
come now pass by our cave, except at the great feasts, or when they
are sick and in trouble, and go to talk with Wang and look at Suta. Is
she so much better to look at than Oma?"

But Ang comforted her with wisdom that had come from long broodings
under the shadow of the Keeper of Secrets. "The Giver has differing
gifts. To the fire he gives one, to the water another, to the earth
another. To Suta he gave the love of beauty; to you he gave the love
of doing and making; and the joy of doing is greater than the joy of
having. To each her gifts as the Great One wills. And I would rather
be the man of Oma than of Suta." So Oma was comforted, though she
often sighed wistfully as she saw men and women go by to the cave of
Wang or watched Suta deftly mold some new thought into the yielding
clay.

       --_From "Around the Fire", by Hanford M. Burr.
                            Courtesy of Association Press._




FINDING OPPOSITES


    This drill will not only test your ability to follow printed
    directions, but also your ability to exercise a careful choice of
    words. Follow the directions very closely.

    1. Arrange your paper with your name on the first and your grade on
    the second line. Beginning with the fourth line, in the margin,
    write the figures 1 to 10.

    2. Below are ten sets of words. In each case, the first word is
    followed by four other words, one of which is exactly opposite in
    meaning to the first word. You are going to find these opposites.
    Look at group one. HIGH is the first word. Of the four words that
    follow it, which do you think is the exact opposite of HIGH? Of
    course it is LOW. Write this pair of opposites after figure 1 on
    your paper as follows:

          1. HIGH  LOW

    3. After figure 2, write the second pair of opposites:

          2. GREAT  SMALL

    Complete the exercise by selecting the opposites from each remaining
    group, and writing them after the proper figure on your paper. When
    you have finished put down your pencil and wait quietly for the
    others.

          1. HIGH (sky, low, above, deep).
          2. GREAT (less, large, small, beautiful).
          3. HILL (mountain, valley, high, river).
          4. MANY (few, more, plenty, less).
          5. GRADUAL (quick, slowly, sudden, degree).
          6. WOUND (sword, nurse, heal, bind).
          7. LIGHT (bright, sun, shadow, darkness).
          8. STRAIGHT (long, uneven, twist, crooked).
          9. LAND (plain, water, farm, river).
          10. SPRING (fall, cool, October, green).




"IT'S QUITE TRUE!"


    This story might have been named "Gossip". When you have read it
    through, tell why this would be a good name for it.

    You should all begin reading at the same moment. Your teacher will
    divide you into three groups, as explained before the story on
    page 106, and ask you the questions at the end of the story.

"That is a terrible affair!" said a Hen; and she said it in a quarter
of the town where the occurrence had not happened. "That is a terrible
affair in the poultry-house. I cannot sleep alone to-night! It is
quite fortunate that there are many of us on the roost together!" And
she told a tale, at which the feathers of the other birds stood on
end, and the cock's comb fell down flat. It's quite true!

But we will begin at the beginning; and the beginning begins in a
poultry-house in another part of the town. The sun went down, and the
fowls jumped up on their perch to roost. There was a Hen, with white
feathers and short legs, who laid her right number of eggs, and was a
respectable hen in every way; as she flew up on to the roost she
pecked herself with her beak, and a little feather fell out.

"There it goes!" said she; "the more I peck myself the handsomer I
grow!" And she said it quite merrily, for she was a joker among the
hens, though, as I have said, she was very respectable; and then she
went to sleep.

It was dark all around; hen sat by hen; but the one that sat next to
the merry hen did not sleep: she heard and she didn't hear, as one
should do in this world if one wishes to live in quiet; but she could
not refrain from telling it to her next neighbor.

"Did you hear what was said here just now? I name no names; but here
is a hen who wants to peck her feathers out to look well. If I were a
cock I should despise her." Then she too went to sleep.

And just above the hens sat the Owl, with her husband and her little
owlets; the family had sharp ears, and they all heard every word that
the neighboring Hen had spoken, and they rolled their eyes, and the
Mother-Owl clapped her wings and said:

"Don't listen to it! But I suppose you heard what was said there? I
heard it with my own ears, and one must hear much before one's ears
fall off. There is one among the fowls who has so completely forgotten
what is becoming conduct in a hen that she pulls out all her feathers,
and then lets the cock see her."

"Prenez garde aux enfants," said the Father-Owl. "That's not fit for
the children to hear."

"I'll tell it to the neighbor owl; she's a very proper owl to
associate with." And she flew away.

"Hoo! hoo! to-whoo!" they both screeched in front of the neighbor's
dovecote to the doves within. "Have you heard it? Have you heard it?
Hoo! hoo! there's a hen who has pulled out all her feathers for the
sake of the cock. She'll die with cold, if she not dead already."

"Coo! coo! Where, where?" cried the Pigeons.

"In the neighbor's poultry-yard. I've as good as seen it myself. It's
hardly proper to repeat the story, but it's quite true!"

"Believe it! believe every single word of it!" cooed the Pigeons, and
they cooed down into their own poultry-yard. "There's a hen, and some
say that there are two of them that have plucked out all their
feathers, that they may not look like the rest, and that they may
attract the cock's attention. That's a bold game, for one may catch
cold and die of a fever, and they are both dead."

"Wake up! wake up!" crowed the Cock, and he flew up on the plank; his
eyes were still very heavy with sleep, but yet he crowed. "Three hens
have died of an unfortunate attachment to a cock. They have plucked
out all their feathers. That's a terrible story. I won't keep it to
myself; let it travel farther."

"Let it travel farther!" piped the bats; and the fowls clucked and the
cocks crowed, "Let it go farther! let it go farther!" And so the story
traveled from poultry-yard to poultry-yard, and at last came back to
the place from which it had gone forth.

"Five fowls," it was told, "have plucked out all their feathers to show
which of them had become thinnest out of love to the cock; and then they
have pecked each other, and fallen down dead to the shame and disgrace
of their families, and to the great loss of the proprietor."

And the hen who had lost the little loose feather, of course did not
know her own story again; and as she was a very respectable hen, she
said:

"I despise those fowls; but there are many of that sort. One ought not
to hush up such a thing, and I shall do what I can that the story may
get into the papers, and then it will be spread over all the country,
and that will serve those fowls right, and their families too."

It was put into the newspaper; it was printed; and it's quite
true--_that one little feather may swell till it becomes five fowls_.

                                      --_Hans Christian Andersen._


QUESTIONS

    1. Are you in the same group you were the last time the class was
    divided in this way?

    2. What was the remark out of which all the gossip grew?

    3. How may "one little feather become five fowls"?




TANGLED SENTENCES


    This exercise is given to see if you can follow directions. Follow
    each direction as you read it. Do not wait for others to start,
    but begin now.

1. Arrange your paper with your name on the first line and your grade
on the second. At the left hand side of your paper number the next ten
lines from number 1 to number 10.

2. The words NAME IS A JOHN BOY'S do not make a good sentence, but if
the words are arranged in order they form a good sentence: JOHN IS A
BOY'S NAME. This sentence is true. In the same way, the words BOOKS
MADE OF IRON ARE, in this order do not make a good sentence, but
arranged in the right order they form a good sentence: BOOKS ARE MADE
OF IRON. This sentence is not true.

3. Here are ten groups of words which can be rearranged into good
sentences. When they are rearranged in their right order, some will be
true and some will be false. Look at the first set of words. Do not
write the words in their right order, but see what they would say if
rearranged. If what they would say is true, write the word _true_ after
figure 1 on your paper; but if what they would say is not true, write
the word _false_ after figure 1. Do this with each group of words.

  1. Brazil for noted coffee is its
  2. largest Rhode Island in the state is the Union
  3. the John Hancock signed Independence Declaration of
  4. sugar products and rice of are the South
  5. Columbus the New York discovered of city
  6. important San Francisco on city Pacific coast is an the
  7. famous a William Tell American was
  8. Camel tusks the has like an and elephant a trunk
  9. return songbirds the spring time the in
  10. snow Panama land of is a ice and




HOW SELLA LOST HER SLIPPERS


    You have heard about the early peoples who found out how to use
    tools, how to build fires, how to make clothes out of skins of
    animals, and how to do all the other everyday things that once had
    to be done for the very first time. Science has found out for us
    the facts about how all these things were done first. But in the
    old days, before there was any knowledge of science, people had to
    explain such matters as best they could, by means of legends, such
    as that of Prometheus, who, as you have heard, stole fire from
    heaven. Here is a legend that suggests how water was first tamed
    and made a servant of man.

In the days of old, when wonderful things happened, there lived in a
pleasant dwelling beside a brook in the forest a young girl named
Sella, a name which means "a shadow". Although she was very beautiful,
so that everyone admired her, she did not like to stay very much of
the time with other people. She liked better to gather flowers on the
bank of the stream, or to sit in the shade of a great rock listening
to the sweet murmur of the flowing water. It was her delight to wander
up the stream, tracing to the source in the mountains each of the
little brooks that fed the larger one. She knew every little spring
that stole forth from under a hanging rock, and every little rill that
came trickling down the bare hillside. Often she rowed her little boat
out on the lake or on the wide river into which the stream ran.

In the days when Sella lived girls were not taught anything except the
things that it was thought belonged to woman's place, such as sewing,
the keeping of the house, and the art of making one's self charming
and agreeable. For a girl to go out into the world to make her own way
as girls do now was an unheard-of thing. Girls must stay at home and
leave adventure to the men of the family. Sella was not at all
contented with such an arrangement. She looked at her two brothers
enviously, thinking, "If I were only a boy, I could follow the river
down to the sea and see all the strange peoples and customs in other
parts of the world. I should like to see what kind of houses they
have, and how they build their stately ships, what kind of flowers
grow in their gardens, and what fruits ripen in their orchards. Here
men make their living by raising sheep, but there I hear they sprinkle
the great plains with corn, which springs up and ripens and is
harvested to give bread to all the nations. I long to see all these
things, and I would have seen them, long ago, if I were not so unlucky
as to be a girl."

One morning in early spring Sella came to her mother in breathless
excitement. "See, mother dear," she said, "what I have found on the
bank of the stream!" And she showed a pair of white slippers, spangled
and embroidered in silver. "See, my name is worked on the edge; and
just look, mother, they fit me!"

"To be sure, they are very dainty," said her prudent mother. "But they
do not belong to you. Perhaps some careless passer-by dropped them
there, or perhaps they were put there as a snare to lead you into
harm. I don't like the look of the letters embroidered on them; they
don't seem to me to spell your name, but rather to look like magic
signs that may work you evil. Nay, daughter, you must not wear them."

So Sella hung the slippers in the porch, so that anyone who had lost
them could see them as she passed by. No one claimed them, however. At
last, one day in May, Sella did not appear at the noonday meal. They
looked for her in all her favorite places and shouted her name
through the woods, but all in vain. At night they went out with
torches still seeking her. All the next day they searched, climbing
high into the mountains. Towards evening of the second day, when they
had given up hope, suddenly Sella appeared at her mother's side where
she sat alone and sad.

"Oh, mother, forgive me," she cried. "I just tried the slippers on for
a moment, and before I could take them off again I found them carrying
me along as if my feet had wings. At the bank of the stream there
waited for me a lovely creature, with flowing hair and filmy green
garments. She took my hand and led me right into the stream, and
together we went along in the midst of it. Gayly we leaped the crag
and swam the pool and glided between shady meadow banks. The stream
broadened and became a river, and still we went onward, past stately
towns, and under leaning masts of gallant ships, till at last we
reached the sea and passed below its waves. The seaweed grew on tall
stems like trees, and I could see the coral, the gleaming fish, and
the rosy shells lying on the white sand at the bottom. Herds of sea
creatures went by us, dolphins and whales and even sharks, but they
turned aside to make room for us."

Bella's mother interrupted her. "This is just a dream, dear Sella, a
vain dream."

"No, mother, for here is what my guide gave me to prove my story true."
And Sella showed a sea-green scarf, adding, "And she told me to keep the
slippers, and that whenever I put them on I could go down to the bottom
of the ocean again and see all the lovely things. Oh, mother, it is so
beautiful there! But after we had wandered about a long time I grew
weary, and longed for my dear mountain home. And so she brought me back;
and now I will never leave your side again." And she flung her arms
about her mother and kissed her, begging forgiveness once again.

Sella kept her promise. But, sadly enough, she did not have to keep it
long, for in less than two years from that May day her mother died.
The little mountain home was very sad. But after her first grief
passed, Sella was very often absent from the household, and her father
and brothers and older sister knew that she was away in the world of
waters with her friends the water-nymphs. When she was at home she
often sat looking blankly into space, with her thoughts far away. Her
brothers tried to persuade her not to go away from them so often, but
she only looked at them sorrowfully, and wept, saying never a word in
answer to their pleading.

At last there came a day of merriment and good cheer in the quiet
home. Bella's sister was to be married. The guests came from hill and
valley in all the country round. Sella welcomed them, beautiful and
calm as usual, with her clear blue eyes, fair hair, and skin as white
as the water-lily. She looked like a water nymph herself, so much of
her time had been spent in her beloved water.

Now it happened that that very morning the older of her two brothers had
been out upon the hillside and had seen Sella come out from the stream,
and had noticed where she put her slippers in a cleft of rock behind a
tree. Now, under cover of the merriment of the wedding while all the
youths and maidens were dancing, the two brothers stole away to the spot
where the slippers lay hidden, took them out, followed the brook down a
little way to where its current flowed very rapidly, and dropped them
in. The stream seemed to lift welcoming hands to catch them, and they
slid rapidly out of sight. Then the brothers returned to the house.

As evening came near, Sella grew tired of the feasting and dancing and
noise and longed for the quiet that she could find below the sea. So
she ran out to the brook to get her slippers. They were gone! She
searched all along the brookside, but could not find them. Frightened,
she ran wildly from place to place, and searched in the same spots
over and over. Someone had taken them; and it did not take her long to
think who the someone was. She ran to the house and charged her
brothers with the theft. They frankly told her all that they had done,
saying that it was because they loved her so. "We could not bear to
have the cold world of waters steal our sister from us. Now you can
never go away from us again."

When Sella heard how the stream had seized and carried away her
precious slippers, she gave a broken-hearted shriek. "They are gone
forever! Oh, how cruel you have been to me!" And she left them and ran
away to her room, locked her door, and would not let anyone in to
comfort her. All night she wept and mourned, knowing that never again
could she visit the sea caves and meadows where she so loved to roam,
nor talk with the gentle sea-nymphs. All the next day she wandered
alone by the brook, envying its shining waters which danced along on
their way to the sea. But by the next day she became more used to her
loss, and began to resolve that since it was no use to mourn for what
was gone, she would begin a new life whose days should be given to
quiet tasks of good in the great world. She knew that she had learned
many things about the water that men everywhere would be glad to know.
In patient, loving service she would forget her loss.

So the years passed. Sella still loved to haunt the springs and brooks
as in her cheerful childhood. She taught men to know the right places
in which to dig wells, so as to be sure to find water beneath the
earth. She showed them how to build aqueducts by which to bring the
water from the mountain streams to towns far away from any water. She
showed them how to tame the rushing stream and make its water drive
the millwheel. She bade them build cisterns and pools and reservoirs
to catch the rain-water in the wet season, so that in the dry months
of the year it could be carried in canals into the parched fields to
irrigate them. Everywhere Sella's name was loved and honored.

Bryant, our first American poet, who has told this story in lovely
verses which you must read some day, speaks of Sella's age and death
in the lines which follow.

        "Still she kept, as age came on,
      Her stately presence; still her eyes looked forth
      From under their calm brows as brightly clear
      As the transparent wells by which she sat
      So oft in childhood. Still she kept her fair
      Unwrinkled features, though her locks were white.
      A hundred times had summer, since her birth,
      Opened the water-lily on the lakes,
      So old traditions tell, before she died.
      A hundred cities mourned her.----By the brook
      That rippling ran beside the cottage door
      Where she was born, they reared her monument.
      Ere long the current parted and flowed round
      The marble base, forming a little isle,
      And there the flowers that love the running stream,
      Iris and orchid, and the cardinal flower,
      Crowded and hung caressingly around
      The stone engraved with Sella's honored name."

                                      --_Mabel Dodge Holmes._




THE GHOST OF TERRIBLE TERRY


    Here is a real boy story in real boy talk.

    It is a first-class story to outline. Read it through--you will be
    so much interested that you can't help reading fast--then close
    the book and make an outline.

I am the ghost of Terrible Terry! I have murdered ten men in cold
blood and buried their bones, in the dark of the moon, on the crest of
Death-Rattle Hill! You will meet me there at dark on the evening of
October 30! If you fail me BEWARE. (Following which was a crudely
drawn skull and cross bones.)

"Gosh!"

That was all George Taylor could say as he read the letter which his
father had just brought home in the evening mail. The mere thought of
Death-Rattle Hill _after dark_ was enough to make a fellow's heart
jump into his throat, for Death-Rattle Hill had received its name from
a popular superstition that grew out of the murder there, in pioneer
days, of an old trapper.

This trapper, "Dad" Smith, as he was known on the frontier, was
returning to his cabin in the wilderness, after selling his winter
catch of furs, when he was attacked at dusk by "Terrible Terry", a
notorious desperado of the early days. He was found the next day with
more than a score of knife-wounds in his body.

Legend credited Terry with numerous other ghastly crimes until at last
he met his fate in a manner which remains a mystery. His body was
found in the woods not far from the spot where Smith was murdered. A
rifle ball had passed through his throat. From then on stories were
circulated concerning peculiar noises that could be heard at dusk on
the hill. These noises, so the tales agreed, resembled a choking,
gasping sound--such as a man might make in struggling for breath. So
it came about that this hill came to be known throughout all the
country as "Death-Rattle Hill."

"Gosh!" said Taylor once more as these thoughts went racing through his
head. Then he jerked his cap from its hook in the hall and ran down the
alley to see if any other of the boys had received a similar message.

Carrots Crawford, Pepper Perkins and several other members of the
troop were talking excitedly.

"Hey, George," they called as the scout appeared, "did you get one,
too?"

"Do you mean a letter from Terrible Terry?"

"Sure thing," said Pepper; "all the fellows got them. It's just
another of Mr. James' stunts. Say, Scouts, remember that party we had
at headquarters last Hallowe'en? Didn't we have a circus! And I'll bet
this year we'll have a bigger time yet!"

After much discussion the group broke, and only Taylor and Pepper
Perkins remained. If the departing scouts had been thinking less about
the queer noises that were supposed to be heard on Death-Rattle Hill,
they might have observed that these two leading lights of Glenwood
troop had their heads together in earnest consultation.

It was ten days until the last of October; ten days filled with the
greatest anticipation for the members of Glenwood troop; although
every scout in the troop felt a peculiar sinking feeling at the pit of
the stomach at the thought of Death-Rattle Hill, not one of them would
have admitted it, and not one of them thought of failing to keep his
appointment with "Terrible Terry", especially after the rumor was
spread that each scout should go armed with a fork, a spoon and a tin
cup. The boys agreed among themselves that they would meet at troop
headquarters and march in a body to Death-Rattle Hill.

Hallowe'en evening came at last. The members of Glenwood Troop
reported at their headquarters to a man, quaking inwardly if the truth
were known, but prepared to keep their rendezvous with the ghost of a
cut-throat in the most haunted spot in all the land! Great was their
relief when Mr. James appeared and said he had thought it best to
accompany the boys on such a dangerous undertaking.

They started out, rather more boisterously than usual, laughing,
shouting and singing, but the nearer they got to Death-Rattle Hill the
quieter they became. By the time they reached the crest of the hill
they were huddled together like sheep.

"Here we are, boys," came the Scoutmaster's cheery voice at last as
the scouts reached a little clearing between two tall Norway pines.
Not far from one of the trees a huge bonfire had been built. Mr. James
struck a match, the flames ran quickly through the dry sticks and
logs, and in almost no time the clearing was light as day.

With the lighting of the fire, the spell that had been cast over the
boys by thoughts of Terrible Terry was partially broken, and they
entered into the games and stunts that Mr James had planned for them
with their customary spirit.

With their hands tied behind their backs they tried to bite apples
suspended from the branches of the pine by long strings and bobbed for
apples in a big tub of water. They had boxing and wrestling bouts, dug
pennies with their teeth out of shallow pans partly filled with flour,
held a war-dance around the fire and yelled as only hungry boys can
yell when Mr. James produced a pail of steaming cocoa, a big box of
"dogs", a pan full of doughnuts, and a box of red apples.

But in spite of all they could do to forget the stories of
Death-Rattle Hill they could not escape a vague, uneasy feeling, and
many a furtive glance was cast into the surrounding trees and bushes.

When the last drop of cocoa had disappeared and the last red apple had
followed the "dogs" and doughnuts to their doom, the boys crawled
close to the glowing embers of the fire and, following their usual
custom, begged Mr. James for a story.

The fire was slowly dying, and the occasional flickering flames cast
fantastic shadows on the hazel bushes and the trees.

"We have all heard more or less about strange sights and sounds in
places where men have met with violent death," said Mr. James by way
of beginning his yarn. "For instance, I have been told that in this
very clearing there grows a peculiar red moss which traces in exact
outline the spots on the earth where the old trapper Smith's
life-blood dyed the sod. Hunters have told me that no animals ever
cross this clearing--that in the dead of winter not even a rabbit
track breaks the smooth expanse of snow which is marred only by a
ghastly crimson stain where poor old Smith's body was found.

"But let me get on with my story. Thirteen years ago this very night an
old hunchback peddler, who had been selling his wares in the backwoods
settlements, lost his bearings in the forest and found himself at dusk
in this very clearing. Being completely exhausted from his wanderings,
he decided to make himself as comfortable as possible for the night. He
built a fire in the early evening, and, as the embers slowly settled
into ashes fell into a half sleep leaning against his pack.

"Just how long he dozed by the fire he could not tell, nor could he
remember exactly what wakened him, yet suddenly he was startled into
consciousness, every nerve a-tingle with a sense of impending danger.
Some power he could not sense drew his attention irresistibly to a
huge pine tree--that one right there!

"With his eyes starting from their sockets he sat incapable of
movement, waiting--waiting--when suddenly----"

Out of the pine on which every scout was focusing his gaze came an
unmistakable choking, gasping sound.

An instant later a faintly glowing light appeared.

"Great goodness! Look there!" exclaimed Patrol Leader Crawford in a
husky voice.

With a piercing shriek a horrible apparition floated out of the
branches of the pine. Its white hair was covered with ghastly clots of
red. Its arms waved wildly, moving the folds of a flowing white
garment splotched with blood.

Transfixed with horror, the boys sat frozen in their tracks as THE
THING rushed toward them.

Then there came a huge splash in the bobbing tub behind them and an
unmistakably human voice exclaimed, "Oh, thunder!" The voice belonged
to Pepper Perkins, and the Scoutmaster's flashlight revealed its owner
in a sitting posture in the tub of water, whence he had fallen from a
low branch of a tree directly over his head.

Meanwhile the "ghost" that had floated out of the pine was having
troubles of its own. It stopped floating with a sudden jerk and hung
suspended in mid-air, with a pair of khaki legs dangling beneath the
flowing garment and kicking around for something solid to stand on,
while a very unghostly voice pleaded, "Gosh, sakes! Can't you help a
feller down?"

A few turns of the flashlight revealed the whole plot. The "ghost"
had floated on a wire stretched from the huge pine to the smaller one
across the clearing. The faintly glowing light was a flashlight
enclosed in a paper sack, the horrible head-dress a piece of old fur
robe smeared with red paint, and the "shriek" a siren whistle.

You have heard how Death-Rattle Hill came by its name. And now you
know how it came about that George Taylor of the Glenwood Scouts
acquired the name of "Terry"--a name which he bears to this day.

                                  --_Courtesy of "Boys' Life".
  Copyrighted, 1918, by "Boys' Life", The Boy Scouts' Magazine._




ROAST CHICKEN


    All begin at the same moment. You may take thirty seconds to
    prepare to tell this story.

An American private spied a rooster prowling around a farm house in No
Man's Land just after the Americans had captured Very. Being hungry,
and having an appetite for roast chicken, this American private
decided to crawl up on the rooster and trap him in the building.

The American was about to lay his hands on the astonished rooster when
a German entered the rear door of the building bent on the same
mission. Both were so surprised that they stood for a moment and
glared at each other, then the American motioned for the German to do
a right flank on the prey they were after and both closed in on him.
The rooster was captured by the American, who later returned to the
American lines with both rooster and German in tow.

Later, at the regimental P. C., the German roasted the chicken for his
captor, who shared it with him.

                                               --_Association Men._




WHY THE ECHO ANSWERS


    Here is one of the beautiful Greek myths that everyone is supposed
    to know.

    Try to read it so carefully in five minutes that you can tell it
    from start to finish without being questioned or prompted. Your
    teacher will let two or three of you tell the story. Perhaps some
    of you can do it well enough to tell it to one of the lower
    classes in the school.

In the ancient days in Greece, people believed not only in the great
gods and goddesses, such as the god of the sea, the god of the sun,
the goddess of the moon, or the goddess of the harvest, but also in
many less important beings who took care of smaller things in the
world of nature. In every river lived a god, for whom the stream was
named. The woods were full of fair maidens called nymphs, whom mortal
eyes could not see. They had various names, according to the
particular objects which were their care. The nymphs who lived each in
her own tree were called _dryads_; those who dwelt in the springs and
brooks were _naiads_; while those whose home was in the rocks and
hills were _oreads_.

Of all the mountain nymphs, or oreads, the most beautiful was a maiden
named Echo. She was one of the troop of maidens who followed and
attended Diana, the goddess of the woodlands. Echo was very faithful
to all her tasks, devoted to her mistress, and beloved by all her
companions. Her one fault was that, like many another girl, she was
too fond of talking. Her tongue ran all day long. It did not matter
whether or not she had anything important to talk about; talk she
must. The other nymphs were used to it, and didn't pay much attention;
indeed, they hardly listened to her, a thing which often happens to
people who never know when to stop talking. But Juno, the queen of
the gods, one day grew so tired of Echo's ceaseless chatter that she
condemned her to lose her power to speak, except to repeat the words
of someone who spoke to her.

This was hard enough when it meant simply that the maiden could no
longer talk to her companions. If you have ever had so severe a cold
that you have lost your voice for a day or two, you know how many
things you think of that you want to say simply because you are unable
to say them. That was poor Echo's case, only it was to last forever
instead of for a few days. But far worse than this was to happen to
the unfortunate maiden. One day, not long after she had lost her
tongue, as we say, she saw for the first time the beautiful youth
Narcissus, son of one of the river gods. From that moment Echo's heart
was gone as well as her voice, for she fell in love immediately. But
alas! how could she let him know it? She could not speak at all,
except to mimic his last words whenever he spoke. And his words did
not at all express the feelings which she wanted to utter. For
instance, when Narcissus, who did not care anything about the lovesick
Echo, and who was anxious to get away, cried to her, "Let us leave one
another," she answered with all her heart, "One another," and tried to
hasten after him. But he could not or would not understand, and did
not wait for her.

At last Narcissus, who you can readily see was not as kind as he was
beautiful, growing utterly weary of having the forlorn nymph pursue
him, said rudely to her, "I cannot bear to come near you." "Near you,"
repeated Echo with all her heart, ready to fling her arms about his
neck.

"Hands off!" he cried, starting back. "I would rather die than thou
shouldst have me." "Have me," pleaded the unhappy Echo, but all in
vain. The cruel youth would have nothing to do with her. From that
time on she withdrew herself from the company of the other nymphs, and
wandered alone in hidden caves and among the remotest cliffs of the
mountains. Gradually she faded away till there was nothing left of her
but her voice, which still repeated the last part of any sound she
heard. Sometimes when you are in the woods or mountains, if you call
aloud, you will hear your own voice seeming to come back to you like
an answer. It is not your voice, you see, but that of the unfortunate
oread; so we call the sound that rings and rolls along in answer to
our voices, by the maiden's name, Echo.

Perhaps you would like to know what happened to the unkind Narcissus.
Echo was not the only maiden whom he scorned. He avoided all the nymphs,
for the only person whom he really loved was himself. As time went on he
loved himself more and more, especially as he saw the reflection of his
own beautiful face in the water. He spent his days stooping over the
deep, still pool that made the best mirror. He talked to his own image
in the still surface; he tried to embrace it, stooping so far over that
he almost fell in. But the mirrored face made no response to all his
pleadings. He was being well paid for his treatment of Echo. At last, in
despair because his love was not returned, he pined away and died of a
broken heart. Like other people who love themselves best, he got no
happiness from his vanity and selfishness.

Perhaps you are wondering why the youth whom Echo loved bore the name of
our delicate white spring flower. It is because that flower first sprang
up from the ground on the spot where the beautiful Narcissus was buried.

                                              --_Mabel Dodge Holmes._




THE FIGHT WITH THE SEA


    Before you begin to read this selection, look up the word _reclaim_.

    This is a good selection for outlining. You can write four or five
    topics that will cover the substance of the piece.

    Your teacher will keep track of the time it takes each of you to
    read the selection and make your outline.

There are some learned people who tell us that a great many years ago
the island which we call England, Scotland, and Wales was one with the
continent of Europe. They say that the sea gradually made its way
through a stretch of low-lying land, till at last Great Britain was
completely cut off from the continent. We all know that the Eastern
counties of England which face the little country of Holland are just
as flat and marshy as the opposite shores. The farmers and laborers in
these countries are continually endeavoring to make good pasture-land
of the unhealthy marshes and fens, as they are called, and each year
sees acres of land reclaimed and turned to good use; but also each
year a little land is stolen from these counties by the greedy sea.
The patient Dutch people on the other shore are carrying on the same
kind of work. They make wonderful dykes and drive the sea always a
little further and further back; and though much of their country is
actually beneath the level of the sea, they jealously guard the
treasure they have captured, with so much perseverance and energy that
the tyrant sea is kept in subjection. Of course, as the land lies
lower than the water, the natural result would be that the water would
flood the land unless it were kept out by an embankment; and this
wonderful little nation, so brave and daring as to defy the sea, have
surrounded their land with dykes, which are huge banks towering above
the lowlands of the country, and preventing the sea from obtaining
entrance. Of course, these dykes could be made only gradually as the
sea was turned from one spot to another by dams and locks, and these
facts will give you a far better proof than any other I could find of
the wonderful character and the great courage and perseverance of a
nation which has reclaimed its fatherland from the sea.

You will not be surprised to be told that such a land is very damp and
misty. All the surface is cut up by innumerable canals. If you could see
the whole country from a height, it would look like an enormous puzzle.
It consists of hundreds of green patches cut up by the waterways, and
decorated with red-roofed villages and towns. Through all of these
canals flows the same water; all of them are connected with one another.
Here and there the canals are wide, and bear much traffic on their
placid surfaces. Through miles of green fields wander little baby
canals, draining the pasture-lands, and bravely carrying barges which
drift slowly in single file from one busy centre to another.

There are plenty of railways, but the trains are generally slow, and
in many places the land perceptibly gives way as the heavy train
presses it, so most of the conveyance is done on the canals.

It is still part of the everyday life of Holland to reclaim the
stretches of mud and marsh from the sea. When this has been done, the
land is first enclosed with a dyke to prevent any water flowing into it.
On the edge of this dyke wind-mills are erected, each of which works a
pump. You remember how every picture of a Dutch landscape shows a
country dotted with windmills with wide-spreading arms and sails. As the
mills draw up the water, it is discharged into a canal, which takes it
to the sea. Only fifty years ago, an immense piece of submerged land
called the Haarlem Lake was drained and rendered fit for cultivation,
and one of the favorite projects of certain Dutch ministers is the
draining of the Zuyder Zee, an enormous stretch of water of which you
have certainly heard, and which once must have been dry land.

When I traveled in Holland, one of the greatest discomforts which I
experienced was the want of good drinking water. The Dutch people are
used to it, and drink a good deal of tea and coffee; but both are
taken so strong and so bitter, that, even if made with the purest
water, they would be undrinkable for you and me. Once, when I was
staying in a tiny village called Volendam, I had taken a little crying
child home to his mother, whom I knew. She wanted to wash his face
which I could hardly see through dirt and tears, and from where do you
think she drew her water? She lifted a loose board in the floor of her
room, and there, immediately underneath, was a canal which passed
under her house. The house was built on piles over the water, and the
whole family used this dirty water for everything--to wash in and to
cook with and to drink. Besides much dirt, there were two or three
tiny fish in the bucket that she took up when I was there, and when I
asked her if she filtered the water at all for drinking, she shook her
head, not understanding the reason for anything of the kind. So I told
her how much better it would be for her and her family if she boiled
the water before drinking it; but she replied that she thought this
would take away all the taste. Just imagine wanting your water to
taste of dirt and fishes!

                           --_From "A Peep at the Netherlands",
                                            by Beatrix Jungman._




AGRICULTURE


Here is an article from a cyclopedia for schools. The farther you go in
school, the more frequently you will need to consult such books. In such
cases you should learn to turn quickly to the part of this article you
want without reading it all through. Sometimes the topic you are looking
up will be the same as one of the headings in the book. Often it will
not. Instead of reading the whole article, however, you will generally
be able to judge what heading is likely to cover your topic.

If you don't find what you want, keep looking. For example, if you
wished to find more about wheat, oats, poultry or cattle you would
turn to other volumes of this cyclopedia and read the special article
on the subject you were seeking.

Your teacher will assign different individuals or different sections
of the class one or more of the following topics covered in this
selection. Of course you will not think that you have in this brief
selection anything like a complete discussion of each of these topics.
You will, however, find something interesting about each of them.

    1. How much time it takes to raise a bushel of corn.

    2. How barren areas can be made productive.

    3. Four causes of progress in agriculture.

    4. Four different kinds of agriculture.

    5. Where America raises her cereals.

    6. What agriculture does for each of us.

    7. Good roads and the farmer.

    8. Things the farmer has to fight.

    9. Truck farming.

    10. Where animals thrive.

    11. Agriculture experiment stations.

    12. Changes in agriculture methods.

Agriculture is the art of cultivating the soil to produce material for
feeding and clothing the human race. It is the oldest of all
occupations. "The first farmer," says Emerson, "was the first man, and
all historic nobility rests on possession and use of the land."
Agriculture is also the most widely-extended of all occupations, and
it lies at the foundation of all other industries. Daniel Webster once
said, "When tillage begins, other arts follow. The farmers, therefore,
are the founders of civilization." Unless man were fed and clothed the
race would perish.


ILLUSTRATING ITS IMPORTANCE.

Mr. and Mrs. Adams with their children, John, aged 14, and Mary, aged
12, lived in the city. Like many other city children, John and Mary
knew but little of the country, and did not seriously consider farming
or anything connected with it. Their father and mother, however, had
come from the farm, and they decided to help John and Mary to obtain
correct ideas of the country and of a life such as they lived in their
younger days.

"John, where did this bread come from?" asked Mr. Adams, at dinner.

"Why, mother bought it at the baker's, I suppose."

"Very well, but where did the baker get it?"

"Oh, I know," said Mary, "he makes it."

"But what is it made of?" continued the father.

"There is flour in it," said John, "and water, and--and--lots of other
things."

"A boy never knows anything about cooking; let me tell," said Mary.
"Bread is made of flour, water and yeast and--what else do they put in
it, mother?"

"I don't see as you know much more about it than I do," said John.

"You children can learn how to make bread some other time," said Mr.
Adams; "I want to know where the baker got his flour."

"He bought it of the wholesale grocer," replied John.

"Well, where did the grocer get it?"

"That is about as far as I can go," said John. "I have often wondered
where all the things we eat come from, but I have so many things to
study in school that I don't have time to read about anything more."

"Well," replied the father, "suppose we make a little study of these
things at dinner. Let us begin with the bread. What you and Mary have
said is true, but we need to look into the subject a little further,
if we would know the real source from which we obtain bread and all
other articles of food. The real source of all these is the farm, and
were it not for the farmers all the people who live in the city, as we
do, should soon be without food."

"Why, I never thought of that before; I never supposed the farmer
amounted to much, anyway," said John. Mary expressed a similar idea,
and both asked their father to tell them about those common articles
of food which we all eat without giving a thought to the source from
which they come or the labor required to prepare them for our use.

During the next few days Mr. Adams took the children on a number of
imaginary journeys. With him they visited in fancy the great wheat
fields of the Dakotas and Canada, the corn belt in Illinois and Iowa,
the cattle ranches of Texas and Montana, the fruit orchards of the
Pacific states, the dairy farms and creameries of Wisconsin, the sugar
plantations of Louisiana, the beet farms of Michigan and Colorado, and
the poultry farms near some of our great cities. Then he took them to
far-off lands--to the coffee plantations of Brazil, the tea gardens of
Formosa, the rice plantations of China and the spice groves of India.

Before these imaginary excursions were ended, John and Mary learned
that everything they ate, except salt, came from a farm in some part
of the world and that agriculture was carried on in every country. But
Mr. Adams did not stop here. In the same delightful way he led the
children to the study of cotton, flax, wool, and silk, so that they
were convinced that we depend upon the farm for what we wear as well
as for what we eat. In their minds the farmer at once became a very
important individual.

PROGRESS OF AGRICULTURE.--Agriculture began when the first man
selected plants for his food. His next step was to scratch the ground
with a stick and plant seed. Then he took a forked stick and made a
plow of it. Two or more men hauled this plow while another held it in
position. But this labor was too hard, so man tamed the ox and the ass
and made them do the hauling and the carrying of his burdens, as well.
From these simple beginnings, agriculture has advanced through the
centuries until to-day traction engines haul over our great wheat
fields gang plows that turn more than fifty furrows at a time. Later
these same engines haul over the fields of ripened grain a machine
which at one operation harvests, thrashes and sacks the grain ready
for market--does everything, one humorist says, except to cash the
check for the crop.

Such has been the progress in agriculture since the middle of the last
century that the labor of producing a bushel of wheat with the most
modern appliances has been reduced from a little over three hours to
about ten minutes. Formerly it required four and one-half hours' labor
to produce a bushel of corn; now it requires less than forty minutes.
Then, it took thirty-five and one-half hours' labor to grow a ton of
hay; now, it takes eleven hours and thirty-four minutes. But this is
not all. Production has been increased many fold; new and better
varieties of grains, vegetables, fruits and live stock are being
constantly produced; the use of agricultural machinery has enabled the
farmer to give more attention to the business side of his affairs, and
the best farms are now operated on a systematic plan which includes
both the fields and the home.

CAUSES OF PROGRESS.--While the progress of agriculture may seem to have
been slow, it has advanced about as rapidly as other arts. The more
rapid advance of recent times is due chiefly to the following causes:

_Transportation._--It is of no advantage to the farmer to raise crops
that he cannot market; therefore, good roads form one of the most
essential conditions to his success. Of these the country has far too
few, but railways have become so numerous that most farms are now
within a few miles of a station if not directly on the railway itself.
Increased facilities for marketing his crop have greatly increased the
farmers' production.

_Machinery._--The machines which have done most towards the progress
of agriculture are the harvester, or reaping machine, the gang plow,
the seeder and the horse hoe. What these have accomplished in reducing
the cost of production is told in the preceding paragraph. Without
these inventions cultivation of the large farms in the Prairie states
and the Canadian provinces of the Northwest would be impossible. Many
other machines have also contributed their share. Among these are the
steam thrasher, the traction engine, the gasoline engine, and the
cream separator. Moreover, we must not forget the improvement in the
simpler farm implements such as the hoe, the spade, the rake, and the
ax, which, by being made lighter and of better material than in the
long-ago, have enabled those using them to do more work with less
expenditure of strength.

_Chemistry._--The application of chemistry to soils, plants, and
fertilizers lies at the foundation of scientific agriculture. The farmer
can now learn from the nearest agricultural experiment station what
fertilizer is best suited to his soil and what crops he can grow with
greatest success. Agricultural chemistry is now applied to the study of
soils, of plant food and of fertilizers wherever there is an
agricultural college.

_Education._--Not many years ago the average farmer was glad to
express his contempt for what he styled "book farming". Happily, that
day is past, and agricultural education (see subheading, below) now
occupies an important position in the educational systems of all
civilized countries. In the United States and Canada the demand for
graduates from agricultural colleges and high schools is greater than
these institutions are able to supply. Furthermore, the outlook for
supervisors and teachers of agriculture is so promising that young men
from the city constitute no inconsiderable portion of the student body
of these institutions. This is the beginning of a right sort of
movement from the city to the country, and it is increasing.

_Scientific Agriculture._--All the foregoing movements have combined
to make agriculture a science as well as an art. The influence of the
agricultural colleges and experiment stations extends to the remotest
regions, and everywhere the trained scientist is helping the farmer to
solve his problems and to make his farm more profitable. No longer can
the old hit-or-miss methods maintain themselves in competition with
the scientific methods of the "new agriculture", which in the near
future will not only render productive vast areas still barren, but
also reclaim the so-called "worn-out farms" and repopulate with
prosperous families those which have been abandoned.

_Prevention of Disease._--The application of scientific methods to the
study of those diseases of plants and animals which are ever robbing
the farmer of his profits constitutes one of the most important
contributions of science to agriculture, and is saving annually
millions of dollars to the farmers. While not all of these diseases
are conquered, many of them have been; the ravages of others have been
checked, and new victories are gained each year.

_Insect Pests._--What has been said about the study of disease applies
with equal force to the study of destructive insects. These pests also
deprive the farmer of a portion of his income every season, and, now
and then, they destroy his crop altogether. Through the discoveries
made by the Department of Agriculture at Washington and in Canada by
the same department of government, and at the various experiment
stations, we are now able to deal successfully with these pests on the
American continent.

BRANCHES.--Agriculture is so widely extended over the earth and so
varied in its industries that it is naturally divided into a number of
branches. While many farmers are interested in several of these
branches, each gives special attention to one or two. The farmer in the
corn belt, for instance, makes corn the chief product of his land, but
he must give enough attention to growing other crops and to dairying to
produce sufficient food for his family and live stock, unless he would
purchase this food at an expense considerably greater than would be
required to raise it. Likewise, the dairy husbandman must raise most of
the feed for his herd to make his business profitable.

The following are the chief branches of agriculture in America:

_Raising Cereals._--In some regions the soil and climate are
especially suited to raising cereals. For instance, Canada, Minnesota
and North Dakota are adapted to raising spring wheat, and this
constitutes their chief crop. On the other hand, Kansas is especially
suited to raising winter wheat. Illinois and Iowa are the great corn
states, because of the particular adaptation of the soil and climate
of the corn belt to the production of this cereal. The growing of
cereals is more widely extended than any other branch of agriculture.

_Other Crops._--In some of the Northern states having a cool climate and
in Southern Canada, flax is extensively grown on new soil. Potatoes are
also successful in these regions. Oats is an extensive crop throughout
the northern half of the United States and in most of the Canadian
provinces. In Texas, Georgia, South Carolina, and a number of the other
Southern states, cotton constitutes the chief source of revenue. Fodder
crops, including corn for ensilage, clover, timothy and alfalfa, are
also of great importance in those localities where live stock is raised
or dairying is the chief line of agricultural industry.

_Horticulture._--Horticulture is that branch of agriculture which
includes the raising of flowers, garden vegetables, and fruit. The
growing of vegetables and other garden produce for market is usually
called _truck farming_, and this branch of horticulture is very common
near large cities and in those localities where soil and climate admit
of raising two or more crops a year. The raising of fruit is probably
the most extensive branch of horticulture, particularly in those regions
which depend upon irrigation for their supply of water. All forms of
horticulture are intensified farming--that is, the thorough cultivation
of small tracts of land that is highly fertilized.

_Live Stock._--Some localities are especially adapted to raising live
stock. Iowa and Illinois, for instance raise large numbers of hogs,
which are fattened on corn. Iowa also raises beef cattle. Kentucky is
noted for its fine horses; Montana, Wyoming, and several other states
contain extensive grazing lands where thousands of sheep find
pasturage, and in Texas beef cattle are raised in large numbers.

_Dairy Husbandry._--Sections of the country having a cool climate, an
abundance of pure water, and soil adapted to growing alfalfa and other
ensilage crops are suited to dairying, and this branch of agriculture
is of great importance in those states.

_Poultry._--The proceeds from the poultry raised in the United States
exceed those received from the wheat crop; strange as this statement
may seem, the hen is a mighty asset. Some poultry is found on nearly
every farm, but there are numerous small farms which are devoted
entirely to raising chickens, and when rightly managed, they prove a
profitable investment.

                                    --_From "The World Book".
                                  Courtesy of W. F. Quarrie & Co._




CAN YOU DO THIS ONE?


    Here is another little nonsense test. Be sure that you do exactly
    as the test directs.

At the top of your paper copy the longest of these three words: boy,
noise, trouble--and then, if there are more than seven letters in the
word that you have just written, write the figure 7 underneath the word,
but if not, do not write anything but pass on to the next paragraph.

If you think that Christopher Columbus used an ocean steamer to discover
America make three crosses at the bottom of your paper, but if you think
he must have used a canoe make only two crosses. Now no matter whether
there are five days in the week or not, write five days in the center of
your paper, sign your first name below it and hand in your answers.




THE INCHCAPE ROCK


    Read the poem through as fast as you can, but not so fast as to fail
    to get the full meaning. When all have finished, your teacher will
    ask you to write the story the poem tells.

    It will be interesting to keep track of the exact time it takes each
    of you to read the poem and to see whether those who read it more
    quickly tell the story better than those who read more slowly.

    Can you take in every word without speaking, whispering, or moving
    your lips?

      No stir in the air, no stir in the sea,
      The ship was as still as she could be,
      Her sails from heaven received no motion,
      Her keel was steady in the ocean.

      Without either sign or sound of their shock
      The waves flow over the Inchcape Rock;
      So little they rose, so little they fell,
      They did not move the Inchcape Bell.

      The good old Abbot of Aberbrothok
      Had placed that bell on the Inchcape Rock;
      On a buoy in the storm it floated and swung,
      And over the waves its warning rung.

      When the Rock was hid by the surges' swell,
      The mariners heard the warning bell;
      And then they knew the perilous Rock,
      And blest the Abbot of Aberbrothok.

      The sun in heaven was shining gay,
      All things were joyful on that day;
      The sea-birds scream'd as they wheel'd round,
      And there was joyance in their sound.

      The buoy of the Inchcape Bell was seen
      A darker speck on the ocean green;
      Sir Ralph the Rover walk'd his deck,
      And he fix'd his eye on the darker speck.

      He felt the cheering power of spring,
      It made him whistle, it made him sing;
      His heart was mirthful to excess,
      But the Rover's mirth was wickedness.

      His eye was on the Inchcape float;
      Quoth he, "My men, put out the boat,
      And row me to the Inchcape Rock,
      And I'll plague the priest of Aberbrothok."

      The boat is lower'd, the boatmen row,
      And to the Inchcape Rock they go;
      Sir Ralph bent over from the boat,
      And he cut the bell from the Inchcape float.

      Down sunk the bell, with a gurgling sound,
      The bubbles rose and burst around;
      Quoth Sir Ralph, "The next who comes to the Rock
      Won't bless the Abbot of Aberbrothok."

      Sir Ralph the Rover sail'd away,
      He scour'd the seas for many a day;
      And now grown rich with plundered store,
      He steers his course for Scotland's shore.

      So thick a haze o'erspreads the sky
      They cannot see the sun on high;
      The wind hath blown a gale all day,
      At evening it hath died away.

      On the deck the Rover takes his stand,
      So dark it is they see no land.
      Quoth Sir Ralph, "It will be lighter soon,
      For there is the dawn of the rising moon."

      "Can'st hear," said one, "the breakers roar?
      For methinks we should be near the shore;
      Now where we are I cannot tell,
      But I wish I could hear the Inchcape Bell."

      They hear no sound, the swell is strong;
      Though the wind hath fallen, they drift along,
      Till the vessel strikes with a shivering shock;
      Cried they, "It is the Inchcape Rock!"

      Sir Ralph the Rover tore his hair,
      He curst himself in his despair;
      The waves rush in on every side,
      The ship is sinking beneath the tide.

      But even in his dying fear
      One dreadful sound could the Rover hear,
      A sound as if with the Inchcape Bell,
      The fiends below were ringing his knell.
                                        --_Robert Southey._




SOME DEFINITIONS


    Such a poem as this one is called a _ballad_. A ballad always tells
    a story; it is never a very long poem; and it is always a poem of
    the sort that could be set to music and sung.

    Each group of lines in any poem is called a _stanza_, not a verse,
    as perhaps you have been used to calling it. In this poem you see
    that there are stanzas of four lines each.

    Two lines that rhyme with each other are called a _couplet_. How
    many couplets are there in each stanza? Can you find the two words
    from which the most rhymes are made?




THE BATTLE OF MORGARTEN


    Can you read this selection thoroughly in four minutes? Some of
    you can read it in less time than that.

    One of the most really democratic countries in the world today is
    Switzerland, the little republic among the Alps. It has a long and
    glorious history, for it is the earliest of modern republics. Its
    sections, instead of being called _states_, are called _cantons_.
    Switzerland originally belonged to Austria, in the early days when
    Austria was ruled not by an emperor but by a duke. The dukes of
    Austria were cruel tyrants, and this story tells how the Swiss
    mountaineers first began to free themselves from Austrian rule, in
    the battle of Morgarten in the year 1315.

    As you read the story, notice:

    1. The differences between Swiss and Austrians in numbers and
    equipment.

    2. What gave the Swiss an advantage over the Austrians.

There are people who doubt the story of William Tell and Gessler, the
Swiss archer and the Austrian tyrant; but no one can doubt the great
and decisive victory won at Morgarten by the Swiss on the 15th of
November, 1315. Three cantons beside the lake--Schwyz, Uri, and
Unterwalden: the three Forest Cantons, as they were called, because of
their great woods--were resolved to be free of Austrian rule. The
Austrian Duke determined to crush them once and for all.

He regarded it as a very easy matter. He had vast numbers of horsemen
and footmen, all splendidly armed and well trained in warfare; his
opponents were a few peasants, who clung to their native hills, and
loved freedom, and were ready to die for it. The Austrians looked upon
the affair as a mere hunting excursion. They provided themselves with
cartloads of ropes to lead back prisoners and the herds of cattle they
expected to seize.

When the men of the forest heard that their enemies were marching upon
them, they gathered to defend their rights as freemen. They mustered
thirteen hundred fighting men, armed with the rudest of weapons, many
having nothing in their hands save heavy clubs, spiked with iron. But
before night fell those spiked clubs had been dipped in the best blood
of Austria.

Twenty-four thousand of the Duke's finest troops, led by his brother
Leopold, advanced against these shepherds and herdsmen, and the two
armies met on the slopes of Morgarten. At this point a narrow pass
ascends the hill-side; upon one side of the pass lies the mountain,
upon the other the deep waters of the lake. At the head of the pass
stood the small band of Swiss, calmly surveying the splendid host of
steel-clad knights and men-at-arms which rode against them. The
Austrians pushed up the slope confident of victory.

But as the latter rode up the pass an avalanche was loosed upon
them--not an avalanche of snow, but one prepared by the Swiss
themselves. Great stones, rocks, and trunks of trees had been poised
on the edge of the heights above the pass. When the Austrians were
seen below, these were thrust over the brink of the descent, and came
rolling, leaping, thundering down the mountainside, and crashing in
among the horsemen. Many were struck down, and the horses became so
terrified that the whole body of the assailants was thrown into utter
confusion.

Here was the opportunity of the Swiss, and they did not let it slip.
Down the pass they swept upon the bewildered foe, and assailed them
furiously with their swords, their halberds (a heavy shaft of wood
fitted with axe and spear-point), and with their great iron-spiked
clubs.

The Austrians tried to turn back and escape, but in vain. They were
caught in the narrow pass as in a net. Many sprang from their horses
and tried to get away on foot; but they slipped on the rocks, and the
nimble mountaineers, whose nailed shoes gave them good foothold on
their native slopes, and who were used to climbing over perilous
heights, caught and destroyed them easily.

It was hardly a battle: it was a mere slaughter. Great numbers of the
Austrians were slain on the spot; many were driven into the lake and
drowned; the rest fled. Among the latter was Duke Leopold, who himself
narrowly escaped with his life. One who saw him on his flight from
this fatal field said that he looked "like death, and quite
distracted". Well might he look distracted. He had left behind him a
battleground drenched with the best blood of Austria; while of the
brave Swiss only fourteen men had fallen.

The latter could scarce believe at first that they had won so mighty a
victory; but when they saw the Austrians flying for their lives, and
knew that the day was indeed their own, they fell on their knees upon
this forever famous field of Morgarten, and thanked God for
deliverance from the power of Austria; and to this day a service of
thanksgiving is held every year on the anniversary of that great
fight. Year by year, on the 15th of November, Swiss men and women
visit that sacred spot where the liberty of their land was won in one
of the decisive battles of the world, for after Morgarten the Forest
Cantons never lost their freedom again.

                                  --_From "A Peep at Switzerland",
                                                 by John Finnemore._




FINDING OPPOSITES


This is another drill that asks you to make a careful choice of words.
_Do not_ write your name at the top of the paper this time, but
beginning on the first line, write the figures 1 to 12 in the margin.

Below are ten sets of words. In each set, the first word is followed by
four other words. Among these four words there is one that is exactly
opposite in meaning to the first word in the group. Look at the first
group. SUMMER is the first word. Of the four words that follow it which
one is the opposite in meaning to SUMMER? WINTER, of course. Write this
pair of opposites after figure 1 on your paper as follows:

            1. SUMMER      WINTER

After figure 2 write the second pair of opposites:

            2. TIGHT      LOOSE

Complete the drill by selecting the opposites from each remaining
group, and writing them after the proper figure on your paper. When
finished, sign your name in the lower right-hand corner of your paper
and wait quietly for the others.

  1. SUMMER (snow, winter, skating, January).
  2. TIGHT (small, larger, loose, bind).
  3. LONG (straight, heavy, short, reach).
  4. LEFT (before, right, corner, wrong).
  5. STORM (calm, rain, sun, wind).
  6. ROUND (box, cake, seat, square).
  7. BEAUTIFUL (picture, flower, girl, ugly).
  8. COLD (winter, ice, warm, weather).
  9. HELP (mother, book, lift, hinder).
  10. ROUGH (place, smooth, cotton, paper).
  11. SWEET (candy, sour, smile, lemon).
  12. POLITE (courtesy, manners, rude, clumsy).




WHAT MEKOLKA KNOWS


    Here is a story of Mekolka, a little boy whose home is in the far
    northern part of Russia. Mekolka is a Samoyad; that is, a dweller
    on the northern coast of Russia or Siberia. The Tundra is a wide,
    almost level plain without any trees.

    As you read, make a list of the things Mekolka can do with his
    hands.

    What do you think a _disha_ must be? What is a _toor_?

    Mekolka does not know how to read print, but he can read in the
    book of "all out-doors". What is the lesson he knows best?

    Mekolka's clothes have queer Russian names. See if you can tell,
    from the way each is described, what is a _militza_, what is a
    _soveek_, and what are _pimmies_?

    How does Mekolka keep track of the months and days?

If you were a little Samoyad boy, it is more than likely that you would
not go to school, unless you were one of a family that went off in a
procession of sleighs at the beginning of every winter to some small
town on the Petchora, or even farther on to Mezen or Archangel on the
White Sea. Then there would be some small school for you to go to while
the days were dark, till the approach of spring brought with it a new
packing up and long sleigh drive back to the haunts of seal and walrus.
But it is just as likely that there would be no school and no lessons.
Mekolka, for instance, though he has picked up a little learning--a very
little--from the Russian traders, and from friends who have traveled
over the Tundra, knows very few of the things you know.

But he can use his fingers with great skill, and if he cannot write
much, he can make a beautiful pattern with one knife on the horn
handle of another one. In fact, he is quite skilful in carving the
reindeer horns. He is always on the lookout for a good piece of horn,
and whenever he finds the shed antlers of a reindeer--for the deer
cast off their antlers and grow new ones every spring--he picks them
up and puts them to "season". There are regular piles of these antlers
about. It is the custom for everyone to put the ones he finds on to
one of these heaps, and to take the horn he wants to work from the
more seasoned pieces at the bottom of the heap. Mekolka always chooses
his piece with great care, cuts it down to the right shape, and as
often as not decorates it with a metal pattern. For this he has to cut
his design in a regular groove all over the horn. Having got his
grooves deep and wide enough he puts some white-looking metal on the
fire in a piece of wood scooped out like a cup. The metal soon melts,
and Mekolka pours it into the groove and prevents it from running off
by holding a piece of paper tight round the horn. The metal cools, and
the edges are cut away. Then he polishes it with sand, after which he
possesses a beautiful knife-handle.

Sometimes Mekolka goes in for ornaments without regard to use, and
makes himself a ring. This time he makes the groove in a round piece
of wood, which he has pared down to the right size, and runs in the
same metal as before, with the piece of paper held tight, to support
the metal on the under side. Then he cuts away the wood, and brings
out knife and sand for the finishing; at the end he puts it on his
finger with a look of proud content. Some of the patterns he makes on
the knife-handles are really very beautiful, so that the Russian
traders are glad to take them away in return for snuff and tobacco.

Mekolka can make a sleigh and mend it when required, throw the _disha_
when he wants to catch a reindeer, and bring it round its horn at the
first throw. He can harness a team of five correctly, and drive them
like the wind. At the gullies he is splendid; he puts the deer to a
gallop when he sees the ravine ahead; then over they go, sleigh and
all, Mekolka sitting there, proud and unmoved. Sometimes the ravine
cannot be treated this way. Then Mekolka brings the team up to the
edge and holds his _toor_--the long driving pole--across them to make
them stand evenly. Then he dexterously removes the pole and shouts to
the deer; at once they leap together across the cleft and climb up the
steep snow wall on the other side by the grip of their outspread
hoofs. They are not long at the top with the sleigh before Mekolka has
slithered down and scrambled up the walls of the ravine, where they
are less steep and where the ravine is not quite so narrow. He is
quickly on to his sleigh again while the deer race forwards.

It is cold work racing through the chill air, which is frequently
thick with an icy mist; but Mekolka is clad from head to foot in fur.
His _militza_ of reindeer-skin with fur inside often has a hood and
mittens attached to it and covers him like a smock from head to knees.
On his feet he wears _pimmies_, which reach up to the _militza_, and
are generally made of sealskin with the fur cut into strips to form an
attractive pattern. Over the _militza_ he sometimes puts a _soveek_,
the Samoyad overcoat. Here the fur is worn outside, and the garment is
big and roomy.

After a long journey the reindeer must be unharnessed for feeding.
They find their own food, of course, and Mekolka seizes the chance to
go to sleep. He always goes to sleep in the same queer way; he sits
down on the ground, pulls his arms out of the sleeves, and then lies
flat on his back. The empty sleeves stretch out stiffly by his side,
and look, of course, as though the arms are in them, though the hands
have found a warmer spot inside on his chest.

The air on the Tundra, and, indeed, in all the Arctic region has a
curious way of deceiving the traveler. It makes things look like
something else. Take a day when the sunshine lights up the scene and
the grey, lichen-covered mounds take wonderful colors in the distance
from the blue sky and the haze. Though lakes of water appear to grow
and fill the far-off hollows, Mekolka knows they are not lakes, but
little snowdrifts. It is the mirage that plays these little tricks. So
when he sees mighty ships sailing over the sea, he knows it is nothing
more than blocks of ice, while what looks like a great headland on the
coast is nothing but a little mound thirty or forty feet high. And if,
when alone, he sees half a dozen other Samoyads come to the river-bank
within a couple of hundred yards and then stop while one sits on a
stone, he doesn't call out or walk toward them; he knows quite well
that in a minute or two they will form themselves into a group of
bernacle geese, or a family of snow buntings; in fact, he is quite
prepared to hear one suddenly burst into song (for the snow bunting is
the gayest warbler of the Arctic), and to find a cleft in the peat
where there will be a nest, lined with dead grasses and the white
feathers of the willow-grouse, and holding half a dozen eggs.

He knows every bird that flies overhead, and can name them, too,
though his names are very different from ours. He knows that the snow
bunting arrives about the middle of April, and he begins to watch for
its appearance as soon as the days are getting long. He has no
calendar of months and days to look at, but he makes notches on a
stick--one for each day, with an extra cut at the seventh--and he is
just as quick in glancing at his stick and telling you the date as an
American boy would be with his printed calendar. He will watch for the
purple sandpiper in May, and find its eggs in June, though they are
very hard to find for anyone with eyes less trained than Mekolka's.
The nest is always built in some hollow among the Arctic willow or
lichen, and the eggs are difficult enough to see, as is the bird
itself when sitting on them--they all look so exactly like the ground.
And the bird will let you come ever so close to her--in fact, almost
tread on her--before she will leave her cherished eggs.

Mekolka can tell you about the behavior of the little stint when he came
upon her nest one day. It had four precious eggs in it. When the old
bird found she was really discovered, she jigged about like an acrobat,
squeaked like a mouse, and did everything she could to take off
Mekolka's attention from the nest. As that did not work, the little bird
twittered and pretended to be lame, running about as though asking to be
caught; but all she wanted was that no one should notice that deep hole
in the ground half full of dried birch-leaves where her four cherished
eggs were laid. The little stint had been into a creek in Scotland early
in June, and wanted to get back there with four chicks before the end of
July. She did not want to lose those eggs and go back all that long
journey without any little ones. Not that she is very kind to them after
they begin to grow, for on the very earliest opportunity she kicks them
out of the nest to teach them self-reliance!

                                          --_From "Finn and Samoyad"._


    Imagine that you have been for a long visit to Mekolka. Your
    teacher will call on some one to come to the front of the class to
    tell about each of the following experiences:

    1. Helping Mekolka make a horn knife-handle.

    2. A ride with Mekolka.

    3. Being fooled by a mirage.

    4. Some birds I saw with Mekolka.




THE BEAR'S NIGHT


    You should all begin reading at the same moment. When you have
    finished, close your book and raise your hand. Your teacher will
    divide the class into three equal groups according to speed. She
    will ask you to write answers to the questions given at the end of
    the story and will appoint a committee of one pupil from each
    group to look the answers over and report which of the three
    groups has given the best answers.

    Have you seen the brown bears at the Zoo? Do you remember how
    restlessly they walk up and down, or stand on their hind legs and
    wave their noses in the air? You will not wonder at it, when you
    read how independent a bear is at home, and how cozily he spends
    the long, dark winter.

It would seem that within or near the Arctic Circle Nature gives a big
yawn at the end of her energetic summer, and settles down to her long
winter sleep. Certainly some of her children prepare for sleep with
plenty of care, especially Bruin, the big brown bear of Finland.

Even in the summer he goes sniffing round in the strong marshlands of
the north or in the forests to the east. "That will make a good couch
for me," he thinks, as he spies a cosy nook among some big boulders.
He makes a note of the place, and goes on to look at other possible
sites. He decides nothing then, but waits till the snow comes. Then
the house-hunting must be undertaken seriously, and he tramps through
the soft white carpet, leaving a well-marked "spoor" to tell the tale
of his journeys. He is very fat after his summer feast of berries and
roots, and his heavy body ploughs a deep furrow along the snow.

When once he has fixed on his boulders or tree trunks, he becomes very
suspicious, and spends several days walking round and round his
lodgings, on the watch for an enemy. He wants to be quite sure that no
one can see him go to rest, and by going all round in a ring he
catches the wind whichever way it may be blowing. If he scents danger
he is off, and so fleet of foot is he that no hunter can catch him. In
short, Master Bruin is so much on the alert that it takes a very wary
hunter to catch him before he goes to rest.

Bruin is a good weather-prophet, and can sniff the signs of a coming
snow-storm better than most; so when at last he has chosen his couch he
arranges to nestle down in it just as a heavy fall of snow is coming
which will, he knows, cover up both his trail and himself, and so
conceal all his traces from the curious. Sometimes he is a little out in
his calculations, for his furrows are so deep that nothing short of a
gale, with its heavy drifts of snow, will quite obliterate them.

The hunter Finn, however, has been watching, and has marked Bruin in
his quest. He finds the "spoor" before it is lost, and travels along
it till it enters some wood or hiding place. Then on his skis, or
snowshoes, he starts across it and describes a big circle. If he cuts
the spoor again farther on, he knows that Bruin has not yet halted, so
another circle must be described. But if the ski-er comes back to the
first line of spoor without having crossed it again, then "honey paws"
must be within his circuit.

The hunter keeps his secret to himself and tells no one, because he
will get the money for the skin, and also a reward from the Government
for killing the animal.

There is no hurry, for the bear, when once settled in his snug
quarters, will doze away quite comfortably through the winter. His
ears and nose, however, seem to keep awake, even though his eyes are
shut, and a scent of danger will cause him to move quickly and
silently away to a new couch.

As spring approaches, the Finn tells a few of his chosen friends about
the matter, and together they go off to hunt "Flatnose", as they often
call him, before he wakes up, thin and hungry, after his six months'
fast. Warily they search, till they see a mass of snow covering a heap
of rocks or a pile of fallen pine-trees. Then they whisper:

"The bear is sleeping under that heap of snow." They fire a few guns,
the dogs bark, the men shout; altogether the bear receives a very
effective morning call. He is very easily awakened, but he is in no
haste to show himself, and waits while he thinks over matters, and
prepares for a strategic and rapid retreat, for he has met danger
before, and found his fleetness his greatest defence. In the meantime
the hunters have fired a few shots into his retreat in the hope of
stinging him into action, but they probably hit only his protective
stones. Then they gather twigs and branches together and light a
bonfire at his very door, or what they guess to be his door, trusting
that the wind will carry the smoke to his nostrils. Some of their
efforts succeed in their object; there is an upheaving of the snow;
Flatnose pushes out his head. Then follow the shoulders and front
paws, and soon the huge brown body rises as he sits upright on his
haunches. He gives a terrific growl, which shows he is not to be
trifled with; and, indeed, this is his most dangerous time, for he is
very hungry after his long foodless sleep, and ready to attack
anything--cow, reindeer, or man.

The dogs are much too frightened to go near him. They bark at a
distance. One man fires a shot and hits. The bear shows his teeth and
hisses as he makes a rush forwards. Another shot makes him look round,
and the dogs grow bolder. A shot in the muzzle makes him quite
furious, and he springs at one of the dogs. He catches one dog by the
back and flings it howling over the snow. Then he springs at the
other, and tears his ear or paw. Wild with fury, he rushes toward his
attackers, but between them he is soon laid low, and carried off in a
sleigh. His skin alone will be worth many dollars, and the flesh more,
so that with the Government grant, the men will have a comfortable
little sum each as a result of their hunting.

It is not without danger, this bear-hunt, neither is it certain of
success; for if the bear once dodges the early shots, he will manage
to get through the trees and disappear in a way that is almost
uncanny. So when a man has once been on a bear-hunt and brought his
prey safely home, he becomes a hero in his village.

                                     --_From "Finn and Samoyad"._


    Draw a diagram, showing:

    1. A hollow tree.

    2. A pile of rocks.

    3. A fallen pine-tree.

    4. The track made by the bear in seeking a winter bed.

    5. The bear's stopping place.

    6. The track made by the hunter in a circle.

    You will have to indicate the two tracks by two different kinds of
    lines.

    What is a _spoor_?




IS IT THE SAME BEAR?


In Longfellow's "Hiawatha," the poet describes a bear asleep, as
follows:

      "He had stolen the Belt of Wampum,
       From the Great Bear of the mountains,
       From the terror of the nations,
       As he lay asleep and cumbrous
       On the summit of the mountains,
       Like a rock with mosses on it,
       Spotted brown and gray with mosses."




THE CHINESE NEW YEAR'S DAY


At New Year time Hok-a, the Chinese boy, and Gold-needle, his sister,
and their cousins always have plenty of fun. Their grandmother once told
them a story of why there was always so much feasting then. She said:

"They tell us that the people of long ago had a saying that on the
last day of the twelfth month a great flood would drown everyone. When
the people of that time heard this, they were very sad, and thought,
'Now we are going to die, let us take the food we have and eat, and
the clothes we have and dress up gaily'. So they took rice, and fried
rice-cakes, and prepared strained rice and basins of vegetables, in
order to take leave of their ancestors. (The 'ancestors' mean the
spirits of their ancestors, who are supposed to live in wooden tablets
kept on a table placed against the wall of the chief room.) When they
had worshipped the ancestors, all the family sat together round the
table to eat their rice and put a little stove underneath because it
was winter, and they needed a fire to warm themselves. On that night
they shut the door very close and put a prop against it. They did not
dare to go to sleep, but watched anxiously for the flood to come.

"At daybreak they opened the door, and discovered that there was no
flood. That was New Year's Day. They immediately ran out to visit
their friends and relatives, and found that none of them had been
drowned either; so they all congratulated one another, and drank tea
and wine. From that time there have always been feasting and visiting
and congratulations at New Year."

Hok-a and Gold-needle have been looking forward to the holiday for a
long time. All the people in the house have been busy for days. The
dust and dirt of the year has been swept from the house into the
street. The men have been hurrying about collecting any money that
was owing to them, for no bills must be left over till New Year.
Mother and aunts have been sitting by the door to catch the light to
darn, and mend, and make, for everyone must have something fine to
wear on New Year's day. Such a cooking goes on the day before! and
such a frying of rice flour cakes you never saw. Pigs and ducks and
chickens and even poor little fish have a bad time of it just then.

The great day arrives, and Hok-a and Gold-needle dress themselves in
their new clothes. Hok-a has a blue coat, with a yellow silk waistcoat
on the top of it, green silk anklets, and a green cap; while his little
sister is gay in a pink coat and blue trousers trimmed with black, and
wears some silver pins and cloth flowers in her shining black hair.

By twelve o'clock all is ready. The men and boys, in long blue or
green gowns, are gathered in the hall, and prostrate themselves three
times begging the idols and the spirits of their ancestors to eat the
food prepared for them. A basin of rice and another of vegetables,
with a piece of meat, is carried to the bed-room for the Mother Bed
Spirit to eat, as, if they don't feed her, she will revenge herself by
tripping up the children. The Kitchen God, too, must have his share,
and the fireplace is gaily decorated with flowers.

When they have finished worshipping, a lot of silver and paper money
is burnt, that the spirits may buy good things in the other world, and
have a nice time. Then all the family gather round for the feast of
the year. Usually the men eat alone and the women afterwards, but on
this day everyone has a place. Such fun they have, roasting cockles
and parching beans! Everyone must give a stir to the bean-pan. A
little stove is carried to the table, and wine is warmed over it, for
all to have a taste. A great supply of celery has been laid in, and
the stalks must be boiled and swallowed whole, to give long life.
When the feast is finished, the grandfather hands a piece of money to
each, so that they may have money the year through. Then a basin of
rice and a bit of meat is given to the dog, a treat he gets only once
a year. It is time to light up now. A bit of sugar-cane is stuck
behind each door, and in each room food is placed for the spirits.
There is so much noise and merriment that, for a wonder, the rats
don't dare to peep out; so they say that "the rats are marrying and
giving in marriage". Twelve bamboo lamps are lighted in the hall, and
afterwards carried out to burn. Everybody gathers round to watch which
goes out first, as each lantern stands for a month, and the first that
burns black means a month of rain. If it is the first month the
children are sad, for that is holiday-time. And it usually is the
first, as it is carried out before the others.

Our little friend Hok-a has been saving up for weeks, so as to buy
plenty of squibs and fireworks to let off on this day, just as
American boys used to do for the 4th of July. His father has bought
hundreds of them, too, and so has everyone else in the place; the
cracking of them is heard everywhere.

A great bonfire is kindled, and the children jump over it, singing:

      "Jump busily, jump away--the fire burns bright!"

It is late before anyone gets to bed, for they think that the longer
the children sit up, the longer the old people will live. Some dutiful
boys and girls sit up all night long!

Next morning there is a great deal of visiting, and, I am sorry to
say, a great deal of gambling. Nobody works, and everybody is supposed
to be in good humor.

                                     --_From "A Peep at China",
                                              by Lena E. Johnston._




ADDING THE RIGHT WORDS


This drill is given to see how well you can follow printed directions,
and how well you understand the way the words are grouped at the
bottom of the page. There is something for you to write in each of the
following paragraphs, and your ability to read and understand will be
judged by how exactly you follow these directions.

1. Arrange your paper with your name on the first line to the right,
and your grade below it on the second line.

2. Do not write anything on the third line, but on the next six lines
in the margin, write the figures from 1 to 10.

3. The first group of words at the bottom of the page is a list of
farm-products; you can easily name other words that might be added to
this list, such as:

                        beans  rye  oats

Write two of these new words after figure 1 on your paper.

4. There are nine other lists of words, and each list names not
farm-products, but some other things. After figure 2 on your paper,
write two other words that could properly be added to the second group
of words.

5. In the same way, write two more words that could rightly belong to
each of the other eight groups of words. When you finish wait quietly
for the others.

   1. corn, potatoes, wheat, peas.
   2. chisel, plane, file, axe.
   3. creek, ocean, gulf, sea.
   4. fireman, librarian, teacher, physician.
   5. overcoat, fur cap, overshoes, muffler.
   6. meat, horns, tallow, hair.
   7. pencil, pen, blotter, stamps.
   8. cup, saucer, plate, bowl.
   9. door, window, stairs, chimney.
  10. tennis, croquet, hockey, baseball.




THE GOOD CITIZEN--HOW HE USES MATCHES


    There are two things you can do with every good and useful
    thing--use it and abuse it. Here you are going to read about the
    abuse of a very useful thing, indeed--a match. When things are a
    common, everyday part of the household, people are apt to treat
    them carelessly; and carelessness always means trouble. As you
    read, think whether anything in this article hits _you_.

    This is a good selection to outline. Perhaps your teacher will
    have some of the best outlines put on the blackboard.

The match is one of the most valuable and one of the most dangerous
articles made by man. It has been in use for less than one hundred
years, but think of trying to get along without it!

Suppose, for example, that you were camping far from any houses, and
discovered, when the time came to cook dinner, that you had lost your
matches. What would you do? Would you rub sticks together like the
Indian or make a "bow-drill" like the Eskimo? These were the methods
used by mankind for thousands and thousands of years, but they mean
desperately hard work, as you would soon realize. You would be
fortunate if you could find a bit of flint from which to strike sparks
with steel as your great-grandfather probably did. But even in that
case you would appreciate matches as never before.

It was not until the year 1827 that an English druggist named John
Walker made the first practical friction-matches, known as
"Congreves". A folded piece of glass-paper went with every box, and in
order to light the match one had to draw it in one hand quickly
through the folds of the paper held tightly pressed together with the
other. Another kind of match, the "Promethean", appeared a little
later. It had at one end a thin glass globule, which it was necessary
to press in producing fire.

Thus people went on experimenting, for everyone was interested and there
was great demand. Gradually methods of making that were better and
cheaper were discovered, until, to-day, matches are found in every home.

It is said that more matches are sold in the United States than in all
the rest of the world. More than seven hundred million matches are
used in the United States each day. You can hardly imagine such a
figure. If a factory made just one match for every minute, night and
day, it would take nearly fourteen hundred years for it to produce as
many matches as this country uses in a single day. Or--to put it in
another way--nearly five hundred thousand flames are struck every
minute on an average. There is not one of these flames that would not
develop into a destructive fire if it had a chance. Consequently,
every match must be regarded, and must be treated, as a possible
source of great damage.

Matches, to-day, are of two general classes: Those which may be struck
upon any rough surface, and the so-called "safety matches", made to be
struck only upon the box. But there are good matches and bad matches
in both classes. In other words, while the safety match, as a rule, is
safer than the kind first mentioned, a poorly made strike-on-the-box
match may be more dangerous than a well-made strike-anywhere match.
Therefore, we ought to know something about what a match is, as well
as how to use it.

Here is a match. What could appear more harmless? A tiny stick of wood,
shorter than your finger, coated at one end with some substance that
forms a little bulb, or head--who would believe that it can be either a
blessing or a deadly peril, according to the way in which it is used?

The secret of fire-production lies in the head of the match. This
contains certain chemicals which take fire easily when heated, and it
also contains particles of ground flint in order to create heat by
friction when the match is struck. If two objects are rubbed quickly
together, the resulting friction brings heat, and all the more easily
and quickly if one of the objects be rough. If you sandpaper a board,
rubbing it hard, you will soon find both paper and board becoming
warm. Thus friction from striking a match produces sufficient heat to
cause the head to burst into flame.

Now, it must be remembered that even careful persons may meet with
accidents through the use of bad matches. Sometimes, when struck, the
blazing head will fly off, or the stick will break and fall;
sometimes, too, the match will continue to glow after the flame has
been blown out. These are signs that the match is poorly made;
probably it is of some very cheap brand, for such things never happen
with good matches. Carefulness, therefore, must begin at the time of
buying. One should always notice the brand and always order by brand.
Whenever a brand is found to have any of these faults it should be
avoided in future, no matter how low the price may be.

The best of the strike-anywhere matches are given a special treatment
to keep the head from flying off when struck, and also to guard it
from being set on fire accidentally. Great care is also taken in the
preparation of the wood to safeguard against breaking. But as a class,
the safety matches are less dangerous.

Matches of all kinds are carefully tested in the great Underwriters'
Laboratories, which The National Board of Fire Underwriters maintains
in Chicago, and those that are able to pass the test are labeled by
the Laboratories. It is always a protection to find one of these
labels on a box. The Laboratories have no interest in the sale of
matches, and any manufacturer who will make goods of the right grade
can secure the label.

Let us suppose that your house is provided with good matches, those
having solid heads and tough sticks. There will be no danger if you
are always careful when using them. But are you? Here are some
questions for you to answer.

Do you ever throw away a match which is burning or even glowing? Never
do this again. It has caused hundreds of deaths and has burned
thousands of homes.

How do you strike a match--away from you or toward you? Probably you
have never thought about this, but think of it hereafter, and form the
habit of always striking _away_ from you. Thus, if the match breaks or
its head flies off, it will not be likely to set fire to your
clothing. In lighting matches upon a box, first _close the box_;
otherwise the flame may set fire to the whole box. If the box is set
in a box-holder, such as those used by smokers, wherein the upper part
of the box is open, place the box so that the heads are not exposed.
In striking a match upon such a holder, always strike downward away
from the open end.

If matches are spilled, do you stop at once and pick up every one? If
you leave them strewn about for even a little while, you may forget
them until after mischief has been done. A match on the floor is
always a dangerous thing. It may be stepped on and ignited, or it may
be found by a little child, or it may be carried into the wall or
under the floor by a rat or mouse. It is not probable that mice often
start fires by gnawing match-heads, but they do like to use them in
building nests in warm, comfortable places, close to chimneys or
furnace pipes. Dangerous fires may come from this cause or from
matches rubbed against beams while being carried to the nest.

Where do you keep your matches? Are they out of reach of little
children, as they always should be? Are they kept away from the stove,
or the stovepipe, or any other place where they may become overheated?
Are they loose in a drawer or on a shelf, or are they in a covered box
or dish of metal or earthenware? Sometimes uncovered matches are
ignited by the sun's rays shining through a lens-forming bubble in a
window-pane.

Do you carry matches on your person? A child should never be allowed
to do this. He may be careful, but some careless child may ask him for
a match. Always be on the safe side. A grown person should never
permit himself to carry loose matches in his pocket. The State Fire
Marshal of Iowa says:

    Some men, especially smokers, are in the habit of carrying matches
    around with them. It is the easiest thing in the world for matches
    carried around loose in a man's pocket to drop out. Suppose the man
    has work to do about a barn. A match drops out on the barn floor and
    a horse steps on it. It is a parlor-match and ignites, setting fire
    to hay and other inflammable material found in barns. Then the barn
    burns and the cause of fire is reported something like this:

    "Unknown. Nobody had been in the barn for some time. Everything safe
    when the barn was closed up."

    Six hundred and ninety-four barn fires took place in Iowa in 1914.
    Hundreds of these were reported as of unknown origin, but it is safe
    to say that in a great number of cases, if the cause could have been
    traced, it would have been found to be a match that had dropped out
    of a smoker's pocket.

Until we find some better device for producing fire, matches will
continue to be used in immense numbers, and they will always be a
source of danger in the hands of careless people, and even careful
people may be imperiled by the actions of careless people about them.
There are no safety-rules more important than those applying to the
use of matches, and habits of carefulness should be formed by every
person. Some one has said:

    Matches do not think with their heads. When you use them, your
    head has to do all the thinking. Do the thinking! Put them out!


SAFETY RULES FOR BUYING MATCHES

    1. Purchase by brand, and always avoid brands which break, lose
    their heads, or glow after being blown out.

    2. Look for the label of the Underwriters' Laboratories.

    3. Give the preference to strike-on-the-box, or safety matches,
    but, in case of buying the strike-anywhere match, get one that has
    a protected tip.


SAFETY RULES FOR USING MATCHES

    1. Keep them in covered boxes or dishes, away from the heat of
    stoves and stovepipes and out of the reach of rats and mice.

    2. Strike matches away from you. If you are striking on a box,
    first close the box. Strike downward on the box.

                     --_National Board of Fire Underwriters._


QUESTIONS

    1. Make three more rules for using matches.

    2. What is the meaning of the following words?

          friction         experimenting
          Underwriters     safety-matches
          inflammable      peril
          ignite           avoid
          accidentally     device

    3. Tell three ways in which matches may be dangerous.




NOBLESSE OBLIGE


    _Noblesse oblige_ is a French expression (pronounced nōblĕss´
    ōbleejh´) which means, "High birth or position makes one responsible
    for the good of those lower than he in position". The following
    story tells of a British officer during the World War who did not
    forget this motto. The story was told by the writer of a book
    narrating experiences at the front. As you read, think how you would
    have felt if you had been one of the young colonel's men.

A great love and sympathy always seem to exist between the British
officer and his men. One of the reasons is the justice and unselfishness
of the officer. For instance, a British officer among the walking
wounded never goes ahead of his men to have his wounds dressed.

Outside of one dressing station sat a young colonel with a bad wound.
One of the secretaries noticed him and said, "You had better get into
the dressing station at once."

"It is not my turn. I will not go out of turn."

Some four hours later, the secretary, passing out food and drink,
again noticed the colonel.

"Here! Why haven't you had your wounds dressed?" he exclaimed.

"I am waiting for my turn."

"But it was your turn a long time ago."

"Are you sure?"

"Of course I am. Come, let me help you."

Into the dressing room he staggered. He had no idea that he had done a
heroic thing.

                                         --"_Youth's Companion._"


    1. Could the young colonel have had his wounds dressed earlier if
    he had wished?

    2. Why did he not do so?




THE MAGIC HORSE


    Here is another Arabian fairy tale. It is much longer than the
    story of the queer man who was made Caliph for a day and is also
    very different from that tale. But it is a fine story of adventure
    filled with surprises and with all the changes of fortune that
    fairy stories so often have. Of course, all sixth grade boys and
    girls know that the Indian who is spoken of is an East Indian of
    Asia and not a North American Indian.

On the Nevrouz, that is to say, the new day, which is the first of the
year, and the beginning of the spring, an ancient and solemn feast was
observed through all Persia. At the court, this feast was always
attended with the greatest splendor. All artists, natives or
strangers, were allowed at that time to produce their several
inventions before the king; who never failed to confer liberal rewards
on those whose abilities deserved them.

Near the close of one of these feasts, an Indian presented himself
before the king with an artificial horse of the most perfect
workmanship, richly accoutred. "I flatter myself, sir," said the
Indian, addressing himself to the king, "that your majesty hath never
seen anything so wonderful as this horse, either now, or at any former
Nevrouz." The king surveyed the horse with attention. "I see nothing,"
said he, "but a fine piece of sculpture, which any able artist may
equal."

"Sir," replied the Indian, "it is not his form, but his use that I
commend so highly. On his back I can convey myself through the air to
the most distant part of the earth, in a very short time. I can even
instruct any other person to ride in the same manner. Such is the
curiosity I have the honor to present to your majesty's notice."

The king was highly pleased with this account of the Indian's horse,
and desired to see a proof of his abilities. "There is," said the
king, pointing to a mountain about three leagues off, "on the summit
of that mountain, a palm-tree of a particular quality, which I should
know from all others; go, fetch me a branch of it."

The Indian mounted his horse, and turning a peg which was in the neck,
away he flew with him, and they were presently out of sight. Within a
quarter of an hour he was seen returning with a palm branch in his
hand, which, as soon as he had descended and alighted, he laid at the
king's feet.

The king was greatly pleased with this extraordinary performance, and
resolved to purchase the horse if he could prevail with the owner to
part with him. Accordingly, he asked the Indian if he was to be sold.
"Sir," replied the Indian, "I should not have produced my horse to your
majesty if it had been absolutely impossible for me to sell him. Yet the
artist from whom I received him, laid me under the most solemn
injunction that I should never part with him for money; nor on any terms
but such as I might request your pardon before I presume to name them."

The king impatiently answered that he forgave his demand, even if it
was to reach his crown; but he reserved to himself the power of
refusal, if he thought that demand too exorbitant. The Indian then
replied that he was ready to resign his horse if his majesty would
condescend to bestow on him the princess, his daughter, in marriage.

When the courtiers heard this extravagant request, they all burst into
loud laughter; but the prince Firouz Shah, the only son of the king,
was enraged, and the more so when he saw the king pensive, debating
with himself what answer to return. Going up to his father, he said,
"I entreat your majesty will pardon the liberty I am about to take,
but is it possible you can hesitate a moment what answer to make to
this insolent fellow? Can you bear to think of degrading our house by
an alliance with a scandalous juggler?"

The king approved of his son's spirit, but argued that if he refused
to comply with the Indian's proposal, perhaps some other sovereign
might be less nice, and by that means become possessed of the greatest
curiosity in the world. He ended his reply by desiring his son to
examine the horse attentively, and give his opinion of him.

Respect for his father made him receive these orders in silence. He
approached the horse, and the Indian drew near to instruct the prince
in the method of managing him; but the haughty young man was in too
great a fury to listen to him. He spurned the kneeling Indian
contemptuously, and leaping into the saddle, he turned the peg, and
the horse flew away with him.

The Indian was exceedingly alarmed when he saw the prince depart
before he had learned how to manage the horse. He threw himself once
more at the king's feet, and besought his majesty not to blame him for
any accident which might befall the prince, since his own impetuosity
had exposed him to danger. The king had no apprehension for his son,
till he saw the Indian so terrified. He then felt all the horrors of
the prince's situation. He cursed the Indian and his fatal horse, and
ordered his officers to seize and conduct him to prison. "If my son
does not return safe," said he, "in a short time, thy paltry life, at
least, shall be sacrificed to my vengeance."

In the meantime, Firouz Shah was carried through the air with
inconceivable swiftness, till at length he could scarcely discern the
earth at all. He then wished to return, which he expected to do by
turning the peg the contrary way; but when he found the horse continued
to rise from the earth, and proceed forward at the same time with
greater swiftness, he was alarmed and began to regret his pride and
anger. He turned the peg about every way to no purpose; in this
situation he retained, notwithstanding, a perfect presence of mind, and,
on examining the horse closely, he at last perceived another peg behind
the ear. On turning that peg he presently found that he descended in the
same oblique manner that he had mounted, but not so swiftly.

As he drew near the earth, he lost the light by degrees, till he came
into total darkness. He did not attempt, therefore, to guide the horse,
but waited patiently, though not without apprehension, till he should
alight.

It was midnight when the horse stopped, and Firouz dismounted, faint
with hunger and fatigue. He groped about and found he was on the roof
of some large building. At length he came to some steps, which he
descended, and rambled about in the dark for some time; at last, on
opening a door, he found a light, and saw a number of black guards
asleep on pallets, with their sabres lying by them. This convinced him
that he was in a palace, and that this chamber was the guard room of
some princess. As he knew if any of the guards should awake he would
be in great danger, he resolved to enter the next apartment, and throw
himself on the mercy of the lady who inhabited it.

He found there asleep on a sofa a young lady, whose exquisite beauty
captivated his heart the moment he beheld her. Her women were sleeping
in little beds around her. The prince gazed on her for a long time,
forgetful of his situation; and, at length he knelt down, and gently
pulling her hand toward him, he kissed it.

The motion awakened the princess, who was surprised to find a stranger
at her bedside. She would have cried out, but Firouz besought her
patience. He told her that he was the son of a king, and that a very
extraordinary accident, which he would relate, had brought him to the
necessity of claiming her protection.

The lady was the daughter of the king of Bengal. Many of her
attendants were by this time awakened. She told Firouz, therefore,
that she should be glad to hear the particulars of his adventure in
the morning, but for the present besought him to withdraw. At the same
time she ordered her attendants to conduct him to a chamber, and
supply him with such refreshments as he wanted.

The prince attended her the next day and related to her all the
particulars of the arrival of the Indian with his horse, of his
insolent demand, and its consequences. He concluded his account of his
journey by observing that however much he had been enraged at the
Indian, he now began to consider him his benefactor; "since," added
he, "he has been the cause of my being known to a lady whose chains I
shall be proud to wear as long as I live."

The princess received this compliment in such a manner as showed it
was very acceptable to her. She invited the prince to repose a few
days in her palace to recover himself from the fatigue and alarm he
had undergone. He accepted this invitation; and being much together,
they fell more and more in love with each other. And, at last, when
filial duty obliged Firouz to think of returning to Persia, the fond
princess, fearing she should see him no more, dropped a hint that she
should not be afraid to trust herself with him on the enchanted horse;
and the prince, equally enamored, failed not to confirm her in this
rash adventure.

Everything being agreed on between the lovers, they repaired, one
morning at daybreak, to the roof where the horse still remained; and
Firouz assisted the princess to mount him. He then placed himself
before her, and turning the peg, they were out of sight before any of
the attendants in the palace were stirring; and in two hours the
prince discovered the capital of Persia.

He would not alight at the king's palace, but directed his course to a
small cottage in a wood, a little distance from town, that he might
inform his father who the lady was, and secure her a reception
suitable to her dignity. When they alighted, he led her into a
handsome apartment, and ordered the keeper of the house to show her
all imaginable respect. Then he hastened to the palace, where the king
received him with unspeakable joy. Firouz related to his father all
that had befallen him, and the king was so delighted with his son's
safe arrival, that he readily complied with his desire that the
wedding ceremonies between him and the princess should be immediately
celebrated.

While the necessary preparations were being made, the king ordered the
Indian, who was to have been executed the next day, to be released
from prison, and brought before him. "My son's safe arrival," said the
king to him, "hath preserved thy life. Take thy horse, and begone from
my dominions; where, if thou art ever seen again, I will not fail to
put thee to death." The Indian being then freed from his chains, and
set at liberty, withdrew in silence.

But he meditated a severe revenge. He had learned from those who
fetched him out of prison, that Firouz had brought home with him a
beautiful princess, to whom he was about to be married. He was told
also that she was at the house in the wood, where he was directed to
go and take away his horse. While Firouz was preparing a great retinue
to conduct the princess in state to the palace, the Indian hastened to
the house in the wood, and told the keeper he was sent by the prince
to conduct her, on the horse, to the capital; and that the whole court
and people were waiting with impatience for the wonderful sight.

[Illustration: THE PRINCE OF PERSIA CARRIES AWAY THE PRINCESS OF
BENGAL]

The keeper knew that the Indian had been imprisoned on account of the
prince's absence; and, seeing him now at liberty, he believed all he
said. He presented the traitor to the princess, who, not doubting but
he came from Firouz, readily agreed to go with him. The Indian,
overjoyed at his success, mounted his horse, took the princess behind
him, and turning the peg, the horse immediately ascended into the air.
The king and his whole court were on the road to the house in the
wood, to conduct the princess of Bengal from thence to the palace;
when the Indian, to brave them, and revenge the severe treatment he
had received, passed several times over their heads with his prize.
The rage and grief of the king were extreme. He loaded the villain
with a thousand execrations, in which he was joined by the courtiers
and people. The Indian, having expressed his contempt for them, and
his triumph over the king and his son, was presently out of sight.

But who can describe the horror and despair of Firouz, when he saw his
beloved princess torn from him by a vile Indian he so thoroughly
detested, and found himself unable to afford her the least assistance.
At first he abandoned himself to despair; but, recollecting that such
a conduct would neither recover the princess nor punish the captor, he
restrained his affliction, and began to consider how he could best
effect these desirable purposes. He put on the habit of a dervish, and
left the palace the same evening, uncertain which way to go, but
determined not to return till he had found his princess again.

In the meantime, the Indian having pursued his journey for several
hours, alighted in a wood, near the capital of Cashmere. As he was
hungry himself, and doubted not but the princess was so too, he left
her by the side of a brook and flew away on the horse to the city to
procure provisions. The princess made the best use in her power of
his absence; and though faint for want of food, she traveled on, and
had got a considerable distance from the place where he left her, when
she had the mortification to see him return and alight close by her;
for the Indian had wished to be set down wherever the princess was,
and the horse always obeyed the desire of the rider.

The Indian produced some wine and provisions, and ate heartily, urging
her to follow his example, which she thought it best to do. When they
had done, he drew near and began to pay his addresses to the princess,
which she repulsed with indignation. Her outcries drew a company of
horsemen to her assistance.

They proved to be the sultan of Cashmere and his attendants, returning
from a day's hunting. When the sultan asked of the Indian why he
annoyed the lady, he boldly answered that she was his wife; but the
princess, though she knew not the quality of the sultan, besought his
protection, and declared that by the basest deceit only she had been
thrown into the power of such a reptile.

The sultan of Cashmere was very chivalrous. The disorder and distress
of the princess added to her beauty and interested the monarch.
Judging that, whether the Indian was the husband of the lady or not,
he would be best out of the way, he pretended to be much enraged
against him, and ordered his head to be stuck off immediately. He then
conducted the princess to his palace, and directed his attendants to
bring the horse after them, though he knew nothing of the use of it.

The princess of Bengal rejoiced at her deliverance. She entertained
hopes that the sultan of Cashmere would generously restore her to the
prince of Persia; but she was much deceived; for as soon as the sultan
learned that she was daughter to the king of Bengal, he determined to
marry her, and that no untoward circumstances might happen to prevent
it, he gave orders for the necessary preparations to be completed by
the next day.

In the morning the princess was awakened early by the sounding of
trumpets, the beating of drums, and other noisy tokens of public joy,
which echoed through the palace and city. On her asking the cause of
this rejoicing, she was told it was to celebrate her marriage with
their sultan, which was to take place presently.

The princess' attachment to Firouz would have made any other man
disagreeable to her. But this conduct of the sultan of Cashmere in
proclaiming their nuptials, without even having asked her consent, at
once enraged and terrified her. She was entirely in his power; and the
disrespect he had paid her convinced her that she had everything to
fear from his violence, if she refused to comply with his wishes.

Thus critically situated, she had recourse to art. She arose and dressed
herself fancifully, and in her whole behavior appeared to her women to
be unsettled in her intellect. The sultan was soon told of his
misfortune, and on his approach she put on the appearance of frenzy, and
endeavored to fly at him; and this fury she ever after affected whenever
he came in her sight. The sultan was much disturbed at this unfortunate
event, as he thought it, and offered large rewards to any physician who
could cure her, but the princess would not suffer any one to come near
her, so that all hope of her recovery began to be despaired of.

During this interval, Firouz, disguised as a dervish, had traveled
through many provinces, full of grief, and uncertain which way to direct
his course in search of his beloved princess. At last, passing through a
town in India, he heard an account that a princess of Bengal had run
mad on the day of the celebration of her nuptials with the sultan of
Cashmere. Slender as was the hope that such a report gave him, he
resolved to travel to the capital of that kingdom; where, when he
arrived, he had the happiness to find he had not journeyed in vain. He
learned all the particulars of her having been delivered from the Indian
by their sultan, and that the very next day she was seized with madness.

Firouz saw at once the reason of the princess' conduct, and was
delighted with this tender proof of her love and constancy to him. All
the difficulty which remained was to obtain an opportunity of speaking
to her. To gain this, he put on the clothes of a physician, and,
presenting himself to the sultan, undertook to cure the princess.

His services being accepted, he desired first to see her, without
being seen by her. For this purpose he was conveyed into a closet,
whence he saw her unobserved. She was carelessly singing a song, in
which she deplored the unhappy fate which had forever deprived her of
the object she loved so tenderly. When he quitted the closet, he told
the sultan she was not incurable, but that it was necessary for him to
speak with her alone; and that notwithstanding her violent fits at the
sight of physicians, he knew how to make her attend to him.

As the princess had been long thought incurable, the sultan made no
difficulty of complying with the supposed physician's request. As soon
as he entered her apartment, she began to rave at him in her usual
furious manner, on which he went up close to her, and said, in a low
voice, "I am the prince of Persia."

The princess ceased to rave, and the attendants withdrew, rejoiced at
this proof of the physician's abilities. After mutual congratulations,
Firouz acquainted her with the plan he had formed for her deliverance.
He then returned to the sultan, who demanded eagerly what hopes he now
entertained. The pretended physician shook his head, and said, "All
depends upon a mere chance; the princess, a few hours before she was
taken ill, had touched something that was enchanted. Unless I can obtain
that something, whatever it may be, I cannot cure her."

The sultan of Cashmere presently recollected the horse, which was
still preserved in his treasury. He showed it to the imaginary
physician, who, on seeing it, very gravely said, "I congratulate your
majesty on the certainty of my success. Let this horse be brought out
into the great square before the palace, and let the princess attend;
I will promise that in a few minutes she shall be perfectly cured."

Accordingly, the following morning the horse was placed in the middle
of the square, and the supposed physician drew a large circle, and
placed around it chafing dishes, with a little fire in each. The
sultan, full of expectation, with all his nobles and ministers of
state, attended. The princess was brought out veiled, conducted within
the circle, and the physician placed her on the enchanted horse. He
then went round to each chafing dish, and threw in a certain drug,
which presently raised such a cloud of smoke that neither the
physician, the princess, nor the horse could be seen through it. At
that instant the prince of Persia mounted the horse; and, turning the
peg, while the horse ascended into the air, he distinctly pronounced
these words: "Sultan of Cashmere, when thou wouldst marry princesses
who implore thy protection, learn first to obtain their consent."

The same day the prince of Persia and his beloved princess arrived
safely at his father's court, when their nuptials were immediately
celebrated with the greatest splendor.

                                            --_Arabian Nights._




THINKING


    Arrange your paper with your name on the first line, at the right,
    and your grade below it on the second line. Put nothing on the next
    line. Here are ten problems to be answered, not with figures, but
    with the word, _yes_ or _no_. No other answer will be satisfactory.
    Put the answer to the first problem on the fourth line, and in the
    margin of your paper mark it number 1. Use a new line for each new
    answer guess at it, and pass on to the next problem.

1. One day last June, I picked sixty-five pounds of cherries. My
mother wanted about thirty pounds. Did I have enough to sell Mrs.
Clark thirty pounds also?

2. Sugar-cane grows in a moist tropical region. If you were a farmer
in Kansas, would you plant most of your farm with sugar-cane?

3. All the boys and girls of the Sixth Grade belong to the School
Library. Marie is in the Sixth Grade. Is she a member of the Library?

4. John is older than Robert. I am younger than John. Do you know that
Robert is older than I am?

5. I have been saving since last vacation in order to buy a bicycle.
It will cost me $19.50, but I have already saved more than half of
this. If my father gives me ten dollars for my birthday shall I be
able to get the bicycle?

6. All the boys in the Sixth Grade have enlisted in the United States
School Garden Army. Robert is a member of the United States School
Garden Army. Does that prove that he is a member of the Sixth Grade?

7. Hawaii has a warm moist climate. From what you read in the second
problem, would you expect to find sugar-cane growing there?

8. John is three years younger than Robert. I am one year older than
John. Is Robert the oldest?




WHAT IS A BOY SCOUT?


    Perhaps you are a Boy Scout already, though not a very big one.
    Perhaps you intend to be one some day. In this description of the
    best kind of Scout, find reasons why you would like to be one.

A Scout enjoys a hike through the woods more than he does a walk in
the city streets. He can tell north or south or east or west by the
"signs." He can tie a knot that will hold; he can climb a tree which
seems impossible to others; he can swim a river; he can pitch a tent;
he can mend a tear in his trousers; he can tell you which fruits and
seeds are poisonous and which are not; he can sight nut-bearing trees
from a distance. If he lives near the ocean or a lake he can reef a
sail or take his trick at the wheel, and, if near any body of water at
all he can pull an oar or use paddles and sculls; in the woods he
knows the names of birds and animals; in the water he tells you the
different varieties of fish.

A Scout walks through the woods with silent tread. No dry twigs snap
under his feet, and no loose stones turn over and throw him off his
balance. His eyes are keen and he sees many things that others do not
see. He sees tracks and signs which reveal to him the nature and
habits of the creatures that made them. He knows how to stalk birds
and animals and how to study them in their natural haunts. He sees
much, but is little seen.

A Scout, like an old frontiersman, does not shout his wisdom from the
housetops. He possesses the quiet power that comes from knowledge. He
speaks softly and answers questions modestly. He knows a braggart but
he does not challenge him, allowing the boaster to expose his
ignorance by his own loose-wagging tongue.

A Scout can kindle a fire in the forest on the wettest day, and he
seldom uses more than one match. When no matches can be had, he can
still have a fire, for he knows the secret of the rubbing sticks used
by the Indians, and he knows how to start a blaze with only his knife
blade and a piece of flint. He knows, also, the danger of forest
fires; so he kindles a blaze that will not spread. The fire once
started, what a meal he can prepare out there in the open! Just watch
him and compare his appetite with that of a boy who lounges at a lunch
counter in a crowded city. He knows the unwritten rules of the
campfire, and he contributes his share to the pleasures of the
council. He also knows when to sit silent before the ruddy embers and
give his mind free play.

A Scout holds his honor to be his most precious possession, and he
would rather die than have it stained. He knows what is his duty, and
all obligations imposed by duty he fulfills of his own free will. His
sense of honor is his only task-master, and his honor he guards as
jealously as did the knights of old. In this manner a Scout wins the
confidence and respect of all people.

A Scout practices self-control, for he knows that men who master
problems in the world must first master themselves. He keeps a close
guard on his tongue, for he knows that loud speech is often a cloak to
ignorance, that swearing is a sign of weakness, and that untruthfulness
shatters the confidence of others. He keeps a close guard on his
appetite and eats moderately of food which will make him strong; he
never uses alcoholic liquors because he does not wish to poison his
body; he desires a clear, active brain, so he avoids tobacco.

A Scout never flinches in the face of danger; for he knows that at
such a time every faculty must be alert to preserve his safety and
that of others. He knows what to do in case of fire, or panic, or
shipwreck; he trains his mind to direct and his body to act. In all
emergencies he sets an example of resourcefulness, coolness and
courage, and considers the safety of others before that of himself. He
is especially considerate of the helpless and weak.

A Scout can make himself known to a brother Scout wherever he may be
by a method which only Scouts can know. He has brothers in every city
in the land and in every country in the world. Wherever he goes he can
give his signs and be assured of a friendly welcome. He can talk with
a brother Scout without making a sound or he can make known his
message by imitating the click of a telegraph key.

                          --_From "The Boy Scouts' Year Book",
                              Courtesy of D. Appleton and Company._


QUESTIONS

    1. Why would you like a Boy Scout as a companion if you were lost
    in the woods?

    2. What is meant by, "His sense of honor is his only task-master"?

    3. Why would you trust a Boy Scout who lived up to the teachings
    of the Boy Scouts?




THE SCOUT AND THE KNIGHT


    Some of the pledges which the knights of King Arthur's Round Table
    had to take were not unlike the code of the Boy Scouts. Find the
    points of likeness in these lines from Tennyson's version of the
    vows:

      "To honor his own word as if his God's;
       To ride abroad redressing human wrongs;
       To speak no slander, no, nor listen to it."




THE FIRE SPIRIT


    Here is a splendid story that makes the discovery of fire real to
    us because it shows us how a man might have felt.

    This is a story to read and enjoy. No questions will be asked
    about it, but you may ask your teacher to explain anything you do
    not understand. Perhaps you would like to tell the story to your
    parents or friends or to some class below yours in the school.

Before the years were counted or the circuit of the seasons reckoned,
man lived where it was always summer, and summer heat ruled the
Northland, now ruled by winter cold. As the scepter of the Frost King
reached farther and farther south, men slowly and reluctantly
retreated from the old homes. But some lingered through the fireless
winters for the love of the familiar places and the beauty of the
northern spring and summer.

Among those who lingered was Ang, the mighty hunter. His home was in a
cave at the edge of the great forest. It faced the south so that it
could catch all the scant rays of the winter's sun. The mouth of the
cave was partly closed by a screen of fir boughs, while a bark slab,
torn from a big tree, formed a rude door. Inside the cave were bunks
piled high with dry moss and leaves, with the skins of animals which
Ang had slain thrown over them.

It was not yet midwinter, but it was cold, bitter cold. As Ang sat in
front of his cave, chipping knife blades and arrow points from flint,
he moved from time to time to keep in the feeble light of the sun, but
it seemed to have little warmth, and he shivered and grumbled to
himself: "Every year the cold grows stronger. The old men tell of a
time when it came late and went soon, but that must have been long
ago. Ugh! but it is cold! It gets under my bearskin; it nips my ears
and numbs my hands. I wish I had taken the long journey to the
Southland, but it was far for the woman and the child, and I hoped
that the Ice Giant would grow old and lose his strength--and I was
born here; my father and my father's father hunted in these woods and
fished in this river, and men, like trees, take root."

The sun sank into a cold gray cloud in the west. The bite of the wind
grew sharper. The hoarse cough of a child echoed from the cave behind
him, and the dull crooning song of the mother, as she tried to warm
the sick child at her breast, could be heard as the wind was lulled
for a moment.

Colder and more cold it grew, but Ang would not enter the cave. He
could not bear to hear the troubled breathing of the child or see the
face of the mother. He dreaded the coming of the grim White Spirit for
this, his last child. Sometimes he fancied he could hear him rushing
through the woods above the cliff, and feel the chill of his breath on
his face. Had he no other food but children, this dread hunter?

Colder and more cold it grew, but Ang still lingered. He piled dry moss
about his feet and tried to bring warmth to his numb hands by hammering
off flakes of flint which he would later shape into rough weapons and
tools. He struck two flints together in a kind of dumb fury. It was a
glancing blow, and one of the flints dropped into the dry moss at his
feet with a flicker of sparks. A coil of gray smoke crept out of the
moss like a serpent coming out of his hole. A bright spot at its heart
grew brighter and brighter, and then red flames lapped hungrily.

Ang leaped to his feet in astonishment. At the smiting of the flint
the Fire Spirit had been born. Its breath was the breath of summer. He
stretched out his hands over the flames, and the cold loosened its
grip. He touched the flame, and it stung him like an angry bee.
Clearly the Spirit must not be handled. Awe and wonder filled the mind
of Ang. He fell on his knees and prayed to the Fire Spirit: "Spirit of
light and heat, Thou hast come in our hour of need--I know not whence.
Stay and keep away the terrible cold Spirit with thy red arrows. Stay!
I will deny thee nothing. If Thou art hungry, I will feed thee."

[Illustration: THE FIRE SPIRIT]

As Ang watched the fire, it hungrily ate up the dry moss, and lapped
the dry sticks. He brought more and fed them to the reaching flames.
The northern darkness had shut in the rest of the world, light
lingered at the door of the cave of Ang, and the warm breath of the
fire brought back the heat of summer in the midst of winter. Joy
filled the heart of Ang, and he called to the mother and the child:
"Oma, Om, come! The Great One has heard. Come, come, come quickly."

The bark door opened, and the mother came out holding the child to her
breast. A cry of wonder broke from her as she saw the fire, but wonder
gave way to the mother instinct. The All-Father had heard. Here were
warmth and light. The gray huntsman should not have her child. She
crouched by the fire, holding the babe in her arms so that she
sheltered it from the encircling cold while the glowing fire warmed
and healed it. With gratitude and awe she watched the color come back
to the child's face, and then she looked with eager questioning at the
face of Ang, as it shone with a light brighter than that of the fire.

Finally he spoke: "I sat at the going in of the cave. Fear gripped me;
the cold smote me. I said, Odin has forgotten. It may be that he has
gone to the Southland because the cold was stronger than he. I heard
the barking of the child. The dread of the great robber was on me. I
tried to forget. I smote the flints together. Star-flies seemed to
leap from the stone, and the fire was born in the heart of the moss."

Then Ang stood by the mother and the child and placed his left hand on
the head of the mother and raised his right hand to the sky to which
the leaping flames pointed and said: "Great Father, now I know that
none is greater than Thou; not even the giants of the North. Thy
shining arrows have driven the huntsman back. And I know that Thine
eyes see farther than the eagle floating in the sky, for thou hast
seen us alone in the great woods, and Thine ear is quicker to hear
than that of the mother listening for the cry of her first-born, for
thou hast heard the cry that did not rise to our lips. Henceforth the
fire shall be the sign of Thee. As the flames leap up the sky, so
shall our thoughts leap to Thee, Our Father."

All through the long cold winter Ang and Oma fed the fire, and Om grew
well and strong again. They very soon found that the fire, though it
gave so freely the life-giving light and heat, had to be treated with
great care. It was a good servant but a poor master. One day little Om
toddled too close and burned his hand on a live coal. On another day
the wind blew the sparks from the fire into the dry rushes which
screened the entrance to the cave, and in a moment the cave was filled
with flames and smoke, and Oma had to cover her head and that of Om
with skins, and dash out into the open. All the bedding of dry leaves
was burned up, and some of the skins were badly scorched. The wooden
handles of many of Ang's spears and arrows and knives were burned
also. It took many days of hard work to replace what the fire had
eaten. So they came to fear as well as to love it.

But Ang and Oma learned one thing from the fire which burned out
their cave that was worth more than a thousand fires could destroy.
Part of a deer, which Ang had killed, hung inside of the cave. It had
been very hard to get, and it was almost the first thing which Ang
thought of after the fire had burned down. If that had been destroyed,
they might starve before he could kill another one. He dashed into the
cave to see if anything was left, the fear of hunger already gripping
his vitals. A strange new odor filled his nostrils and doubled his
hunger--the smell of roasted venison. The deer still hung from the
side of the cave. The hair had been burned off and the skin hung in
rolls, but the flesh was there, brown, hot, dripping red.

At Ang's call Oma hurried in. It needed but one whiff of the fragrant
air to convince her that the touch of fire had made of the cold frozen
meat food more delicious than the fruits of summer. She snatched a
long stone knife from her belt and cut strips of venison steak from
the smoking mass and gave to Ang and Om.

After they had eaten, Ang looked into the glowing embers of the fire in
front of the cave and pondered. The Fire Spirit had grown angry because
they had taken only one of the gifts of the Great Father and had burned
out the cave, but it had showed them what its magic touch would do to
the frozen meat. The wonder of it grew on him. As he looked into the
world at the heart of the coals, he saw the promise of a better one than
that in which he lived--a world in which the sons of his son's sons
should have discovered all the gifts of the Fire Spirit.

As Ang looked into the fire, Oma looked into the face of Ang and
wondered at what she saw there. His look seemed to pierce the
blackness behind the fire a hundred days' journey. "Father of my son,
what seest thou in the fire?" "I see," said Ang, "the spirits of the
things which are to be. I see, but do not understand all that I see.
I see our son's sons talking fire, the flames leaping from their
mouths like tongues; I see them crossing the Big Water in great logs
which breathe out fire and smoke. I see--but there are no words to
tell thee all that I see."

And Oma looked into the embers, and she too saw the flickering spirits
of the things to be. She saw countless fires--fires in the woods,
fires in caves, fires on altars--but those who tended the fires were
the daughters of her daughters.

In a few days the damage done by the fire was repaired. It was Oma who
discovered that water stopped the hunger of the fire, and when it grew
too fierce she beat it back with boughs dipped in the stream which ran
before their cave.

The warmth of the fire and the cooked meat made little Om grow as no
boy had ever grown in the cold season, and before the winter was over
he was running about as sturdily as a young bear. But it made trouble
for Oma. The woods were full of savage wild beasts, bears, panthers,
and wolves. Even Ang, with his strength and cunning and great stone
axe and sharp knives, was in constant danger. When he went out to
hunt, Oma always feared till he came back. What chance then would
little Om have? So she tried to keep him always in the clearing before
the cave, but the task grew harder and harder as the weather grew
warmer and Om's legs stronger and his eyes more curious.

One evening, just as the dark was shutting in, Oma was cracking some
bones to get some choice marrow for Ang's supper after he returned
from his hunting, and for a moment her back was turned to the boy.
When she looked for him he had slipped away into the darkness. The cry
of a hyena broke on the stillness of the night, savage,
blood-curdling. Then came a terrified scream from little Om. She
leaped to her feet in terror. Where? Where? Which way? The sound
seemed to come from all directions. Not knowing what she did, she
snatched a burning brand from the fire and dashed into the darkness,
leaving a trail of flame behind her.

She had gone only a few yards when she came upon the beast crouching
over little Om. Thoughtless of all danger to herself, Oma leaped at
the savage beast, whirling the burning brand about her head. The hyena
gave a snarl of surprise and fear, dropped Om, and sprang away into
the thicket, with leaps longer than any he had made in his life, for
the fear of the fire was on him.

Oma snatched her baby to her breast and hurried back to the cave,
crooning over him as she went. She brought him to the fire and
stripped off his little fur coat; that was in shreds, but the child's
skin was only slightly scratched.

As she locked him in her arms to comfort him, Ang suddenly leaped out
of the darkness, his great stone axe swinging in his hands. Terror was
in his face; sweat dropped from him like rain. "The hyena! I heard his
cry here and that of little Om!"

Oma pointed to the baby in her arms, to the torn skin at her feet, to
the smoldering branch and to the darkness which had swallowed the
great beast. "It was only a moment, but he slipped away into the
darkness; I heard the cry, the cry of the beast and the cry of the
child. I caught up a brand from the fire and ran; the fearless one ran
at the sight of it. The child is safe, see!" And Om looked at his
father through tear-dimmed eyes.

Then Ang knelt by the side of the child and its mother and prayed: "O
Thou who are greater than the greatest and mightier than the
mightiest, again Thou hast saved us by the red magic. By it Thou hast
made us, Thy children, masters of the beasts of the wood, for the
fear of the Red One is upon them all."

As the strength of the winter passed and the snow began to melt, Ang had
a visit from Wang, who lived some days' journey to the east. During the
winter the men of the North saw little of each other. Each family needed
a large hunting ground, and men had not learned to live together. The
distances between the families were so great that when the snow was deep
in the woods months passed in which the isolated families saw no human
beings outside of their own circle. But when the ice broke up and the
snow melted, the men who were on fairly friendly terms paid visits to
each other and exchanged stories of the winter's experiences.

Now Wang approached the cave of Ang with great ceremony. It was neither
good manners nor safe to approach another man's home too suddenly. One
could not be sure of a welcome, and it was always assumed that one who
came suddenly was an enemy. So Wang strolled out on an open spot by the
bank of the river which flowed by the cave of Ang, and acted as if he
did not know that there was another human being within a day's journey.
He tossed stones into the water and watched the ripples. Then he
imitated the call of the wild fowl on the river banks.

For a time Ang ignored him, going about as if he saw no one. But Oma
and Om peered out curiously from the mouth of the cave. At last Ang
wandered down to the river's edge and looked aimlessly everywhere but
where Wang stood. He too tossed many stones into the river. Finally,
apparently satisfied that all the demands of primitive etiquette had
been met, Ang turned to Wang and put his left hand over his heart and
raised his right to the sky. Wang did the same; they were of one blood
and children of the Great Father.

Both dropped their weapons where they stood and went to meet each
other unarmed. Ang and Wang had played together as boys, hunted
together as young men, and taken wives from the same family, but each
spring, after the winter's separation, they met with the same
elaborate ceremony, because it was the man custom.

When the men were seated, Oma and Om came out and sat near by. "A long
winter," said Ang. "A long winter," answered Wang. "Much cold," said
Ang. "Much cold," answered Wang. "The woman and the boy?" asked Wang.
"The woman is well, and the child grows like a bear's cub," replied Ang.

Wang turned and looked at Oma and Om and gave a grunt of surprise. "Why,
they are as fat and sleek as if it was the time of fruits and nuts
instead of the end of the great cold, when even the bear is so thin that
he casts no shadow. Has the eagle carried thee to the Southland on its
wings? Have you found food that cold does not harden? Has Odin fed you?
My woman sits all day at the going in of the cave. She looks old like
the moss-bearded oak. She notices nothing, but talks ever about the
little one whom the Black Robber took; she cares not for the child that
is left, who cries for food like a young kid whose mother the wolves
have eaten. And my strength has not come again. My traps and snares take
nothing, and my arrow is slower than the flying deer."

At this Oma leaped to her feet and brought a piece of dried venison
from the cave and a cake made from a flour of pounded nuts and seeds
and put them before the hungry man. He ate ravenously, like a famished
wolf, in silence, but questioning with eager eye, "How? Why? What?"

And Ang answered the unspoken question: "It was cold, so cold that the
blood in one's body ran slow and became like ice in the stream. The
meat became like stone. The supply of nuts failed. The woman grew
weak. The huntsman from the north took the child by the throat. His
breath came hard. I said, 'He will be taken as the others have been
taken, and the mother will not stay without the child, and I shall be
alone,' and I cried to the Great One, to Odin, the All-Father: 'We are
cold, give us heat; we are hungry, give us food.' I heard no answer;
there was no voice; but the prayer was heard. I sat by the going in of
the cave, making knives of flint, not thinking to use them, but hoping
to forget and cover up the hoarse crying of the child with the noise
of the flints. So I smote two stones together, and the chips fell into
the dry moss at my feet. There was a buzzing noise like that of a bee
in a flower; a little white cloud rose from the moss, then spots of
light like star-flies at night. Red tongues reached out and ate up the
moss and the dry sticks. I saw that the Red One was hungry, and I gave
him more moss and dry wood to eat. He grew big and bright, and his
breath was warm like that of summer, and Oma brought out the child,
and he drove away the barking sickness from the child's throat. Then
we knew that Odin had heard us."

And Ang told Wang how they had learned to cook the venison; how they
had learned to feed the Red One and keep him from wandering. He told
how the fear of him was on all the beasts of the woods, so that not
even the most savage and the most hungry dared stand before him; and
the smallest child was safe within the circle of light.

Then they took the wondering Wang and showed him the sacred fire, gift
of the Keeper of Secrets; they cooked venison over the coals so that
he might taste it. And when Wang started for home Oma gave him a
shoulder of smoked deer's meat and cakes made of acorn meal.

And now a strange thing happened. Pity stirred the heart of Ang. Odin
had helped him in the time of his troubles; why should he not help Wang?
He turned to Oma. "The hunting is good; the stream is full of fish; the
Red One can warm more than three. I will go and bring Wang and his woman
and his child. They can live in the cave which we thought should be
Om's. It is the will of the All-Father that men should live together."

And the men went together and brought Wang's wife and child, and they
made a screen and bark door for the new cave home. Oma taught Suta,
wife of Wang, the mysteries of the fire, and Ang and Wang became the
first neighbors, and that also was one of the gifts of the Revealer,
through the Spirit of the Fire.

As time went on, the story of Ang, the fire-man, spread through all
the north country, and often men came as Wang had done, many day's
journey, through trackless forest, to see the wonderful fire in front
of the cave of Ang. But Ang told to no one but Wang the secret of how
to call the Fire Spirit. To men who were friendly he gave live coals
to carry away in bowls hollowed out of soapstone. Men who were the
enemies of Ang did not dare come near his cave for fear of the red
knives which guarded it.

By and by men began to say to each other, as they went to hunt or sat
about the carefully tended fire, that Ang, the fire-man, must be loved
by Odin, and they came to Ang and said: "Tell us of the Great One,"
and Ang was troubled because he had not heard his voice or seen him.
As he hunted in the stillness of the forest, he pondered: "Why had no
one ever seen the Great Spirit? Or was the sky his face and the sun
and moon his eyes? Why had no one heard his voice? Or was the thunder
his voice? If so, no one understood his language." The more he
thought, the more troubled he became. For days at a time he rarely
spoke and went about as one in a dream, and Oma said to Wang and to
others who came, "The spell of Odin is on him," and they began to look
on Ang with awe and wonder.

One night as Ang was far from home and slept in a cave on a hill-side,
he dreamed that his shadow self left his body and journeyed to a far
country, and there he saw his father and his father's father and the
men of long ago. They all sat about a great fire and beckoned to him
to join their circle. There was a silence like that before the storm,
and each one in the circle looked steadfastly into the fire, which
burned on and on, though no one fed its flames.

As Ang continued to look into the flames, it seemed as if something
was lifted from his eyes and he saw what no one had seen before. The
earth was the body of Odin. His life was the life of all. He had not
one voice like man, but many. He spoke in the thunder, in the voice of
the storm, but also in the song of the birds and in the words of one's
best beloved.

Ang awoke just as the sun was driving the mists from the valley
beneath him, and these words came to his lips as if they were a
message from the dream-world which he had just left: "The wise son of
the All-Father sees him everywhere and hears his voice always." For
the first time in his life Ang saw the beauty of the world at his
feet, and the song of the birds which filled the vibrant air awoke a
new joy of melody and harmony in his soul.

As Oma and Om came out to meet him, he looked at them with newly
opened eyes. How beautiful was the ruddy brown sheen of Oma's hair and
the light in her eyes as she welcomed him! And little Om's eyes
sparkled like dewdrops in the light of early morning, and his laughter
was like the splashing of a brook over its pebbles.

When Ang told Oma of his dream, she answered: "The men were right. The
spell of the Keeper of Secrets was on thee. Thou art a man apart.
Henceforth thou shalt tell men the will of the One who hides himself."

And so Ang became one of the voices of Odin. From far and near men in
trouble and men in doubt came to him, and he spoke words of comfort
and wisdom. And every year before the cold kept men apart they
gathered at the home of Ang. They built a great stone altar, and each
man threw a log upon the fire which Ang had kindled. And they brought
the choicest from their hunting and had a great feast, but they always
gave the best to Ang, and he put it in the fire, saying, "The best we
have is Thine and we are Thine." And when they had feasted and were
satisfied, Ang talked to them of the All-Father, and each year his
words were wiser and more winning.

Before the men departed each took a brand from the fire and marched
about the altar chanting:

      Spirit red, Spirit red,
      Thine hunger has been fed.

      Spirit hot, Spirit hot,
      Forget us not, forget us not

      As the year grows old
      Keep us from the cold!

      In the darkness of the night
      Be our shining light,
      Spirit white, Spirit white!

      --_From "Around the Fire", by Hanford M. Burr.
                             Courtesy of Association Press._




THE BOYHOOD OF A PAINTER


    During the fourteenth and fifteenth centuries there took place,
    first in Italy and afterwards in the other countries of Europe, a
    great change known in history as the Renaissance. The long word
    simply means "rebirth", and the name was given to this period
    because then all the interest in art and literature and music and
    beauty of every kind, which had seemed for centuries to be dead,
    came to life again. Painters and poets and musicians began to fill
    the world with their songs and their pictures. You are going to
    read now the story of one of the most famous of the painters of
    the fifteenth century in Italy.

Leonardo da Vinci, the great painter, was the son of a lawyer in the
beautiful city of Florence. Even as a tiny child he began to show what
profession he was likely to follow, for as soon as he could crawl, he
would scramble away when his mother was not looking, to a place in the
garden where after a shower there was always a pile of mud. He would
sit happily on the ground pinching the mud into some sort of shape,
and the older he grew the more the shape became like that of some
object that he knew. When his mother missed him and came in search of
him, the baby would scream in disgust, and the only way to quiet him
was to play on the lute, an instrument very much like our mandolin.

Ser Piero, Leonardo's father, was very proud of his astonishing little
son, and resolved that he must have the very best teachers that could
be found. So the boy was still very young when his lessons began.
Lessons were no trouble to him, for he quite took away the breath of
all his teachers by his amazing quickness, no matter whether the work
was arithmetic, or languages, or music. Whatever he heard once he
understood and remembered.

Whatever lessons he might be doing, however, Leonardo spent his spare
time in drawing and in modelling figures in clay. His father decided
that this was the talent which the boy ought specially to make use of.
So he took his son to his friend the sculptor Verocchio. When they
reached the studio, Leonardo was given some clay and told to model
anything he liked. He sat down on the floor, and soon finished a tiny
statuette which was so lifelike that it might have been the work of
the sculptor himself. Verocchio was delighted, and declared that he
must have this boy as a pupil at once.

As Leonardo grew older, he began to outstrip his master in the art of
painting, though not in that of sculpture. At one time, it is said,
Verocchio was working on a picture of the baptism of Jesus by John, in
which an angel was represented as standing at one side. He entrusted
the painting of this angel to his pupil. When the master came to look
at the finished figure, he stood gazing in astonished silence. He was
too true an artist not to feel that he and Leonardo had changed
places, and that the boy's painting of the angel was worth all the
rest of the picture. The story goes that Verocchio was so impressed by
the feeling that he could only do badly what Leonardo could do
perfectly that he never painted again.

One of the most interesting tales of the artist's boyhood tells of his
painting of a shield. His father, Ser Piero, had gone to his country
house outside of Florence. One evening a farmer of the neighborhood was
brought to him as he sat in the garden, asking that he might speak with
Ser Piero. He knew the farmer well, for they had often gone fishing
together. "Well, what now, Francisco?" he asked, as the farmer came up
bowing and bearing in his hands a wooden shield. Francisco explained
that he had cut down a fig tree near his house, as it was too old to
bear fruit, and that he had cut out of its wood the shield he was
carrying. He had brought it to Ser Piero, hoping that the master would
have the goodness to get it painted with some design, for he wished to
hang it up in his kitchen as a remembrance of the old tree.

So when Ser Piero next went to Florence he took the shield to his son,
not telling him to whom it belonged, but merely asking him to paint
something on it. Leonardo, examining the piece of wood, found that it
was rough and ill made, and that it would need much finishing before it
would be possible to paint on it. So he held it before the fire till the
fibres were softened and the crookedness straightened out, and then he
planed and polished it. When it was all ready, he began to think about
what the picture on it should be. A look of mischief came into his eyes.

"I know!" he said to himself. "A shield ought to have on it some
frightful thing, so that the very sight of it may make the enemies of
its wearer tremble. The person who sees this shield shall be as
frightened as if he beheld the head of Medusa; only instead of being
turned to stone, he will most likely run away." You see, he did not
know that the shield was to adorn the home of a simple farmer.

Smiling to himself, Leonardo went out into the fields and hunted about
until he had collected a large number of strange creatures, hedgehogs,
lizards, locusts, snakes, and many others. These he carried home and
locked up in the room he used for a workshop, where no one was allowed
to enter but himself. Using the ugly things as models, he began to
paint on the shield a monster formed out of all the creatures, with
eyes and legs everywhere. It was a long time before he succeeded in
making anything frightful enough to suit him. Again and again he
erased his work and did it over, trying to combine his creatures
differently. But at last something so terrible stared him in the face
that he almost felt frightened himself.

"The monster is ready," he said with a laugh; "but I must find a
background fitting for him."

So he painted as a background a black and narrow cavern, at whose mouth
stood the shapeless creature he had made, all eyes, all legs, all savage
jaws. Flames poured from it on every side, and a cloud of vapor rose
upwards from its many nostrils. After days of hard work, Leonardo at
last went to his father and told him he had finished the shield, which
he hoped would please its owner. Ser Piero came at once, and was led
into the partly darkened studio, where in just the right light the
shield stood on an easel. But no sooner was the father within the room
than he turned to fly, so terrible was the object that met his gaze.

"It will do, I see," said Leonardo. "I wanted to make something so
dreadful that everyone would shiver with fear at the sight of it. Take
it away with you now; but I had better wrap it up, or you will
frighten people out of their wits as you go along."

Ser Piero took the shield and went away without telling his son
anything about old Francisco. But he was quite sure that the farmer
would not like the picture, and that it was not at all suitable to
hang in a farmhouse kitchen; and more than that, he felt it was far
too wonderful a painting to fall into the hands of a peasant and never
be famous. So in order to save the old man's feelings, he went to a
shop and bought a shield of the same size as the first one, which had
on it a device of a heart pierced by an arrow; and the next time he
went to the country he sent for Francisco to come and get it.

"Oh, your Excellency, how beautiful!" cried the old man in delight, as
he received his shield after his long waiting.

"I thought you would be pleased," answered Ser Piero, thinking to
himself how frightened rather than pleased the farmer would have been
with Leonardo's monster.

          --_Adapted from "The Strange Story Book", by Andrew Lang._


QUESTIONS

    This selection consists of three parts. Where does each part end?
    Write an appropriate title for each part.




CIVIL DEATH


    All should begin reading at the same moment. Can you after one
    minute give a good account of the meaning of _civil death_?

According to law a person may be alive and enjoying good health and
still under certain conditions be dead to all his civil rights. In
some states, as New York, this is true of one sentenced to the state
prison for life; all his civil rights are taken from him and to the
world he is as dead. In all states, absence for a specified time
without any knowledge of the whereabouts of the individual renders him
legally dead to his civil rights; this period is in most states seven
years. Supposing A, living in Wisconsin, should leave his home and
family and go to Alaska. If at the end of seven years no word had been
received from him, the law assumes him to be dead; his estate can be
settled by probate, provided the family consents, and his wife may
legally marry again. Should he afterwards return he could not compel
the court to restore his estate or family; these are legally
forfeited, beyond all redress.

                                      --_From "The World Book".
                                    Courtesy of W. F. Quarrie & Co._




OTELNE, THE INDIAN OF THE GREAT NORTH WOODS


    In the "movies" you have surely seen pictures of the Far
    North--Alaska or northern Canada, or even the northern United
    States--with the brave, rough men who live about mining or lumber
    camps or trading posts. In many of the pictures, you remember,
    there have been Indians. Here is an account of the life of those
    Indians when they are away from the trading posts.

    At the end of this story you will find an outline partly made out.
    After you have read the story through, compare it with the
    outline, and fill in the topics left blank under _a_, _b_, _c_,
    etc. You may add more sub-topics if you think you need them.

When white men first came to America, they thought it was a country
called India of which they had often heard. So they called the people
they found here Indians. They also called them red men, because they
were about the color of a copper cent that has been carried a while.
These red men did not have many tools and other things to make it easy
to work and to live. They had no horses, cows, pigs, sheep or
chickens, so they had to catch wild animals for food. They had no guns
nor rifles, but made spears and bows and arrows with which to kill
their game. They had no iron. Their arrow points and spear heads were
of sharpened stone, as was a heavy tool they made something like our
hatchet. It was a very dull, poor hatchet. They had no cloth to make
clothes. Instead, they used the skins of wild animals they caught or
shot with their bows and arrows. Instead of houses they had tents or
wigwams made of skins. The Indians thought the white men's things were
wonderful, and they were much pleased to trade furs and game for
blankets, guns, powder, and bullets. The Indians like bright, pretty
things, so they were very fond of trading for beads to make necklaces
and ornaments for their suits.

After a long time, the white men took most of the Indians' country,
but there is still a large part of North America where there are more
Indians than white men. This is far to the north in Canada, in a wide
strip between the towns and farms of the white men and the cold, snow
land of the Eskimos. The soldiers who have been to the Great War tell
us much about England, France, and Germany; but the country where the
Indians still have their hunting grounds is larger than all of these
countries put together. The region is covered with evergreen forests,
a great silent land of deep snow and trees and cold. It is too cold
and rocky for the white man to make farms, so he has not cut down the
trees. There are no cities nor houses, nothing but forests where the
Indian hunts game and lives in his tent as he has always lived.

To trade with these Indians, the white men have built stores in the
edge of the Indian country. They are called Posts--Trading Posts. When
the warm days of June come and the ice is all melted, the keeper of a
Post begins to look up the river watching for canoes to come around
the bend. At last he sees one. In front sits an Indian woman paddling,
and in the stern of the canoe sits Otelne, her husband, paddling and
also steering. They are coming to the post to trade. In the middle of
the boat are a boy, a girl, a brand new baby, and a dog. The boy's
name is Akusk (arrow); the girl's name is Wabogum (flower). The baby's
name is Wabshish (little white hare). He is tied to a board to keep
him safe and warm. The canoe contains one more thing, very precious, a
big bundle of fur skins. This is the wages of a whole year, the result
of a hard winter's work in the forest.

The keeper of the Post shakes hands with Otelne. Otelne opens the bale
of furs, and the first afternoon he and his wife trade a few muskrat
skins for some flour, beans, bacon and canned peaches. Then the Indians
camp and have a feast. Other canoes come down the river bringing other
families until the post becomes a great picnic ground. They talk over
the happenings of the winter, of getting lost in storms, of upsetting
their canoes, of falling through the ice, of the bears they have caught,
and the wolves that have chased them. They wonder what has happened to
the Indians who do not come back. They have canoe races and the
different families, or tribes, play match games of la crosse. This game,
which the white men learned from the Indians, is now the national game
of Canada, as baseball is of the United States.

In August the trading is over, and the Indians start back to the hunting
grounds for another year's work. The canoe is loaded full. Instead of
the bale of furs, Otelne has in his canoe a new tent, a sheet-iron
stove, some stove pipe, twenty-five steel traps, a rifle, one thousand
cartridges, fish hooks and fishing line, a wood saw, knives, axes,
buckets, blankets, and a lot of white men's clothes. He did not buy any
shoes because he would rather have the moccasins he makes himself.

It is hard work to paddle the heavy load up the river against the
swift current. Presently they hear the roaring noise of a waterfall
where the stream jumps down over some rocks. The canoe cannot pass
this, so they all get out and carry the canoe and all its load, bit by
bit, along a little path that leads to the quiet water above the
falls. Here they load the canoe again and paddle on, but they soon
come to another carrying place, or portage as it is called, and have
to unload again. They are not afraid to leave their belongings while
they go back to the foot of the falls, for no Indian would think of
stealing anything he found in this way.

You can see why the Indians do not use white men's boats, for no white
man's boat is as light as the birch bark canoe. You can also see why
they do not take much food from the post. They cannot carry it and all
they need for camping and hunting too. They must have the tent and
traps, so they take only food enough to last until they get far enough
from the post to find game.

After a few days' journey they leave the main stream and go up one of
its branches. Here they come to a place where the stream widens into a
lake. The water is very still, and as the fishing is good, the Indians
camp here for a week and rest. There are so many wolves and wild cats
in the woods that Otelne puts up the tent on a little island out in
the middle of the lake.

For many days they go on upstream. Over and over again they have to
carry their goods around rapids. The dark branches of spruce, hemlock,
and fir trees often hang over the stream.

Trout, pickerel, and other fish dart in behind the rocks around which
the currents flow. Sometimes a muskrat, a beaver, or an otter swims
quickly into his hole in the bank. But sometimes the rifle is too
quick for him and the Indians have fresh meat for supper. Each day
they pass the mouths of little streams and the main stream gets
smaller and smaller, till at last it is hardly more than a brook.

They are busy nearly all the time carrying their supplies around rapids.
At last they can go no farther in the canoe because the stream has grown
too small and rocky. To go still farther in their direction, the Indians
must find a stream which flows the opposite way. To find this stream
they must cross a hill, because, you see, the water will run down the
hill on the other side, gathering more and more water, and getting
larger as it goes. This water parting is called a divide, or watershed.
There is such a divide at the top of every mountain range. For instance,
all the rivers flowing east of the Alleghany Mountains run east to the
Atlantic Ocean; all those flowing west run finally into the Mississippi
River. So the Alleghany Mountains are a divide.

Otelne knows of one place where the streams bend in such a way that he
can, in an hour, carry his canoe from canoe-water on one stream to
canoe-water on the stream over the hill. The Indians know where these
good portages are just as country boys know where they can catch
rabbits, or as city boys know where they can find a place to play. For
many days, Otelne steers his canoe down stream, camping on the bank
each night.

In late October the first snow falls. They camp beside the lonely
river, and the fur hunting begins in earnest. Otelne fixes a round of
traps. He starts away from his tent and makes a large circle in the
forest, fixing a round of traps as he goes. When he cannot see the
sun, he keeps his direction through the forest by noticing the moss
which grows only on the shady side of a tree trunk. He can keep his
direction at night, too, if he can see the stars, for long before
white men came, Indians had noticed that one star always seemed to be
in the same place. They call it the "Great Star". We call it the
"North Star". The pointers in the Great Dipper show us where it is.
Otelne watches them every clear night.

Twenty miles he travels, setting his traps wherever he sees in the
snow the tracks of the animals he wants. He drags sweet-smelling meat
along the snow, hoping that animals crossing this trail will follow
it to the traps. After a day or two, he goes around again, putting
fresh bait on his traps and taking out the animals he has caught.
After several rounds, he finds that game is getting scarce here, so he
and his wife put the tent and all their things on two toboggans
(sleds), tuck the baby down in the blankets, and trudge all day
through the forest. When night comes they put up the tent on the snow,
cut evergreen boughs to make a thick carpet, and build a fire in the
sheet-iron stove. All winter long they move every two or three weeks,
finding a new camp whenever a new hunting-ground is necessary.

[Illustration: OTELNE WALKS ON SNOW SHOES.]

Can you see Otelne as he visits his traps? He walks on snow shoes to
keep from sinking into the snow which is now three feet deep. His big
dog pulls a toboggan on which is an axe, a package of raw smoked meat
in a little box of birch bark, and a roll of blankets. Akusk, the
twelve-year-old boy, goes with his father, from whom he learns all the
Indian arts and the ways of the animals in the forest. It is all the
schooling he ever gets. How would you like to get your schooling that
way?

The first trap is empty and the bait gone, so Otelne puts fresh bait in
it. The second trap holds a fine mink, dead and frozen stiff. His skin
is worth ten dollars. The fifth trap has in it the foot of a muskrat and
some scraps of fur lying around. Some hungry animal has raided the trap,
and the big dog, Wagush, smells the trail, whines, and jumps about so
that he upsets the sled. Otelne turns him loose, and away he goes
yelping through the forest, until at last his regular baying tells
Otelne that he has treed the animal. It is a lynx. The rifle brings him
down and he is placed on the sled along with the mink.

At nightfall, ten miles from the tent, they come to a shelter made of
boughs. When Otelne set the traps, he built this shelter to keep off
the cold wind, for he knew he would have to sleep here on bitter cold
nights. He builds a roaring fire in front of the shelter. They eat the
mink, give the scraps and bones to Wagush, wrap up in rabbit-skin
blankets, and lie down with their heads toward the shelter, their feet
toward the fire, and the dog beside them. Two hours later Wagush wakes
them with a growl. Two wolves are prowling around in the spruce trees,
but wolves fear fire, so Otelne throws on more wood and they slink away.
At dawn the Indians are up and on their way to the rest of the traps.

They kill a bear. This is great luck, for now they have meat enough to
last for weeks. Even with the help of Akusk and Wagush, Otelne has
hard work to drag that bear on the toboggan six miles back to the
tent. All three are so weary they have to rest all the next day.
Sulian, the mother, who skins the animals, takes care of the skins and
smokes the meat. That is her part of the work. You may be sure that
the children are glad to see their father and brother come back, for
there isn't another family within twenty miles, nor is there one white
man within a hundred miles.

Day after day, through the long, cold winter, Otelne and his family
hunt the fur that they can trade for the white man's tools and
supplies. When the trapping season ends, Otelne is four hundred miles
from the post, and it takes many weeks of canoeing to get back there
for summer trading. They carry with them a bundle of smoked meat to
eat where game or fish cannot be found.

Each year Indian families go out for furs and never come back. The
canoe may upset and swift water carry away all their things. Sometimes
they get lost and freeze to death in terrible blizzards. The hunting
may be bad, so they starve. The father may be drowned or break his
leg and freeze to death away out in the forest. Then the mother cannot
get enough game to keep the children alive, so they all starve and the
wolves eat them. The fur gatherer has a hard, cold life in the far
North, but it is better than it used to be before he traded with the
white man and got guns, knives, traps, and fish hooks.

When all goes well with the fur gatherer, the boys and girls in the
little tent play many games. They are fond of checkers. To make a
checker-board, they split a piece of wood out of a log, smooth one side
of it with an axe, mark it into squares with a knife, and blacken some
of them with charcoal. For men, they saw off short pieces of a stick as
thick as your thumb. Jackstraws is another favorite game, but the straws
are tiny canoe paddles, knives, guns, snowshoes, snow shovels, and
canoes, all whittled out of wood, making a queer looking pile. They have
one campfire game in which they shake up eight disks of bone in a bowl.
This game is so hard to learn that my friend, Professor Speck, spent
three days learning it, and the rules for counting the score would fill
three pages of a book like this one. This game, so hard to learn, shows
that the Indian would be as smart as the white man if he had a chance to
learn the same things. White men who hunt with the Indians like them and
say they are good companions.

The white men from the trading posts bring the furs down to our great
cities, where they are made into mittens and muffs and coats and
ladies' furs, and the next winter, while the Indian is back in the
forest following his traps, we can see people wearing the furs in
almost any part of the United States.

                                           --_J. Russell Smith.
                             Courtesy of The John C. Winston Co._


OUTLINE

    1. Early life of the Indians.

    2. Their present home in the North.

    3. A visit to the trading post.
      (_a_) Who came
      (_b_)
      (_c_)

    4. The Indians' return.
      (_a_)
      (_b_)

    5. The life of a trapper.
      (_a_)
      (_b_)
      (_c_)
      (_d_)

    6. Games.


QUESTIONS

    1. The setting of a story tells the place of the story, when it
    occurs, and who are the actors. Your teacher will ask one of you to
    give the setting of "Otelne, the Indian of the Great North Woods".

    2. If you were an Indian boy or girl, how do you think you would
    feel during the winter about the summer trip to the trading post?

    3. How does the trading post help the Indians? Make a list of things
    they buy. What can you think of that the author of the story did not
    mention? What else besides the cost will the Indians have to think
    of when deciding whether or not to buy anything?

    4. Tell about the trip back into the woods after visiting the post.
    Why do they go so far?

    5. Tell the story of a visit to the trap with Otelne as if you were
    Akusk. Don't be afraid to put in probable incidents not told by the
    author.




WHICH IS RIGHT?


    Arrange your papers with your name and grade on the first line;
    place the date and your room or teacher's name on the second line;
    leave the third line blank, and, beginning with the fourth line,
    number the lines from one to seven. This exercise is to help you
    to read quickly and accurately. See that you understand all the
    directions in each problem before you try to carry them out. On
    the other hand, work as quickly as you can.

    1.            How am I to sing your praise
                  Happy chimney-corner days,
                  Sitting safe in nursery nooks
                  Reading picture story-books.
                    (_Stevenson--"Picture Books in Winter."_)

    If this is a picture of play, draw a horseshoe on the first line.
    If it is a picture of quiet, draw a hitching-post.

    2. The long war with the Danes had left England without law and
    order. Trade and commerce had almost ceased to exist. The
    monasteries and churches were in ruins and the schools nearly all
    destroyed.

    Which of the words below best states the cause of this
    destruction?

                          Famine
                          Trade
                          War
                          Disease

    Write your answer on the _second_ line.

    3. The axle in breaking had thrown the full weight of the heavy
    cart upon the body of the unconscious boy. Although there were
    many willing hands ready to help, none could lift the weight. Jean
    saw the crowd and hurried to the spot. Bracing himself, he placed
    his massive shoulders against the side of the cart. Slowly but
    surely it lifted and the child was drawn safely from beneath.

    Which of the following words best describes Jean?

          kind  thoughtful  strong  brave  good

    Write your answer on the third line.

    4. If you think after reading this paragraph that it is easy to
    land a trout, write the word _hard_ on the fourth line. If you
    think it is hard, write the word _easy_ there.

    Trout fishing in mountain streams is said to be the greatest sport
    in the world. When a trout has been caught on the hook, it is
    usually a question of which will tire first, the fish or the
    fisherman. Often the fish will get the best of it and the
    fisherman be forced to go home with a broken rod and no fish for
    his pains.

    5. If in the following words _c_ is found with _h_ more often than
    with _r_, write _church_ on the fifth line. But if _c_ is found
    more often with _r_, write _crown_ there.

                                checkers
                                cruller
                                bench
                                candy
                                crunch

    6. On the sixth line write any words in this sentence which have
    the same number of letters as the fourth word of the sentence, but
    which have no letters in common.

    7. If a soldier wears out a pair of shoes every month, how many
    pairs of shoes will be needed for a regiment of 3000 men for a
    year of service?

    Write the answer on the seventh line.




"VERDUN BELLE"


    This is the story of Verdun Belle, a trench dog, who adopted a
    young leatherneck, followed him to the edge of the battle around
    Chateau-Thierry and was waiting for him when they carried him out.
    It is a true story.

Belle was a setter, shabby white, with great splotches of chocolate
brown in her coat. Her ears were brown and silken. She was under size
and would not have stood a chance among the haughtier breeds shown in
splendor at dog shows in Madison Square Garden. But the marines in the
regiment to which she attached herself thought there never was a dog
like her since the world began.

No one in the regiment knew whence she came or why. When she joined
the outfit in a _sector_ near Verdun, she singled out one of the
privates as her very own and attached herself to him for the duration
of the war. The young marine would talk long and earnestly to her, and
every one declared that Belle could "_comprè_" English.

She used to curl up at his feet when he slept or follow silently to
keep him company at the _listening post_. She would sit hopefully in
front of him whenever he settled down with his laden _mess kit_, which
the cooks always heaped extra high in honor of Belle.

Belle was as used to war as the most weather-beaten French _poilu_. The
tremble of the ground did not disturb her and the whining whir of the
shells overhead only made her twitch and wrinkle her nose in her sleep.
She was trench-broken. You could have put a plate of savory pork chops
on the _parapet_ and nothing would have induced her to go after them.

She weathered many a gas attack. Her master contrived a protection for
her by cutting down and twisting a French gas mask. At first this sack
over her nose irritated her tremendously; but once, when she was trying
to claw it off with her forepaws, she got a whiff of the poisoned air.
Then a great light dawned on Belle; and after that, at the first alarm,
she would race for her mask. You could not have taken it from her until
her master's pat on her back told her everything was all right.

In the middle of May, Belle presented a proud but not particularly
astonished regiment with nine confused and wriggling puppies,
black-and-white, or, like the mother, brown-and-white, and possessed
of immense appetites. Seven of these were alive and kicking when the
order came for the regiment to pull up stakes and speed across France
to help stem the German tide north of the troubled Marne.

In the rush and hubbub of marching orders Belle and her brood were
forgotten by every one but the young marine. It never once entered his
head to leave her or her pups behind. Somewhere he found a market
basket and tumbled the litter into that. He could carry the pups, he
explained, and the mother dog would trot at his heels.

Now the amount of hardware a marine is expected to carry on the march is
carefully calculated to the maximum strength of the average soldier, yet
this leatherneck found extra muscle somewhere for his precious basket.
If it came to the worst, he thought, he could _jettison_ his pack. It
was not very clear in his mind what he would do with his charges during
a battle, but he trusted to luck and Verdun Belle.

For twenty-five miles he carried his burden along the parched French
highway. No one wanted to jeer him out of it, nor could have if they
would. When there followed a long advance by _camion_, he yielded his
place to the basket of wriggling pups, while he himself hung on the
tail-board.

But there was more hiking, and the basket proved too much. It seemed
that the battle line was somewhere far off. Solemnly the young marine
killed four of the puppies, discarded the basket and slipped the other
three into his shirt. Thus he trudged on his way, carrying those
three, pouched in forest green, as a kangaroo carries its young, while
the mother dog trotted trustingly behind.

One night he found that one of the black-and-white pups was dead. The
road by this time was black with hurrying troops, lumbering _lorries_
jostling the line of advancing ambulances, and dust-gray columns of
soldiers moving on as far ahead and as far behind as the eye could
see. Passing silently in the other direction was the desolate
procession of refugees from the invaded countryside. Now and then a
herd of cows or a little cluster of fugitives from some desolated
village, trundling their most cherished possessions in wheelbarrows
and baby carts, would cause an eddy in the traffic.

Somewhere in this crowding and confusion Belle was lost. In the
morning there was no sign of her, and the young marine did not know
what to do. He begged a cup of milk from an old French woman, and with
the eye dropper from his kit he tried to feed the two pups. It did not
work well. Faintly the wind brought down the valley from far ahead the
sound of cannon. Soon he would be in the thick of it, and there was no
Belle to care for the pups.

Two ambulances of a field hospital were passing in the unending
caravan. A lieutenant who looked human was in the front seat of one of
them, a sergeant beside him. The _leatherneck_ ran up to them, blurted
out his story, gazed at them imploringly and thrust the puppies into
their hands. "Take good care of them," he said; "I don't suppose I'll
ever see them again."

And he was gone. A little later in the day that field hospital was
pitching its tents and setting up its kitchens and tables in a deserted
farm. Amid all the hurry of preparation for the big job ahead they found
time to worry about those pups. The problem was food. _Corned willy_ was
tried and found wanting. Finally the first sergeant hunted up a
farm-bred private, and the two of them spent that evening chasing four
nervous and distrustful cows around a pasture trying vainly to capture
enough milk to provide supper for the new members of the hospital staff.

Next morning the problem was still unsolved. But it was solved that
evening. For that evening a fresh contingent of marines trooped by the
farm and in their wake, tired, anxious, but undiscouraged, was Verdun
Belle. Six miles back two days before she had lost her master, and
until she should find him again she evidently had thought that any
marine was better than none.

The troops did not halt at the farm, but Belle did. At the gate she
stopped dead in her tracks, drew in her lolling tongue, sniffed
inquiringly at the evening air, and, like a flash, a white streak
along the drive, she raced to the distant tree, where, on a pile of
discarded dressings in the shade, the pups were sleeping.

All the corps men stopped work and stood around and marveled. For the
onlooker it was such a family reunion as warms the heart. For the
worried mess sergeant it was a great relief. For the pups it was a
mess call, clear and unmistakable.

So with renewed faith in her heart and only one worry left in her
mind, Verdun Belle and her puppies settled down with this field
hospital. When the next day the reach of the artillery made it
advisable to move down the valley to the shelter of a fine hillside
chateau, you may be sure that room was made in the first ambulance
for the _three_ wanderers.

[Illustration: TWO COTS WERE SHOVED TOGETHER UNDER A SPREADING TREE]

In a grove of trees beside the house the tents were pitched and the cots
of the expected patients ranged side by side. The wounded came--came
hour after hour in steady streams, and the boys of the hospital worked
on them night and day. They could not possibly keep track of all the
cases, but there was one who did. Always a mistress of the art of
keeping out from under foot, very quietly Belle hung around and
investigated each ambulance that turned in from the main road and backed
up with its load of pain to the door of the receiving room.

Then one evening they lifted out a young marine, listless in the half
stupor of shell shock. To the busy workers he was just Case No. Such
and Such, but there was no need to tell any one who saw the wild
rejoicing of the dog that Belle had found her own at last.

The first consciousness her master had of his new surroundings was the
feel of her rough pink tongue licking the dust from his face. And
those who passed that way on the following Sunday found two cots
shoved together in the kindly shade of a spreading tree. On one the
mother dog lay, contented with her puppies. Fast asleep on the other,
his arm thrown out so that one grimy hand could touch one silken ear,
lay the young marine. Before long they would have to ship him on to
the _evacuation hospital_, on from there to the base hospital, on and
on and on. It was not very clear to anyone how another separation
could be prevented. It was a perplexing question, but they knew in
their hearts that they could safely leave the answer to some one else.
They could leave it to Verdun Belle.

                                         --"_Stars and Stripes._"


    1. _Comprè_ and _poilu_ are "soldiers' French". From the way they
    are used here, what do you think they mean?

    2. The following are war terms. See if you can find out, if you do
    not already know, what they mean.

             sector             camion
             listening post     lorries
             mess kit           leatherneck
             parapet            corned willy
             jettison           evacuation hospital

    3. Why do you like the young marine?

    4. How do you suppose Belle solved the problem left to her?

    5. Does the story make you feel amused or sad?




ANOTHER NONSENSE TEST


    You will need only a small piece of paper in order to solve this
    test. Read the directions very carefully and do nothing but what
    they say.

At the top of your paper write "east" no matter whether the sun rises
there or not. Now if Christmas comes in December put a cross in the
center of your paper, but if not, put a circle there or else a square.

At the bottom of your paper write a wrong answer to the first of the
following questions:

1. When did Columbus discover America?

2. Who invented the electric light?

Do not answer the second question unless you have skipped the first.
But if you know the answer sign your own name in the lower right hand
corner of your paper, but if you do not know, sign in the lower left
hand corner.




CAN YOU UNDERSTAND RELATIONSHIP?


    This drill will test your ability to recognize easily the
    relationships between words and between things, an ability very
    necessary for both reading and thinking.

1. Write your name on the first line of your paper, and your grade on
the second at the right. Beginning with the fourth line write the
figures 1 to 10.

2. In each group below, the first two words have a certain connection
in meaning. When you see this relationship between the first two
words, you can find among the five words that follow two other words
that bear the same relationship. Thus, in group one, the SAW is a tool
used by the CARPENTER. Now if you look among the word that follow, you
will see that the words FARMER and PLOUGH are connected in meaning in
the same way. Write these four words after figure 1:

              1. CARPENTER  SAW  farmer  plough

3. Look at group two. HEN and CHICKS are words that have a certain
relation, and similarly, of the five words that follow, CAT and
KITTENS are the only two that are connected in the same way. Write
these four words after figure 2:

              2. HEN  CHICKS  cat  kittens

4. Complete the exercise by selecting the two words in each remaining
group that are related in meaning in the same way that the given words
are related in meaning. When finished, wait quietly for the others.

  1. CARPENTER, SAW (farmer, sky, plough, trees, field).
  2. HEN, CHICKS (corn, feed, cat, milk, kittens).
  3. AUTOMOBILE, GARAGE (wheel, horse, owner, stable, door).
  4. COW, MILK (sheep, pasture, grass, fence, wool).
  5. AEROPLANE, AIR (sail, pilot, ship, sea, wind).
  6. RAIL, STEEL (locomotive, window, house, door, glass).
  7. SPOOL, THREAD (shelf, librarian, books, picture, print).
  8. POET, POEM (verse, rhyme, brush, artist, picture).
  9. WOOL, SWEATER (knit, silk, dress, seamstress, scissors).
  10. SUMMER, RAIN (winter, sled, December, snow, overcoat).




CHARADES


    Did you ever play charades? Here is a brief statement about
    charades taken from a cyclopedia. See if you can read it through
    in a half-minute so as to give the substance of it.

A charade is a popular form of riddle, the answer to which is a word
of several syllables, each of which alone is in itself a word. Each
syllable, taken as a word, is described, and finally a puzzling
definition of the whole word is given. The following is an example:
"Some one threw my first and second at me, and it hit my third. It did
not hurt me, for it was only a branch of my whole." The answer is
_Mistletoe_. A girl, sitting under a high table, would suggest the
word _misunderstand_.

A pleasing charade requiring more thought is in the form of a rhyme,
as--

      "My first is a circle, my second a cross;
       If you meet with my whole, look out for a toss."

The answer is _Ox_. Then, too, charades are often presented in the
form of little plays, each syllable representing a scene. They are
then called _acting_ charades. This form of amusement is much in vogue
on social occasions. It is thought the name was derived from a French
word meaning _idle talk_, which in its turn was derived from Spanish
words meaning _speech and actions of a clown_.

                                      --_From "The World Book".
                                      Courtesy of W. F. Quarrie & Co._




GENERAL PERSHING'S WELCOME HOME


    More people, perhaps, read a newspaper every day than read any
    other form of print. At the breakfast table, in the trolley car,
    or in the railroad train, morning and evening you see readers
    buried in their newspapers. Many people read at least two papers a
    day, and many people read very little else. But unfortunately a
    great many of these people read the newspapers very hastily, and
    sometimes they fail to grasp the real sense of the column beneath
    the catchy headlines. They need practice in the rapid and
    intelligent reading of a news article.

    You may begin to have that sort of practice now, if you will read
    rapidly the following newspaper account of the homecoming, in
    September, 1919, of one of America's greatest soldiers, and be
    able to answer the following questions. Your teacher may ask each
    row of pupils to be responsible for two or three of the questions.

    1. When and where and from what ship did General Pershing land?

    2. Who else came home on that ship?

    3. How often and where did General Pershing reply to addresses of
    welcome?

    4. What important person made the chief address of welcome?

    5. What proof of the nation's gratitude was given to General
    Pershing?

    6. Where would you like best to have been among the crowd of
    onlookers?

    7. Do you think you would like General Pershing if you were one of
    his officers or soldiers? Why?

    8. What was the most important thing that General Pershing said?

    9. On whom was the joke, General March or the sentry?


  PERSHING TAKES
     HONORS IN NAME
        OF HERO DEAD

       *       *       *       *       *

  Tribute Belongs to Men Who
   Fell, General Tells Cheering
       Throng in New York

       *       *       *       *       *

  WELCOME ECLIPSES ANY
     EVER STAGED IN CITY

       *       *       *       *       *

  Thousands Await Through the Night
      to Greet America's "Jack"
           on Return Home

       *       *       *       *       *

WILSON SENDS MESSAGE

       *       *       *       *       *

New York, Sept. 8.--General John J. Pershing, commander-in-chief of
the A. E. F., came home from France today and was welcomed in a manner
which fully conveyed to him the gratitude and pride with which the
American people estimate his services in leading the nation's greatest
army to victory in the world's greatest war.

From early morning, when the sea monster Leviathan arrived in the
Hudson--a shadowy giant in a misty sunrise--until the middle of the
afternoon, when the general insisted upon an intermission for a
much-needed nap, he was the central figure of a demonstration which
for brilliancy and gayety has rarely been equaled in the history of
New York City.

The presentation of his permanent commission as a full general in the
regular army, accomplished by the secretary of war ten minutes after
the general had stepped upon American soil, while perhaps the most
important tribute, was merely an auspicious beginning of what was to
follow. A river pageant on the Hudson from Hoboken to the Battery, a
triumphal march through surging crowds on Broadway and Fifth Avenue,
exercises at the City Hall, during which he was given the freedom of
the city for four days; a reception, a luncheon, and in the evening a
dinner and a theatre party in his honor--all this was part of the
crowded and colorful program. None was surprised, therefore, when the
distinguished guest good-naturedly remarked that if this continued
long he would "almost wish that the war had gone on."


PLEASED TO BE BACK HOME

The general accepted it all quietly and simply. He was pleased to be
home. He could not conceal that, but neither could he conceal the fact
that he would have preferred to come home without so much fuss being
stirred up about it. He bowed, nodded, waved, or smiled acknowledgment
of the cheering. The Pershing smile, incidentally, will without doubt
take its place among the famous smiles of America. All great Americans
seem to have a characteristic smile. There was the Roosevelt smile,
and there are the Taft and Wilson smiles, and now there is the
Pershing smile, quite as striking as any of the others. The people
liked it immensely; but more than that they liked the brief responses
made by the general to the eulogies delivered by the secretary of war,
the governor of New York, and the mayor of the city. He accepted all
of them--with a reservation, that reservation being that he accepted
them not for himself but for the boys who went over and fought and
died for the flag. It was this that convinced the people that Pershing
was truly a great man.

The Leviathan, bringing, besides General Pershing, his picked
"composite regiment" and what is left of the first division, "the
first to go over and the last to come back," tied up at Hoboken at
9:55 o'clock, with the commander-in-chief of the overseas forces on
top of its pilot house. Assembled on the pier were nearly 1000 welfare
workers, soldiers and guests.


GENERAL MARCH HELD UP

The first to board the vessel as soon as the gangplank had been
lowered, with the exception of two naval officers, was a party of
newspaper correspondents and photographers. At this point there was an
amusing incident that somewhat relieved the anxiety and general
excitement. A sentry, seeing the correspondents and photographers
making ready for an immediate rush on the vessel, raised his voice in
protest. General Peyton C. March, chief of staff, stepped forward with
assurances that everything would be all right. But the sentry,
sticking to his point with surprising determination, in view of the
high rank he was addressing, would not be assured, and those who were
listening understood his audacity when he stood up straight in front
of General March and declared:

"But, sir, I have just been talking with the secretary of war, sir,
and he says, sir, that no one can go aboard."

General March was as surprised as any one else. Having no reply to
make to a declaration of that kind, despite his rank, he sought out
the secretary of war and soon returned saying he had "straightened
things out." Then came the laugh.

"Very well, sir," said the sentry, saluting nervously, and by this
time in perspiration from excitement. "B-b-b-but I have only eight
more days to go and I-I-I naturally d-don't want to get into any
j-j-am with the secretary of w-war, sir."


MET BY SECRETARY BAKER

As he stepped from the gangplank General Pershing was greeted by
Secretary Baker and escorted to an open space, where a small dais had
been erected in front of a group of chairs. The chairs were occupied
by the guests and other staff officers, while Secretary Baker and the
guest of honor took seats on the platform.

"Here there is to be a momentary halt in the day's program to extend
to General Pershing a word of greeting and a message from the
President," said Mr. Baker, opening the first ceremony of the
general's official welcome. "This incident in today's events is to be
brief, and immediately after its conclusion General Pershing will
become the guest of the city of New York."


COMMISSION IS PRESENTED

Then it was that the secretary presented the hero with his permanent
commission as general in the regular army, after which he delivered a
brief address, closing with a message of greeting from President Wilson.


PERSHING REMEMBERS DEAD

Secretary Baker then presented General Pershing, who was received with
applause that lasted two minutes.

"If these compliments and tributes are to continue for long," declared
the General, "I am sure that I shall wish that the war had continued. To
say that I am happy would be a waste of words. I cannot describe the
emotions that fill my heart. You have been very complimentary to me, Mr.
Secretary, more complimentary than I deserve. I can only reply by saying
that the war was won by the united effort of the nation. The army abroad
felt the inspiration that came from the effort of the people at home.
The morale of an army is dependent upon the morale of the people behind
it; and I am proud to say that the morale of the American people never
gave us cause for anything but inspiration.

"On an occasion of this kind we must not forget the fellows who faced a
well-trained enemy with only partial training themselves. It is to them
we owe the tribute. I hope their graves may be fittingly decorated as an
eternal shrine to be visited by Americans in the future as a place where
the lesson of patriotism may always be learned anew.

"I wish to take this occasion to thank the people, the President, and
you, Mr. Secretary, for the confidence that was placed in me. This
confidence made the complex task in France inestimably more easy."

Then came the street procession to City Hall Park, through the
"Broadway Canyon."

People were crowded five and six deep on both sides of the street;
from hundreds of office windows high in the air there was a veritable
snowfall of confetti and torn bits of paper; miles and miles of ticker
tape thrown promiscuously from the same windows became interlaced and
tangled in midair, giving the highway the aspect of a street in
another, more fantastic world; airplanes glided as low as possible
over the thoroughfare; while whistles and automobile horns blew and
church bells rang for an hour without intermission.

The crowds unleashed reserves of enthusiasm that had been held in
restraint by recent strikes and other sober concerns. "Here comes
Pershing!" "Hurrah for Black Jack!" "We're glad to see you back!"


OFFICIALLY WELCOMED BY CITY

At City Hall General Pershing and the members of his staff, who
accompanied him on the Leviathan, were officially welcomed by the
city. After the addresses of the mayor and the governor they were
turned over to a committee of citizens, headed by Rodman Wanamaker.
Here the general made his second address since returning from France,
and, as before, emphasized what seemed to be his central thought--that
he accepts the praise and the adulation for and in the name of those
who fought and died.

After the City Hall exercises the procession was resumed, this time on
Fifth Avenue.

Arriving at the Waldorf, the general retired for a nap, apologizing,
but declaring that he needed rest badly.

A dinner tonight, followed by a theatre party at the Hippodrome, both
given by the Rodman Wanamaker committee, ended the day's celebration.

                                --_Courtesy The Philadelphia
                                                "Public Ledger."_




THE FAIRIES ON THE GUMP


    Long, long ago the original inhabitants of England were driven by
    their enemies to take refuge in the western mountains, many being
    forced to cross the water to Ireland. The descendants of these
    people now live in Cornwall and in Wales and they are quite
    different from the people of the rest of England. This is a very
    pleasant retelling of one of their folk tales.

Down by St. Just, not far from Cape Cornwall and the sea, is a small
hill, called "The Gump", where the Small People used to hold their
revels, and where our grandfathers and grandmothers used to be allowed
to stand and look on and listen.

People believed in the Fairies in those days, so the Fairies in return
often helped the people, and did them all sorts of kindnesses. Indeed,
they would do so now if folks had not grown so learned and
disbelieving. It seems strange that because they have got more
knowledge of some matters, they should have grown more ignorant of
others, and declare that there never were such things as Fairies, just
because they have neither eyes nor minds to see them!

Of course, no one could expect the sensitive little creatures to
appear when they are sneered at and scoffed at. All the same, though,
they are as much about us as ever they were, and if you or I, who do
believe in the Little People, were to go to the Gump on the right
nights at the right hour, we should see them feasting and dancing and
holding their revels just as of old. If, though, you do go, you must
be very careful to keep at a distance, and not to trespass on their
fairy ground, for that is a great offense.

There was, once upon a time, a grasping mean old fellow who did so,
and pretty well he was punished for his daring. It is his story I am
going to tell you.

Well, this old man used to listen to the tales the people told of the
Fairies and their riches, and their wonderful treasures, until he
could scarcely bear to hear any more, he longed so to have some of
those riches for himself; and at last his covetousness grew so great,
that he said to himself he must and would have some, or he should die
of vexation.

So one night, when the Harvest Moon was at the full, he started off
alone, and very stealthily, to walk to the Gump, for he did not want
his neighbors to know anything at all about his plans. He was very
nervous, for it is a very desolate spot, but his greed was greater
than his fear, and he made himself go forward, though he longed all
the time to hurry home to the safe shelter of his house and his bed.

When he was still at some distance from the enchanted spot, strains of
the most exquisite music anyone could possibly imagine reached his
ear, and as he stood listening it seemed to come nearer and nearer
until, at last, it was close about him. The most wonderful part,
though, of it all was that there was nothing to be seen, no person, no
bird, not an animal even. The empty moor stretched away on every side,
the Gump lay bare and desolate before him. The only living being on it
that night was himself.

The music, indeed, seemed to come from under the ground, and such
strange music it was, too, so gentle, so touching, it made the old
miser weep, in spite of himself, and then, even while the tears were
still running down his cheeks, he was forced to laugh quite merrily,
and even to dance, though he certainly did not want to do either.
After that it was not surprising that he found himself marching along,
step and step, keeping time with the music as it played first slowly
and with stately tread, then fast and lively.

All the time, though, that he was laughing and weeping, marching or
dancing, his wicked mind was full of thoughts as to how he should get
at the fairy treasure.

At last, when he got close to the Gump, the music ceased, and
suddenly, with a loud crashing noise which nearly scared the old man
out of his senses, the whole hill seemed to open as if by magic, and
in one instant every spot was lighted up. Thousands of little lights
of all colors gleamed everywhere, silver stars twinkled and sparkled
on every furze-bush, tiny lamps hung from every blade of grass. It was
a more lovely sight than one ever sees nowadays. Then, out from the
open hill marched troops of little Spriggans.

Spriggans, you must know, are the Small People who live in rocks and
stones, and cromlechs, the most mischievous, thievish little creatures
that ever lived, and woe betide anyone who meddles with their
dwelling-places.

Well, first came all those Spriggans, and then a large band of musicians
followed by troops of soldiers, each troop carrying a beautiful banner,
which waved and streamed out as though a brisk breeze were blowing,
whereas in reality there was not a breath of wind stirring.

These hosts of Little People quickly took up their places in perfect
order all about the Gump, and, though they appeared quite unconscious
of his presence, a great number formed a ring all around the old man.
He was greatly amazed, but, "Never mind," he thought, "they are such
little whipper-snappers I can easily squash them with my foot if they
try on any May-games with me."

As soon as the musicians, the Spriggans, and the soldiers had arranged
themselves, out came a lot of servants carrying most lovely gold and
silver vessels, goblets, too, cut out of single rubies, and diamonds,
and emeralds, and every kind of precious stone. Then came others
bearing rich meats and pastry, luscious fruits and preserves,
everything, in fact, that one could think of that was dainty and
appetizing. Each servant placed his burden on the tables in its proper
place, then silently retired.

Can you not imagine how the glorious scene dazzled the old man, and
how his eyes glistened, and his fingers itched to grab at some of the
wonderful things and carry them off? He knew that even one only of
those flashing goblets would make him rich for ever.

He was just thinking that nowhere in the world could there be a more
beautiful sight, when, lo and behold! the illumination became twenty
times as brilliant, and out of the hill came thousands and thousands
of exquisitely dressed ladies and gentlemen, all in rows, each
gentleman leading a lady, and all marching in perfect time and order.

They came in companies of a thousand each, and each company was
differently attired. In the first the gentlemen were all dressed in
yellow satin covered with copper-colored spangles; on their heads they
wore copper-colored helmets with waving, yellow plumes, and on their
feet yellow shoes with copper heels. The flashing of the copper in the
moonlight was almost blinding. Their companions all were dressed alike
in white satin gowns edged with large turquoises, and on their tiny
feet pale blue shoes with buckles formed of one large turquoise set in
pearls.

The gentlemen conducted the ladies to their places on the Gump, and with
a courtly bow left them, themselves retiring to a little distance. The
next troop then came up; in this the gentlemen were all attired in black
trimmed with silver, silver helmets with black plumes, black stockings
and silver shoes. Their ladies were dressed in pink embroidered in gold,
with waving pink plumes in their hair, and golden buckles on their pink
shoes. In the next troop the men were dressed in blue and white, and
the ladies in green, with diamonds all around the hem of the gown,
flashing in their hair, and hanging in long ropes from their necks; on
their green shoes single diamonds blazed and flashed.

So they came, troop after troop, more than I can describe, or you
could remember, only I must tell you that the last of all were the
most lovely. The ladies, all of whom had dark hair, were clad in white
velvet lined with the palest violet silk, while round the hems of the
skirts and on the bodices were bands of soft white swansdown.
Swansdown also edged the little violet cloaks which hung from their
shoulders. I cannot describe to you how beautiful they looked, with
their rosy, smiling faces, and long black curls. On their heads they
wore little silver crowns set with amethysts; amethysts, too, sparkled
on their necks and over their gowns. In their hands they carried long
trails of the lovely blossom of the wistaria. Their companions were
clad in white and green, and in their left hands they carried silver
rods with emerald stars at the top.

It really seemed at one time as though the troops of Little People would
never cease pouring out of the hill. They did so at last, though, and as
soon as all were in their places the music suddenly changed.

The old man by this time seemed able to see more clearly, and hear more
distinctly, and his sense of smell grew keener. Never were such flashing
gems as here, never had any flowers such scents as these that were here.

There were now thousands of little ladies gathered on the Gump, and
these all broke out into song at the same instant. The words were in
an unknown tongue, but the song was evidently about some great
personages who were about to emerge from the amazing hill, for again
it opened, and again poured forth a crowd of Small People.

First of all came a bevy of little girls in white gauze, scattering
flowers, which as soon as they touched the ground, sprang up into full
life and threw out leaves and more flowers, full of exquisite scents;
then came a number of boys playing on shells as though they were
harps, and making ravishing music, while after them came hundreds and
hundreds of little men clad in green and gold, followed by a perfect
forest of banners spreading and waving on the air.

Then last, but more beautiful than all that had gone before, was
carried a raised platform covered with silk embroidered with real
gold, and edged with crystals, and on the platform were seated a
prince and princess of such surpassing loveliness that no words can be
found to describe them. They were dressed in the richest velvet, and
covered with precious stones which blazed and sparkled in the myriad
lights until the eye could scarce bear to look at them.

Over her lovely robe the princess's hair flowed down to the floor,
where it rested in great shining, golden waves. In her hand she held a
golden sceptre, on the top of which blazed a diamond as large as a
walnut, while the prince carried one with a sapphire of equal size.
After a deal of marching backwards and forwards, the platform was
placed on the highest point of the Gump, which was now a hill of
flowers, and every fairy walked up and bowed, said something to the
prince and princess, and passed on to a seat at the tables.

At length all were seated, whereupon the prince gave a signal, on
which a number of footmen came forward carrying a table laden with
dainty food in solid gold dishes, and wines in goblets of precious
stones which they placed on the platform before the prince and
princess. As soon as the royal pair began to eat, all the hosts around
them followed their example, and such a merry, jovial meal they had.
The viands disappeared as fast as they could go, laughter and talk
sounded on all sides, and never a sign did any of them give that they
knew that a human being was watching them.

"Ah!" thought the old miser to himself. "I can't get all I'd like to,
but if I could reach up to the prince's table I could get enough at
one grab to set me up for life!"

Stooping down, he slowly and stealthily dragged himself nearer and
nearer to the table. He felt quite sure that no one could see him.
What he himself did not see was that hundreds of wicked little
Spriggans had tied ropes on to him and were holding fast to the ends.
He crawled and crawled so slowly and carefully that it took him some
time to get over the ground, but he managed it at last, and got quite
close up to the lovely little pair. Once there he paused for a moment
and looked back,--perhaps to see if the way was clear for him to run
when he had done what he meant to do. He was rather startled to find
that all was as dark as dark could be, and that he could see nothing
at all behind him. However, he tried to cheer himself by thinking it
was only that his eyes were dazzled by looking at the bright lights so
long. He was even more startled, though, when he turned round to the
Gump again, to find that every eye of all those hundreds and thousands
of fairies on the hill was looking straight into his eyes.

At first he was really frightened, but as they did nothing but look,
he told himself that they could not really be gazing at him, and grew
braver with the thought. Then slowly bringing up his hat, as a boy
does to catch a butterfly, he was just going to bring it down on the
silken platform and capture prince and princess, table, gold dishes
and all, when hark! A shrill whistle sounded, the old man's hand, with
the hat in it, was paralyzed in the air, so that he could not move it
backwards or forwards, and in an instant every light went out, and all
was pitchy darkness.

There was a whir-r-r and a buzz, and a whir-r-r, as if a swarm of bees
were flying by him, and the old man felt himself fastened so securely
to the ground that, do what he would, he could not move an inch, and
all the time he felt himself being pinched, and pricked, and tweaked
from top to toe, so that not an inch of him was free from torment. He
was lying on his back at the foot of the Gump, though how he got there
he could never tell. His arms were stretched out and fastened down, so
that he could not do anything to drive off his tormentors, his legs
were so secured that he could not even relieve himself by kicking, and
his tongue was tied with cords, so that he could not call out.

There he lay, no one knows how long, for to him it seemed hours, and
no one else but the fairies knew anything about it. At last he felt a
lot of little feet running over him, but whose they were he had no
idea until something perched on his nose, and by the light of the moon
he saw it was a Spriggan. His wicked old heart sank when he realized
that he had got into their clutches, for all his life he had heard
what wicked little creatures they were.

The little imp on his nose kicked and danced and stamped about in great
delight at finding himself perched up so high. We all know how painful
it is to have one's nose knocked, even ever so little, so you may
imagine that the old miser did not enjoy himself at all. Master Spriggan
did, though. He roared with laughter, as though he were having a huge
joke, until at last, rising suddenly to his feet and standing on the
tips of his tiny toes, he shouted sharply, "Away! away! I smell the
day!" and to the old man's great relief off he flew in a great hurry,
followed by all his mischievous little companions who had been playing
games, and running races all over their victim's body.

Left at last to himself, the mortified old man lay for some time,
thinking over all that had happened, trying to collect his senses, and
wondering how he should manage to escape from his bonds, for he might
lie there for a week without any human being coming near the place.

Till sunrise he lay there, trying to think of some plan, and then,
what do you think he saw? Why, that he had not been tied down by ropes
at all, but only by thousands of gossamer webs! And there they were
now, all over him, with the dew on them sparkling like the diamonds
that the princess had worn the night before. And those dewdrop
diamonds were all the jewels he got for his night's work.

When he made this discovery he turned over and groaned and wept with
rage and shame, and never, to his dying day, could he bear to look at
sparkling gold or gems.

At last, afraid lest he should be missed, and searchers be sent out to
look for him, he got up, brushed off the dewy webs, and putting on his
battered old hat, crept slowly home. He was wet through with dew,
cold, full of rheumatism, and very much ashamed of himself.

Very good care he took to keep that night's experiences to himself. No
one must know his shame.

Years after, though, when he had become a changed man, and repented of
his former greediness, he let out the story bit by bit to be a lesson
to others, until his friends and neighbors, who loved to listen to
anything about fairies, had gathered it all as I have told it to you
here. And you may be quite sure it is all true, for the old man was
not clever enough to invent it.

                       --_From "Strange Stories from Cornwall",
                                          by Mabel Quiller-Couch._




THINKING AND DOING


    Arrange your papers with your name and grade on the first line;
    place the date and your room or teacher's name on the second line;
    leave the third line blank, and, beginning with the fourth line,
    number the lines from 1 to 6. This exercise is to help you read
    quietly and accurately. See that you understand all the directions
    in each problem before you attempt to carry them out. On the other
    hand, work as quickly as you can.

1. If Christopher Columbus lived before George Washington, make a
cross on the first line, but if George Washington lived before
Columbus, write the word _old_ there.

2. An egg which is not fresh will float in salt water. Out of a dozen
eggs seven floated and five sank.

Were there more fresh eggs or more stale eggs in the dozen? Write your
answer on the second line.

  3.     "And what is so rare as a day in June?
          Then if ever come perfect days."

This is a quotation from a poem by James Russell Lowell. If you think
from these lines that the poet prefers June weather to October
weather, write the word _summer_ on the third line. If you think he
prefers October weather, write the word _autumn_ there.

4. At an army camp in Georgia the flag on the flag-staff at
headquarters was blowing toward Washington, D. C.

From what general direction was the wind? Write your answer on the
fourth line.

5. All the education of the middle ages was to be found in the
monasteries.

From this fact which would you expect to find the better educated,
churchmen or soldiers?

6. If pink is lighter than red, and red is lighter than purple, which
of these colors is darker than red?




A TRIP TO THE MOON


    You should all begin reading at the same time.

    This is a selection that you can read easily. You will have to pay
    close attention, however, because you will be asked questions about
    the interesting facts told here.

    Your teacher will decide when to have you close your books. Then she
    will have a contest between the boys and girls or between sections
    of the class to see which group can answer the questions better.

When we were very young we had a nursery rhyme which told of an old
witch who rode away upon a broomstick to sweep the cobwebs from the
sky. Of course we understood that it was just a nonsense rhyme. But
nowadays when people can really fly up in the air, not on broomsticks
but on aeroplanes, it does not seem so nonsensical.

Suppose we agree to take a trip, in our imagination, right away up
into the sky till we reach the moon! Of course, we can never hope
really to fly to the moon. One reason is that the air goes up only a
comparatively short distance. But you can do wonderful things in your
imagination! We shall suppose we have a machine that does not require
air in which to fly, and that we can live very comfortably in an
enclosed cabin attached to this wonderful flying machine.

At what speed are we going to make our machine fly? Some aeroplanes have
traveled more than one hundred miles in an hour, but that speed will be
far too slow for us because we have such great distances to go.

Flying at one hundred miles per hour, we should not reach the moon for
three months. And the moon is our nearest neighbor in space. The sun
is four hundred times as far away as the moon, so it would take us a
hundred years to reach the sun. And even this far-distant sun seems a
near neighbor when we think of the distance from us to the fixed
stars. To reach the nearest of the stars it would take us millions of
years. I am not going to ask you to imagine yourself living for
millions of years, shut up in the cabin of our flying machine. It is
quite evident that we must increase the speed of our machine. Suppose
we make it go as fast as a ray of light can travel! How fast is that?

The speed of light is so great than any race we set for it on this
earth seems no time at all. You know that it takes us several months
to travel round this world in a steamer. Of course we could go far
faster in a flying machine. But even if we could keep flying all the
time at one hundred miles per hour, it would take us ten days.

Suppose now that it were possible to send a ray of light on this same
journey around the world. It would have traveled right round before
you could count "one". Indeed it could travel five hundred times round
the world in one minute. That may help to give you some vague sort of
idea of the speed at which our flying machine is to travel.

Even at this unthinkable speed, it would take us about four years to
reach the nearest star. Does it really take light several years to
travel from a star to us? It does; it takes light hundreds of years to
reach us from some of the distant stars. If one of these far-distant
stars should disappear suddenly, you and I would know nothing about
the change. When we looked up into the sky we should still see the
star shining away year after year. Our children and our grandchildren
would still believe the star to be where it had been always, for the
last rays of light, sent out by the star before it disappeared, would
take hundreds of years to reach this world. There is no hope of our
ever reaching these very distant stars in our imaginary flying
machine; it would be too big a tax on our imagination to live in the
cabin of our machine for hundreds of years.

For the present we shall be content with a trip to the moon. But one
boy says that he cannot imagine our flying machine forcing its way
through the air at the enormous speed at which light travels. Even
when traveling by motor car, at the comparative snail-pace of, say,
forty miles per hour, we have to see that hats and veils are well
fastened on. This boy says that he has been told that a good deal of
the additional energy required to drive a train at sixty miles an hour
is used up in forcing the train through the ocean of air.

We quite agree with this boy that it would be very difficult to imagine
our machine traveling through the air at the speed of light. We shall
get over this difficulty by making our machine not exceed one hundred
miles per hour so long as we are in the ocean of air. When we get beyond
this great blanket of air, we can increase our speed to that of light.

I am very glad that we have come to this arrangement, for I had just
been thinking that our journey to the moon would be a very disappointing
one, as it would have taken only about one second to get there. Now our
journey will be much slower and we shall have time to look about us.

When we emerge from the misty clouds we cannot see the instruments for
the moisture on the window. By the time it clears we are about two
miles upwards off the earth. We find that the temperature has fallen
down below freezing-point. We are rather surprised, as it looks lovely
and warm in the sunshine. The moment we shoot above the clouds we are
in the sunshine, with the sea of clouds below us. Our thermometer is
placed in the shade, so that the direct rays of the sun cannot reach
it, as we wish to know the temperature of the surrounding air.

The reason why it is colder here than down on the surface of the earth
is that we have climbed out of the thickest part of the great blanket of
air which serves to keep you warm. The air is what you might describe as
much thicker near the earth, but, to speak more correctly, we should say
that the air is much denser at the surface of the earth. Up here it is
much flimsier. One girl says that she climbed a high mountain with her
father, on a beautiful summer day, and it was so cold on the top of the
mountain they could not stay there many minutes.

We keep rushing upwards and in half an hour we know that we must be
about fifty miles from the earth, as we have been traveling at the
rate of one hundred miles per hour. The air at this height is so rare
that we could not possibly live in it. It is a good thing that we are
in an enclosed cabin, and have plenty of fresh air in liquid form,
which gives off ordinary air just at the rate we require it.

We know that in about an hour and a half we should be clear of the
atmosphere altogether, and that we may travel thereafter at the speed
of light, which means about eleven million miles per minute.

One little girl says she is feeling very sleepy, and as she was too
excited to sleep much last night, I advise her to lie down and have a
sleep now; we shall waken her when we arrive at the moon.

Imagine then that we have arrived at the moon. It looks like our own
world, "the earth," only there is nothing growing on it; it seems to
be all bare rocks. But the mountains look very high; some of them are
really higher than the highest mountains on the earth.

Most of the children in our cabin say that they thought the moon was
quite smooth, and had a sort of polished surface. When they were told
that the moon did not send out light, but merely reflected the light
of the sun, they pictured some sort of mirror-like surface.

We are startled by a sudden cry of surprise behind us; the little girl
who was sleeping has wakened up, and looking out of the window behind
us, she calls: "Oh! look how huge the moon has grown! It is far, far
bigger than the sun!"

Looking out at her window, we see what does look like a giant moon.
But our little friend is very much surprised when I tell her that that
is old Mother Earth, and that the rocky mountains close to us are part
of the moon. But how can the earth shine like the moon? In exactly the
same way as the moon shines; both merely reflect the light sent out by
the sun.

We can scarcely believe that this "huge half-moon", standing out so
clearly against a jet-black sky, is really the earth which we left a
few hours ago in broad daylight. But the people on the part of it
which we speak of as shining like the moon are still in broad
daylight. Those people living on the half of the great globe which
appears dark to us are in darkness except for the light which is
reaching them from this moon up here where we are at present.

One boy says that some of the astronomers on the earth may be looking
at us through their telescopes, and he starts making Boy Scout signals
with his arms. He is disappointed when I tell him that the very best
telescope on earth would not enable the astronomers to see our flying
machine even as a speck on the face of the moon. If our machine had
been as big as one of our largest buildings, it could then have been
seen as a tiny dot.

But we cannot help staring at that great ball on which we live, and
which we left so recently. This distant view gives us a good idea of
how much bigger the earth is than the moon. Of course if you look down
at the moon at present you can get no idea of its size; you can see
only a small part of it, just as you could see only a small part of
the earth until you made this imaginary voyage skywards. But you can
remember what the moon looked like when you saw it from the earth.

Looking back now at the far-distant earth, you would say that it was
much more than four times the size of the moon. When we are comparing
the sizes of the earth and the moon, and the other heavenly bodies, it
is usual to speak of their diameters. The word _diameter_ is made out
of two Greek words which mean _a measure through_. The diameter of the
moon or of the earth is just the distance right through the center
from one side to the other. We say that the diameter of the earth is
four times as great as the diameter of the moon, but the earth could
contain sixty-four moons.

Suppose we take a quiet cruise about the moon in our imaginary flying
machine. One boy remarks that he is glad it is a fine day, for, although
we cannot leave the cabin of our flying machine, we can see much better
on a fine day. Another boy says he guesses that if we were to stay here
for a hundred years it would be fine every day. He is quite right. There
are no clouds around the moon, and so there cannot be any rain.

When we looked at the moon from the earth, the moon's surface seemed to
be beautifully smooth, but now that we have traveled to it in our flying
machine we find it to be anything but smooth. It seems to be covered
entirely with high mountains, and great rings of mountains. One boy says
that those large basins formed by the rings of mountains remind him of
some mountains that he saw on the earth, and that he was told the
mountains had formed the crater of a great volcano in the long ago.

But what is a volcano? Although a volcano is described often as a
burning mountain, it is not really burning, but it has a large chimney
in the center of it reaching far down into the earth. Great quantities
of molten rock-material are hurled up this chimney while the volcano
is active. There are a few active volcanoes on the earth today, but
there are traces of very many more that have long ceased to be active.

One boy hopes that we may find an active volcano as we cruise around
the moon, but he will be disappointed. The moon is no longer a hot
body like the earth, and the earth used to be very much hotter than at
present, when there were a great many volcanoes at work.

Looking at the moon, we can see that it must have been very hot at one
time also; it seems so covered with volcanic mountains that one ring
sometimes overlaps another.

But what is this huge dark-colored part of the moon? One boy guesses
that it is a sea or a lake, and when I tell him that there is no water
on the moon he is very much surprised. He says that there must have
been water at one time, for he has seen a map of the moon, and it
contained a lot of Latin names which his tutor told him meant the Sea
of Rains, the Sea of Tranquillity, the Lake of Dreams, and so on.

No doubt the map which the boy saw was quite a correct map of the moon,
for we speak of those dark patches as seas and lakes, although we know
now that no water exists, and probably never existed, on the moon.

It is those great dark patches on the moon which seem to form the
man's face; this dark patch which we are coming to is the one which
forms his right eye. It is called the Sea of Rains.

How bright the mountains look in the sunshine, and how black their
shadows are. That is because there is no air. Notice how very clearly
you can see the far-distant mountain ranges. You can scarcely believe
me when I tell you that the mountains on either side of that great
crater are more than one hundred miles apart. But do you not remember
how the mountains on the earth have appeared to us sometimes to be
very much nearer than usual? If you asked the reason for this, you
were told that it was because the atmosphere happened to be
particularly clear. Well! here on the moon we have no air at all and
that is why we can see everything so very clearly.

One little girl says that she had been wondering why there is nothing
growing on the moon, but now she sees that not even grass, nor moss, nor
heather could grow, since there is no air and no water. Not only are the
mountains bare rock, but the whole surface of the land is the same.

                         --_From "The Stars and Their Mysteries",
                                      by Charles R. Gibson, F.R.S.E._


QUESTIONS

    1. Why can no aeroplane ever fly to the moon?

    2. How long would it take an aeroplane flying 100 miles an hour to
    reach the moon?

    3. How much farther away is the sun than the moon?

    4. Give some idea how far away the fixed stars are.

    5. Why is it colder as we rise up in the air?

    6. What does the surface of the moon look like?

    7. How would the earth look to a person on the moon?

    8. How much larger is the earth than the moon?

    9. What is the weather on the moon?

    10. What is a volcano?

    11. Why could you see a long distance on the moon?

    12. Why does nothing grow on the moon?


       *       *       *       *       *




Transcriber's Notes:


Page x: There is a split hyphenated word in the table. It was done
to shorten the width of the table.

Page 25: Added starting quote mark. (... the Swallow, "and the ...)

Page 28: Added starting quote mark. (...the Mayor. "We must ...)

Page 47: Added the word "to", looks like it was omitted by the
printer. (... to walk to town; will ...)

Corrected obvious spelling and punctuation errors throughout.

The "parfleches" is mispelled "parfleshes" throughout the text. The
text as has been left unchanged.

There are several words that appear both as a hypenated word and an
un-hyphenated word in the text, such as "hill-side" and "hillside".
The text as has been left unchanged.